JP2022125338A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's interest in a game.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a game area in which balls can flow down; storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing entering balls; specific ball entry means in which privilege advantageous to a player is granted based on entry of game balls; operation means that the player can operate; storage control means for varying the storage means from a storage state capable of storing balls to a cancellation state for canceling the storage state, based on operation to the operation means; varying means capable of varying to a first state in which balls flowing out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by varying to the cancellation state by the storage control means and a second state in which the balls that flow out hardly enter the specific ball entry means; and variation control means for performing variable control of the varying means according to a predetermined variation pattern.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding game balls struck on a game board, and the game balls held in the holding device are made to flow down to a ball entrance by a player's releasing operation. Some have configurations. In this conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing for the game balls held in the holding device to flow down. This was intended to increase interest.

JP 2006-95235 A

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a game area in which balls can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing entering balls, and a game ball in which the game balls enter. specific ball entry means for giving advantageous benefits to the player based on the above, an operation means operable by the player, and a storage state in which the balls can be stored in the storage means based on the operation of the operation means. a storage control means for changing the storage state to a release state for releasing the storage state; and a second state in which it is difficult for the outflowing ball to enter the specific ball-entering means. and a control means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a ball entering means is provided in the game area and is capable of allowing a ball to enter; a determination means for executing, an effect execution means for executing an effect for suggesting a determination result by the determination means, and a privilege for executing a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result and game executing means, wherein the effect executing means executes a specific effect suggesting that it is time to operate the operating means when a predetermined condition is established.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising storage determination means for determining that the storage means is storing balls, and the storage determination means causes the storage means to store balls. At least one of the conditions for satisfying the predetermined condition is that it is determined to be stored.

Claim 4 is a gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the operation timing suggested by the specific effect executed by the effect executing means is a case where the operation is executed at that operation timing. At least one ball flowing out from the storage means is set to be movable to the variable means which is changed to the second state.

A gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the effect execution means is based on the operation of the operation means during the period in which the specific effect is being executed. Then, a notification effect is executed to notify information based on the result of determination by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the game area in which the ball can flow down, the storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entering ball, and the game based on the entering of the game ball. A specific ball entry means that gives a privilege advantageous to a player, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and the storage means is changed from a storage state in which balls can be stored to the storage state based on the operation of the operation means. and a first state in which a ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means. and a second state in which it is difficult for the outflowing ball to enter the specific ball-entering means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means in accordance with a predetermined variable pattern. have.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effects are achieved. Namely, a ball entering means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determining means for performing determination when a ball enters the ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means are suggested. and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the performance execution means has a predetermined When the condition is established, a specific effect is executed to suggest that it is time to operate the operating means.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the condition for establishing the predetermined condition is that the storage means has a storage determination means for determining that the ball is stored, and that the storage determination means has determined that the storage means is storing the ball. is at least one of

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball does not flow out from the storage means even though the operation means is operated at the operation timing suggested by the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 2 or 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the operation timing suggested by the specific effect executed by the effect execution means is such that at least one ball flowing out from the storage means is changed to the second state when the operation is performed at the operation timing. It is set so as to be movable up to the variable means.

As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the effect execution means executes a notification effect of notifying information based on the determination result of the determination means based on the fact that the operation means is operated during the period in which the specific effect is being executed. .

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is the front view which expanded the lower right area|region (III part in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the upper limit number of balls are stored in the storage device, and (b) is a state in which the first storage device is released and the movable valve is in an induction state ( FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where a projecting state is reached. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the first storage device is in the released state and the movable valve is in the restricted state (buried state), and (b) is a schematic diagram in which the first storage device is in the storage state. and is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the second storage device is in a released state. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the retention valve solenoid when the first retention device is in the release state and the second retention device is in the retention state; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the reservoir valve solenoid when the second reservoir is in the released state; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the operation of the second frame button (release button) and various devices. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing points for setting the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) in the timing effect (operation effect); FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during the advance notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and (b) is a timing effect (operation effect). FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents inside. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents during a timing effect (operation effect). (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the display contents during the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the variable display of the special symbols. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content during the timing production|presentation (operation production|presentation) performed during the variable display of a special symbol. (a), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the big-hit confirmation display screen. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of setting the display position of the display pointer based on the timing at which a ball can be entered into a specific general entrance and music information executed in a timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content of the difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level to be executed in the first round of the jackpot game. 18A is a schematic diagram showing the shielding state of the cover member, and FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram showing the transmission state of the cover member. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a table for variable probability/working time, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a table for chance. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a movable valve operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a movable valve operation scenario table. It is the figure which showed the outline|summary of various counters. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the main controller; FIG. 2(a) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device, and FIG. 3(b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a movable valve operation scenario; 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a music information storage area; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the look-ahead process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing storage control processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is the flowchart which showed the storage valve operation|movement process performed by MPU in a main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing a movable valve control process executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flow chart showing a prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; Fig. 10 is a flow chart illustrating a movable valve state command process performed by the MPU within the audio ramp controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart illustrating reservoir related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the hit-related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation processing during a jackpot performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing ball passage monitoring processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a storage state monitoring process executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing lamp output processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp controller; It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the timing production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot timing production preset process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a normal timing production executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing presetting processing; It is the flowchart which showed the timing production|presentation common setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the timing production|presentation correction|amendment process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a movable valve operation counter update process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; It is the front view which expanded the lower right area|region (III section in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic plan view of a first frame button and a second frame button, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an interlocking operation configuration of the first frame button and the second frame button. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the first frame button is pressed in the released state in which the interlocking means is buried; It is a schematic diagram showing a pressed state. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing display contents of a timing effect (operation effect) in the second embodiment; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a player operates a frame button unit, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a configuration of the frame button unit. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the frame button unit is operated (depressed) in a state where the pressing action of the second frame button of the frame button unit is restricted; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the frame button unit is operated (depressed) in a state where the depressing action of the second frame button is released; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in another example of each embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in another example of each embodiment.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 and 5 are schematic diagrams showing the ball flow inside the board unit 700, and FIG. 6 is a storage valve solenoid provided in the board unit 700. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device 65, etc. can be attached to and detached from the front side of the inner frame 12. is attached to the A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 19) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. A metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15. The front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 can be opened and closed by using the hinge 19 side as an opening/closing axis. A unit 15 is supported on the front side so that it can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. . On the other hand, on the right side of the lower tray unit 15, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is provided. a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation, a push-button type stopping switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is detected by a change in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of game balls detected may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

A first frame button (effect button) 22a is provided at the center of the lower plate unit 15, and a second frame button (release button) 22b is provided at the upper portion of the lower plate. The first frame button 22a is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later. It is operated by the player when releasing the storage state of the device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771). By arranging a plurality of frame buttons (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) that can be operated by the player at the center and left sides of the pachinko machine 10, The frame buttons can be easily operated even when the operating handle 51 provided is being operated (the player is operating the operating handle with the right hand).

In addition, a ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when the balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general ball entrance 63, a The first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are used for playing games. It is fixed by wood screws or the like from the front side of the board 13 . Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13, and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a starting port and the like are arranged and the shot ball is area). In addition, the game area includes all areas where the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the prize winning port (entering ball port).

In this pachinko machine 10, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (the left side when the game board 13 is viewed from the front) is formed as a left game area, and the right side is formed as a right game area. In the left-handed game), a game is performed in which a ball is entered into the general ball entrance 63 or the first ball entrance 64, and the ball is aimed at the right game area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). ), a game is played in which the shot ball passes above the variable display unit 80 and aims at the board unit 700 provided in the right game area. The pachinko machine 10 configured in this way prevents the game from becoming monotonous by allowing the player to play a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) according to the game state. A detailed description of each game state and the board unit 700 provided in the right game area will be given later.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 is continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 19) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) lottery is conducted, and the ball enters the through gate (normal When passing through the ball entrance) 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls are won). ) is opened, and the opening is repeated the number of times (the number of rounds) corresponding to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot types of special symbols, three types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot C" are provided, and after the special game state is finished, as an added value after the jackpot is finished, a game based on the result of the jackpot game (game value) is given to the player. The three types of "jackpots A to C" are determined when a jackpot is won in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is a type of jackpot to be obtained, and a lottery (hereinafter referred to as a first special symbol lottery) that is executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. and a lottery (hereinafter referred to as a lottery for the second special symbol) triggered by the entry of a ball, so that the ratio of selection when a big hit is won is different.

When the lottery for the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 90 seconds) has passed, the result of the lottery is displayed. A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each game is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is carried out. , the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, whether or not the normal symbol wins is determined. When the normal pattern hits, the second ball entrance 640 is opened by changing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). be released. It should be noted that normally, the second ball entrance 640 is closed because the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position. Therefore, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

In addition, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second or 30 seconds) has passed, the lottery is performed. A normal symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is changed to the first symbol. It is displayed by the display device 37 and is also indicated by the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of pending balls for the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and according to the lottery. variable display is started.

As described above, three types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot C" are provided as the jackpot types of special symbols. When "jackpot A" and "jackpot C" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16-round jackpot). On the other hand, when the "jackpot B" is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 8 rounds (8-round jackpot). In addition, when "jackpot B" and "jackpot C" are reached, the game shifts to a high-probability state (during probability variation of special patterns) in which the probability of jackpots of special patterns increases after the completion of the jackpot. In the game state in which the high probability state of the special design is provided, the probability of winning the normal design (second design) is also high and the fluctuation time of the normal design is short, that is, attached to the second ball entrance 640 A state (time-saving state) is also provided in which the electric accessory 640a is opened and the ball is easily entered into the second ball inlet 640.例文帳に追加The high probability state and time saving state of this special pattern continue until the next big hit is won. On the other hand, when the "jackpot A" is reached, only the time-saving state described above is provided after the jackpot ends. In this case, the time-saving state continues from after the end of the jackpot until the variation of the special symbol ends 100 times (until the 101st variation starts).

Here, the "special symbol high probability state" means a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is up, the so-called "special symbol high probability state" (probability change state of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state It is a game state that easily shifts to (jackpot). On the other hand, if it is not a "special symbol high probability state", it is called a "special symbol low probability state", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of a special symbol, that is, the probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, "time saving state of normal design" (high probability state of normal design) means that the winning probability of normal design is increased and the fluctuation time of the second special design is shortened, and the lottery of the second special design is executed. It refers to the easy game state. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal design", it is called "normal state of normal design" (low probability state of normal design), which means that the probability of winning normal design is normal, that is, during time saving Indicates a low probability of winning.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the special symbol definite variable period. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as time-shortening of normal symbols.

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is varied according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common (for example, all 8 rounds) for all jackpot types. Further, for example, the period during which the "time-saving state of normal symbols" is changed may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the ``time-saving state of normal symbols'' is reached, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, or the electric accessory is released for one normal symbol. It is also possible to change the number of times. In addition, in this embodiment, the type of the jackpot determines the privilege to be given after the jackpot ends. You may make it give the probability variation state of a special design, or the time-saving state of a normal design. In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability variation state of the special design is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won, but like the time-saving state of the normal design, the number of special design fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is a predetermined number of times ( For example, 100 times), the probability change state of the special design continues only until it becomes, or the lottery that shifts (falls) from the probability change state of the special design to the normal state of the special design every time the fluctuation of the special design is started. It may be executed, and the probability variation state of the special symbol may continue during the period until the lottery is won. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time saving state of the normal design is given during the probability change state of the special design, but even during the probability change state of the special design, the game state (so-called latent state) that does not give the time saving state of the normal design Probability change state) may be provided.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the special symbol lottery that is performed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is displayed. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters. The number of times is reserved up to four times for each ball entrance, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four. The number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, it may be set so that the total number of balls entered into a plurality of ball entrances is suspended until the number reaches the upper limit (for example, 8).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot, an error display, and the like. The LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, or blue), and the combination of the emitted colors enables various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (high-probability state of special symbols) to be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates the big hit if the big hit is a special symbol corresponding to the big hit A to D. (first pattern) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general ball entrances 63 through which a predetermined number (for example, five) of balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter the game area. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Also, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third pattern display device 81, or the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 8 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 8(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, and helmets that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is attached to the lower right side of the attached symbol in a small green color and displayed in front of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11) to be described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Also, when a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big winning moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. A situation in which no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 even though the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) is rare. In most cases, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new ball entrance. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image. A third pattern is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with different types of special symbols (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) that are likely to be drawn according to the game state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed in the current gaming state is executed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery that is difficult to be drawn in the current gaming state is executed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a total of three main patterns of the third pattern different from the main pattern displayed in the main display area Dm are displayed in the right small area Ds3. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy wearing a headband in this embodiment) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character performs a specific action. A notice effect is performed by appearing or the like.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variation display based on the first special symbol lottery is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and , When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is being performed, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is It is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and is also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Specifically, the pattern displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 (first reserved ball number pattern) indicates the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64, and the pattern displayed in the lower half (second Retained ball number pattern) indicates the number of retained balls for the second ball entrance 640 . FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all second reserved symbols are blank).

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery is being executed as the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67. Or, as a stop pattern after the end of the variation, a normal pattern (second pattern) according to the lottery result of the normal pattern is indicated by the lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through either the left or right through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) of "○" is displayed. A variable display is performed in which the "x" pattern is alternately lit. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (“○” symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an actuated state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second ball inlet 640 is achieved. The number of times the ball passes through the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84. Lights up. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of balls that pass through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times, as in the case of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but is 3 times or less, or , 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. Also, the first ball entry hole 64 is also one of the winning holes through which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. This first ball entrance 64 is better when the ball is hit to the path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front (when a so-called left-handed game is played), when a right-handed game is played. It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball.

On the other hand, a board unit 700 is arranged below the right side area of the game board area. This board unit includes a through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a specific general ball entrance 630, and storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) are provided (see FIG. 3). A cover member 710 is provided on a part of the board unit 700 so that a specific channel (a channel through which balls stored in the storage device flow down) in the board unit 700 is difficult to see from the outside. It is configured.

Here, the board unit 700 arranged in the lower right area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the lower right area of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the board unit 700 includes an inflow port 700a that opens upward so that the balls flowing down the right game area of the game board 13 can flow in, and a ball that flows in from the inflow port 700a. Among them, the ball that does not enter each ball entrance provided in the board unit (the specific general ball entrance 630, the second ball entrance 640, and the specific winning hole 65a) is discharged out of the board unit 700. It is a box-shaped unit body having an outlet 700b.

Inside the board unit 700, a through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 is provided below the inflow port 700a, and most of the balls that flow into the board unit 700 from the inflow port 700a pass through the through gate (normal ball entrance). mouth) 67. Under the through gate 67, an electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is arranged, and a ball that has flowed down a distribution channel 700d formed on the left side of the electric accessory 640a enters. Variable winning device 65 and base unit 760 are provided at possible locations. A specific general ball entrance 630 is provided at a position where a ball that has flowed down the storage channel 700e formed on the upper surface of the base unit 760 can enter. It is designed such that when a ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630, 15 prize balls, which are more than the general ball entrance, are paid out.

Next, various devices provided in the board unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, a first flow path 641b and a second flow path 642b are provided as flow paths for guiding balls to the second ball entrance 640. The first opening 641a and the second opening 642a for allowing the ball to flow into the second flow path 642b are in an open state in which the ball can be received, and in a closed state in which it is more difficult to receive the ball than in the open state. An electric accessory 640a is provided so as to be variable to .

In addition, when the electric accessory 640a is closed, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is formed so as to form a flow path through which a ball can flow down. They are configured to cover the second openings 642a on the downstream side. The electric accessory 640a is composed of a single plate-like member driven by drive means (solenoid, etc.) not shown. Both of the openings 642a are in the open state, and when they are changed to the closed state, both the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a are in the closed state. In addition, the upper flow path of the electric accessory 640a has a downward slope so that the lower left direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front is the downstream side. The second opening 642a is located downstream of the first opening 641a provided on the right side).

Next, the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 640a and the flow of the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 will be described by taking the time-saving state of normal symbols in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball inlet 640 as an example. In this pachinko machine 10, in the normal pattern time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is set to 1 second (see FIG. 38), and the normal pattern (second pattern) win probability is set to 75%. Then, as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the operation of opening for 1 second→closing for 0.5 seconds→opening for 1 second is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640a has a stepped crank at the substantially central portion so that the downstream side covering the second opening 642a is lower than the upstream side covering the first opening 641a. It is configured such that it takes about 0.6 seconds for the ball to reach from the upstream portion covering the first opening 641a to the downstream portion covering the second opening 642a. By configuring in this way, when the ball flows into the board unit 700 and reaches the upstream side of the electric accessory 640a when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball flows directly into the first opening 641a. , the first flow path 641 b and the combined flow path 641 c to enter the second ball entrance 640 . On the other hand, when the ball reaches the upstream side of the electric accessory 640a and the electric accessory 640a is closed, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a flows down toward the downstream side (second opening 642a). Then, when the ball that has flowed down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the downstream side of the electric accessory 640a (the position that covers the second opening 642a) (that is, after flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, 0.0. 6 seconds later), the electric accessory 640a is performing the next opening operation, and the ball flows into the second opening 642a, passes through the second flow path 642b and the combined flow path 641c, and enters the second ball entrance. Enter 640.

In this way, there are a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 641b, second flow path 642b) that guide the ball to the second ball inlet 640, and each opening for allowing the ball to flow into the plurality of flow paths. Variable means (electric accessory 640a ) is provided, and each opening (first opening 641a, second opening 642a) for allowing balls to flow into a plurality of flow paths is arranged on the upstream side and downstream side of the flow path through which the balls can flow down. By disposing the variable means (electric accessory 640a) in the closed state, the ball that could not flow into the upstream opening (first opening 641a) is replaced with the downstream opening (second opening It becomes possible to flow in from the portion 642a).

In addition, the period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down from the upstream position where the electric accessory 640a covers the first opening 641a to the downstream position covering the second opening 642a is the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Since it is designed to be longer than the closing interval period (0.5 seconds) executed during the closing interval period, the first opening is performed at the timing of the closing interval period even though the electric accessory 640a is in the opening operation. Balls that have reached the portion 641a and failed to flow into the first opening 641a can be reliably flowed from the second opening 642a.

In addition, the period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down from the upstream position covering the first opening 641a to the downstream position covering the second opening 642a determines whether the electric accessory 640a is opened. Since it is designed to be longer than the normal pattern fluctuation time (0.5 seconds during time saving) for drawing lots, it reaches the first opening 641a during the normal pattern fluctuation, and the first opening Balls that could not flow into the portion 641a can flow from the second opening 642a when the lottery result of the normal symbol wins. Therefore, in a game state in which the electric accessory 640a is likely to be opened (time-saving state with normal symbols), the player can efficiently enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 simply by always playing the right-handed game. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the balls that flow in from the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 flow down toward the electric role product 640a. It is possible to guide the ball toward the upstream side of. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation where the ball that flows down the game board 13 directly falls to the downstream side of the electric accessory 640a and the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

Further, in the present embodiment, the time required for rolling from the position covering the first opening 641a to the position covering the second opening 642a is the interval period (0.5 seconds) during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. ) or about 0.6 seconds, which is longer than the variation time (0.5 seconds) of the normal symbol (second symbol). A ball fired in a right-handed game while the pattern (second pattern) is fluctuating can also be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the pachinko machine 10, balls entering from the first opening 641a enter the second opening 640 with priority over balls entering from the second opening 642a. is configured as To explain in detail, the spheres flowing in from the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a join together and flow down toward the second ball inlet 640, and flow from the first opening 641a to the confluence channel 641c. The first channel 641b through which the balls flow down is communicated in the vertical direction, and the second channel 642b through which the balls flowing in from the second opening 642a are communicated in the lateral direction. By configuring in this way, when a ball flowing down the first flow path 641b and a ball flowing down the second flow path 642b are generated at the same time, the first flow path 641b having a large kinetic energy (drop energy) is generated. The falling ball is preferentially guided to the second ball entrance 640 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down the first flow path 641b and the balls flowing down the second flow path 642b from clogging the combined flow path 641c. Further, the balls that have flowed in from the first opening 641a, into which more balls than the second opening 642a flow, can be smoothly entered into the second ball entrance 640. FIG.

The second flow path 642b, which is set to have a lower priority under the spherical flow than the first flow path 641b, has a length (35 mm in this embodiment) that can hold a plurality of spheres (three in this embodiment). , and is configured so as not to hinder the flow of the balls into the second opening 642a even if the balls flowing down the first flow path 641b are blocked.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, during the big win, the time-saving state of the normal symbols is reset and the normal state is set. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball does not reach the variable winning device 65 provided below the electric accessory 640a. In order to prevent the situation described above, the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed, and the variable winning device 65 may be provided above the electric accessory 640a.

The variable prize winning device 65 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a in its substantially central portion. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

Next, the base unit 760 arranged inside the board unit 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the base unit 760 is disposed on the downstream side (outflow port 700b side) of the board unit 700, and the storage channel 700e is formed on the upper side, and the out channel 700f is formed on the lower side. is provided.

The base unit 760 is provided with a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771 as storage devices for storing balls flowing down the storage channel 700e. It is configured so that it can be stored. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 9, the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 are operated based on the second frame button (release button) 22b provided in the pachinko machine 10. It is controlled to change from a storage state in which the balls are stored to a release state in which the storage state of the balls is released with a predetermined time lag, and each time the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b, 1 It is configured to let the balls flow down one by one.

Further, on the storage channel 700e, there are a storage upper limit sensor S1 for detecting that the amount of stored balls has reached the upper limit, and a storage detection sensor S2 for detecting the presence or absence of a stored ball. is provided. Since each of these sensors is formed of a non-contact detection type proximity sensor that converts the presence information of a ball to be detected by electromagnetic induction into an electrical signal, the sensor will not be damaged by the passage of the ball.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and any configuration that can grasp the storage state of the balls on the storage channel 700e can be used. A proximity switch such as a photoelectric type or a magnetic type may be used, or a contact detection type switch such as a limit switch may be provided. Furthermore, in order to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e, a sensor for detecting the balls corresponding to each ball storage position (the position where the balls are stored shown in FIG. 3) is provided. Alternatively, a sensor may be provided so that the number of balls flowing into the storage channel 700e and the number of balls flowing out of the storage channel 700e can be counted. The number of stored balls may be grasped.

Furthermore, the base unit 760 has a guide position (protruding position) that guides the ball flowing out from the storage channel 700e to the specific general ball entrance 630, and a regulation position that restricts guidance to the specific general ball entrance 630. A movable valve 750 that can be changed between (buried position) and (buried position) is provided, and is variably controlled based on a predetermined operation pattern (operation scenario). A detailed description of the movement control of the movable valve 750 will be given later with reference to FIG.

In the portion of the board unit 700 covered with the cover member 710 (see FIG. 2), the cover member 710 is illuminated from the back side (the game board 13 side with respect to the cover member 710). Transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, which are light emitting means for irradiation, are provided. By irradiating the cover member 710 with light from the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the inside covered with the cover member 710 can be brought into a transmission state in which the player can visually recognize. Although the details will be described later, the transmitting lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from releasing the storage device while grasping the operation status of the movable valve 750 during the normal game in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Also, when the release operation of the storage device is performed and the ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is in a transparent state, so that the player can visually recognize the situation where the ball flows down near the movable valve 750. can be done.

In the pachinko machine 10 having the board unit 700 configured in this way, the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 enters the guided state (closed state) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general ball entrance 630. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b for changing the storage state of the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) to the released state, the storage device (first The ball stored in the storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 ) can be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 . Therefore, the player can play the game while timing the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Further, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the movable valve 750 is set to operate in various predetermined patterns. Most of this period is set as a period (0.1 seconds) in which only one ball can be guided. Therefore, since accuracy is required in the timing at which the ball stored in the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) can be guided to the specific general ball entrance 630, the player is more motivated. can be made to play.

In this embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the balls stored in the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) are released one by one. Since it is configured so that it can flow down toward the port 630, the period (0.1 seconds) in which only one ball can be guided continues as the period in which the movable valve 750 is in the guided state (closed state). is set, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at an appropriate timing, the All balls can be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 . Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game in order to obtain more prize balls. Details of the operation (operation pattern) of the movable valve 750 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 23. FIG.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the cover member 710 is provided as a shielding means for making it difficult for the player to grasp the operation status of the movable valve 750, the second frame button can be pressed while the player is aware of the operation status of the movable valve 750. It is possible to prevent the act of operating the (release button) 22b. In addition, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is a half mirror so that it is switched to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized based on a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down). Since it is configured, when the game ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 switches to the transparent state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow condition of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750 .

In this embodiment, the cover member 710, which is the shielding means, is switched to the transmission state by irradiating the light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. Well, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of light emitted to the cover member 710 from a light-emitting means (LED) that is always on can be switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position. It may be configured to be in a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized only through the lens.

In addition, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (eg, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color that allows the inside to be seen, and the surface is processed to diffusely reflect the irradiated light (eg, , texturing) may be applied. As a result, while the game is being played in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a makes the inside of the cover member 710 difficult to see, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (i.e., the decorative The inside of the cover member 710 may be visible when the lamp 227a is not lit. As a result, the inside of the cover member 710 can be easily inspected by the store clerk even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall that shields the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a is provided, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielding state and a non-shielding state. should be provided. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 even while the game is being played. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light is provided, and light emission control is performed on the light emitting means, so that the inside of the cover member 710 can be illuminated. may be switched between a state in which it is difficult to see (light is illuminated) and a visible state (light is not illuminated).

Furthermore, by providing a decorative movable member on the cover member 710 whose interior is visible and controlling the movement of the movable member, the interior of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movement of the decorative movable member is small). state) and a state in which it is difficult to see the inside of the cover member 710 (a state in which the decorative movable member moves frequently).

Further, although the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10, in the present embodiment, the timing for releasing the second frame button (release button) 22b is set based on the operation of the movable valve 750, and the second frame button (release button) 22b is released. The three-symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is configured to perform effect display. As a result, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the player receives a privilege (a prize based on entering the specific general ball entrance 630). It is possible to provide a ball), and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Next, the flow of the balls launched into the right game area in the right-handed game in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the board unit 700 is arranged in the right side area of the pachinko machine 10, and by arranging nails provided above the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700, the right game area is hit by a right-handed game. Approximately 95% (95 out of 100 balls) of the balls hit into the board unit 700 flow into the inlet 700 a of the board unit 700 . Of the balls hit by the right-handed game, the balls that did not flow into the inlet 700a of the board unit 700 (about 5 out of 100 balls) are formed between the variable display unit 80 and the board unit 700. It flows down toward the out port 66 through the formed spherical flow path (see FIG. 2).

The flow of balls flowing into the inlet 700a of the board unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. Nails Qa and Qb are provided directly below the inlet 700a so that the balls that have flowed into the inlet are distributed to the left and right at a ratio of about 1:14. Balls distributed to the right side of nails Qa and Qb (approximately 90 balls out of 100 balls hit by a right-handed game) pass through the through gate 67, and then the upstream part of the electric accessory 640a (the first opening 641a covering position) and distributed to the left side of the nails Qa and Qb (about 5 out of 100 balls hit by the right-handed game) pass through the first guideway 700c and the electric accessory 640a. flow down to the downstream portion (second opening 642a). The nails Qa and Qb also serve as adjustable adjusting means, and even if the ratio of distributing the balls to the left and right changes due to collision of the balls or the like, the ratio can be adjusted to a desired ratio. In addition, as described above, the ball that has flowed down to the upstream portion (the position that covers the first opening 641a) of the electric accessory 640a can flow into the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a. Since it flows down above 640a, it is easier to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the ball that has flowed down to the downstream portion (second opening 642a) of the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, by adjusting the nails Qa and Qb, which are adjusting means, it is possible to adjust the rate at which the ball hit by the right-handed game enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁

The ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a flows into the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a and enters the second ball entrance 640 at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened. On the other hand, the balls that have not flowed into the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a flow down from the downstream end of the electric accessory 640a to the sorting channel 700d. In the distribution channel 700d, there are two directions in which the balls flow down toward the variable winning device 65 (lower right direction in the viewpoint of FIG. 3) and in the direction in which the balls flow down toward the base unit 760 (lower left direction in the viewpoint of FIG. 3). Nails Q1 to Q3 and a first adjustment member 701a for sorting are provided, and the balls that flowed into the sorting channel 700d (about 95 out of 100 balls hit by a right-handed game) are distributed at a ratio of 9:1. It is configured to distribute to the lower right direction and the lower left direction.

Then, the balls that flow down the distribution flow path 700d and are distributed in the direction of flowing down toward the base unit 760 (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3) (about 10 balls out of 100 balls hit by the right-handed game) Approximately 1/3 of the balls flow into the storage channel 700e, and the remaining approximately 2/3 of the balls flow into the out flow channel 700f.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that one out of every 30 balls hit by a right-handed game flows into the storage channel 700e. In other words, since the number of prize balls paid out to the player when the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 is 15 balls, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state. In a normal game state that is not a jackpot game state in which the winning device 65 is opened, even if a game is played in which a ball is entered into the specific general ball entrance 630, the ball is not entered into the specific general ball entrance 630. Since the number of balls (approximately 30 balls) required to make a ball is greater than the number of prize balls (15 balls) paid out when the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630, the number of balls held does not increase. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent games in which a ball is entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 in a state in which the details of the operation of the movable valve 750 are illegally grasped in the normal game state or the movable valve 750 is broken down. .

In addition, in this embodiment, by using the board surface configuration described above, since the frequency of balls flowing into the storage channel 700e is suppressed, the large winning state in which the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the second winning state In the normal game state other than the time-saving state (time-saving state with normal symbols) in which the ball is likely to enter the ball opening 640, even if the right-handed game is played, the number of balls held is not increased, but the storage channel 700e. It is also possible to increase the frequency of balls entering into the specific general ball entrance 630 (the game of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b) in which the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630.

Even in such a case, since the movable valve 750 is covered with the cover member 710 as in the present embodiment, it is difficult to grasp the operation state of the movable valve 750, thereby increasing the number of balls held in the normal game state. can be suppressed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the ball flowing down the electric role product 640a in the closed state can flow into the storage channel 700e. In the time-saving state of the easy normal pattern, the balls are difficult to flow into the storage channel 700e. Therefore, it is possible to change the degree of expectation of the ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630 according to the game state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the balls flowing down the distribution channel 700d are configured to be distributed either in the lower right direction where the variable winning device 65 is arranged or in the lower left direction where the specific general ball entrance 630 is arranged. Therefore, even if the distribution ratio of the balls flowing down the distribution channel 700d varies depending on the individual difference of the pachinko machine 10 or the installation situation, it is possible to prevent the player from playing an extremely disadvantageous game. Furthermore, by varying the specifications (arrangement) of the nails Q1 to Q3 and the first adjustment member 701a provided in the distribution flow path 700d, the balls can be efficiently entered into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10. Game specifications for balls and game specifications that allow balls to easily enter the specific general ball entrance 630 during jackpot games (that is, balls are easily stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771)) can be provided to the player, and the player can select the pachinko machine 10 to play based on his/her own skill.

Next, the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) provided in the base unit 760, the operation of the movable valve 750, and the ball flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing a state in which five balls, which are the upper limit number, are stored on the storage channel 700e, and FIG. 4(b) is a first storage device. 770 is a diagram schematically showing a case where the movable valve 750 is in the guided state (protruded state) while the movable valve 770 is in the released state. FIG. 5(a) is a diagram schematically showing a case where the first storage device 770 is in the released state and the movable valve 750 is in the restricted state (recessed state). FIG. 5(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the first storage device 770 is in the storage state and the second storage device 771 is in the released state. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the operation mechanism of the first reservoir valve 770a of the first reservoir device 770 and the second reservoir valve 771a of the second reservoir device 771. FIG. It is a diagram showing the operation of the retention valve solenoid 770b when the first retention device 770 is in the released state and the second retention device 771 is in the retention state. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the operation of a reservoir valve solenoid 770b when a reservoir device 771 is in a released state;

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are provided so as to have a space between which one ball can be stored, and the storage device (the first storage device 770 and In the state of FIG. 4A in which the upper limit number (five) of balls is stored in the second storage device 771), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) stores one ball, The second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is in a state of storing four balls. In such a state, the new ball flowing down toward the storage channel 700e is changed in the flowing direction by the ball stored in the storage channel 700e, and the outflow direction provided below the base unit 760 is changed. It flows down toward the channel 700f and flows out of the board unit 700 from the out channel 700f.

A first ball passage sensor S3 for detecting the passage of the ball is provided in the region where the ball flows down when the first reservoir valve 770a is released, and the first ball passage sensor S3 is provided. A second ball passing sensor S4 for detecting passage of a ball is provided in an area downstream of the area where the first ball passing sensor S3 is provided. In this embodiment, the first storage device 770 is in the released state based on the detection results of the first ball passage sensor S3 and the second ball passage sensor S4 and the command indicating that the ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630. It is configured to be able to measure the period from when the It is configured to be able to correct the content of the effect (the start timing of the effect, the effect period, and the content of the effect) executed after the state (after the first ball passing sensor S3 detects the ball passing).

Here, the ball flowing down the game area of the pachinko machine 10 has a specific section flow period depending on the installation state (inclination) of the pachinko machine 10, the outside air environment (temperature, humidity), and the dirt on the ball. different. Therefore, in the case of executing an effect for the falling ball, if a specific effect is executed based on a predetermined period of time, an error will occur between the result of the effect and the actual result of the falling ball. There was a problem that it would slip. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to correct the content of the presentation for the downward movement of the ball.

As a result, the second frame button (for releasing It is possible to correct the notification timing of the effect to notify the timing of operating the button 22b based on the actual ball flowing period, and to suppress the execution of the effect that gives the player a feeling of discomfort. .

In addition to the effect used in the present embodiment, for example, the ball passing through a predetermined position (for example, the first ball passing sensor S3) may cause the ball to move to a specific position (for example, a specific general entrance). 630) is executed for a predetermined period of time, and after that, in the case of executing a result effect showing the result of passing the ball, the period of the effect effect is changed to the ball passing period that actually requires. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

Specifically, in the case of executing an effect that satisfies the indicators set in multiple stages toward the final stage as the fanning effect, and executing an effect as to whether or not the final stage has been reached as the result effect, By differentiating the timing by satisfying each of the indicators set in stages or by varying the start timing of the fanning effect, the result effect is executed even though the fanning effect is in the middle stage, or the fanning effect is executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as waiting for the execution of the result presentation in the state of reaching the final stage of.

In addition to the above-described first ball passage sensor S3 or second ball passage sensor S4, detection results of the storage upper limit sensor S1 and the storage detection sensor S2 are used to detect It may be configured to determine whether or not a jamming or fraudulent act is being performed by

The first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a, which store balls on the storage channel 700e, press the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 1) provided on the pachinko machine 10. By operating (depressing) to drive the storage valve solenoid 770b (see FIG. 19), the balls stored in the storage channel 700e are controlled to flow down one by one. The details of the mechanism for operating the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a by driving the reservoir valve solenoid 770b (see FIG. 19) will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the drive control contents of 770a and second storage valve 771a will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, when the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 1) is operated in the state shown in FIG. The ball stored between itself and the second storage valve 771a passes over the released first storage valve 770a and flows downstream (see FIG. 4(b)). Since the balls stored in the storage channel 700e are restricted from flowing downstream by the second storage valve 771a in the storage state, only one ball is released from the storage channel 700e. It will flow downstream.

Then, when the ball flows down from the storage channel 700e while the movable valve 750 is protruding (induction state), as shown in FIG. It flows down on 701b and enters the specific general ball entrance 630 (see FIG. 4(b)). On the other hand, when the ball flows down from the storage channel 700e while the movable valve 750 is buried (restricted state), as shown in FIG. It flows out of the board unit 700 from the outflow port 700b without balling.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player operates (presses) the operation means (the second frame button (release button) 22b) so that the storage of balls by the storage device can be released. , the player can determine the timing to release the storage of balls by the storage device. In addition, the movable valve 750 is configured to variably operate between a protruded state (allowed state) and a retracted state (restricted state) in a predetermined operation pattern. Therefore, whether or not the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 is determined based on the timing at which the player operates the operation means (the second frame button (release button) 22b). It is possible to operate the operation means willingly, and it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

When the player operates (depresses) the second frame button (release button) 22b and the period in which the first reservoir valve 770a is in the released state passes a predetermined time (one second in this embodiment), the second The first reservoir valve 770a is closed, and the second reservoir valve 771a is released (see FIG. 5(b)). In this state, the ball stored in the storage channel 700e by the second storage valve 771a flows down to a position where it contacts the first storage valve 770a. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds after the second storage valve 771a is released), the second storage valve 771a is closed, and the state shown in FIG. 4(a) is reached. to move to.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 5B, the balls (four pieces) stored in the storage channel 700e by the second storage valve 771a flow down to the state where they are stored by the first storage valve 770a. The second storage valve 771a is changed from the released state (buried state) to the closed state (projected state). Here, in the present embodiment, since the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are provided with an interval of one ball (about 11 mm), the second reservoir valve 771a It protrudes to a position between the most downstream ball and the second most downstream ball among the four balls stored (blocked) by the valve 770a. Therefore, the projecting operation of the second storage valve 771a can be executed smoothly.

In addition, the area where the balls are stored in the state where the second storage valve 771a protrudes in the storage channel 700e (that is, the position from the position where the second storage valve 771a projects to the upstream end of the storage channel 700e) ) is longer than the distance (approximately 47 mm) obtained by adding the thickness of the second reservoir valve 771a (in the horizontal direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 5(b)) (approximately 3 mm) to the four balls (approximately 44 mm). It is configured to be a distance shorter than five (about 55 mm) (50 mm in this embodiment).

With this configuration, when the second reservoir valve 771a protrudes, even if the ball retreats on the reservoir channel 700e by the thickness of the second reservoir valve 771a, it is stored in the reservoir channel 700e. It is possible to prevent the balls from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage channel 700e due to the projecting operation of the second storage valve 771a. In addition, it is possible to prevent the sixth ball from being stored in the storage channel 700e when the second storage valve 771a is released (the buried state). In order to prevent the balls stored in the storage channel 700e from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage channel 700e due to the operation of each storage valve, A step with a lower side may be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls stored in the storage channel 700e from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage channel 700e due to the operation of each storage valve.

Next, a reservoir valve solenoid 770b for electrically driving the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the positive direction, and FIG. 6(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. In this embodiment, one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b) is used to variably operate a plurality of variable members (first reservoir valve 770a and second reservoir valve 771a). Specifically, reservoir valve solenoid 770b is a two-way holding self-holding solenoid.

This two-way hold type self-holding solenoid combines an open frame solenoid with a permanent magnet. By instantaneously energizing the coil, the plunger is attracted, and the position after attraction is held by the permanent magnet. A self-holding solenoid that does not require energization to maintain the state after attraction. Coils are provided in positive and negative directions around a permanent magnet, and each coil is energized to move the plunger in the positive or negative direction is attracted and the state after the attraction can be held using a permanent magnet. Thus, one solenoid can be used to hold three states: a state in which the plunger is attracted in the positive direction, a state in which the plunger is attracted in the negative direction, and an initial state in which the plunger is not attracted in either the positive or negative direction. can be done.

When the plunger is sucked in the positive direction by the reservoir valve solenoid 770b (the reservoir valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the positive direction), the first reservoir valve 770a is opened ( released), and the plunger is attracted in the negative direction (the reservoir valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction), the second reservoir valve 771a is opened ( released) state. In addition, when the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on neither positive nor negative (off state), both the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are varied to the closed (unreleased) state. It is configured as follows.

That is, as shown in FIG. 6(a), the first storage valve 770a and the storage valve solenoid 770b are combined by a first transmission means for transmitting the operation of the storage valve solenoid 770b to the first storage valve 770a. there is This first transmission means has three gears and is attached to the forward end of the plunger of the reservoir valve solenoid 770b. In addition, the second storage valve 771a has its distal end attached to the tip of the plunger on the negative direction side.

Here, when the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the forward direction, the gear provided in the first transmission means rotates according to the action of the plunger that is attracted in the forward direction, and the rotation result of the gear rotates. Accordingly, the first reservoir valve 770a provided on the terminal side of the first transmission means (the side connected to the first reservoir valve 770a) is variably operated to the released (open) state, and the second reservoir valve 771a is opened in the normal direction. According to the action of the plunger sucked to the side, the tip protrudes above the storage channel 700e and is variably operated to the closed (unreleased) state (see FIG. 6(a)).

On the other hand, when the reservoir valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction, the first reservoir valve 770a is closed (not released) based on the action of the plunger projecting in the negative direction, as shown in FIG. 6(b). state, and the second storage valve 771a is variably operated to the released (open) state. Although illustration is omitted, when the plunger of the reservoir valve solenoid 770b is not attracted in either the positive direction or the negative direction (normal state), both the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are closed ( It is variably operated so as to be in a non-released state.

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of variable members (the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a) are variably operated by only one electric drive source (the reservoir valve solenoid 770b). Therefore, the space for installing the electric driving source can be reduced, and the space saving of the device can be achieved. In addition, by making the device space-saving, it is possible to use the empty space to install decorative members and devices related to games, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the state of the reservoir valve solenoid 770b, both the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are not in the open (released) state. Even if it breaks down and malfunctions, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from continuing to pass through the storage channel 700e. In addition, since it is configured to variably operate only with one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b), when the balls stored in the storage channel 700e are made to flow down toward the specific general ball inlet 630 one by one Since the variable operation control is only executed for the reservoir valve solenoid 770b, compared with the case where variable operation control is executed for a plurality of electric drive sources (solenoids, etc.) load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, a plurality of variable members (the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a) are driven by a single electric drive source (the reservoir valve solenoid 770b) depending on the moving direction of a moving body (plunger). Although a configuration for variable operation is used, other configurations may be used as long as they variably operate a plurality of variable members using one electric drive source. A motor may be used, and a plurality of variable members may be variably operated at a predetermined timing corresponding to the number of rotations (number of steps) of the motor.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is used in which a plurality of variable members (the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a) are variably operated by only one electric drive source (the reservoir valve solenoid 770b). An electric drive source may be provided for each variable member. In addition, in this embodiment, the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a have different configurations for variable operation, but the same variable operation configuration may be used as a matter of course. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball stored in the storage channel 700e is configured to flow down toward the specific general ball entrance 630 one by one. configuration may be used. For example, by continuously pressing the second frame button (release button) 22b for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are simultaneously released (opened). Motion control may be performed. As a result, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is normally operated, variable operation control is executed for each storage valve so that balls flow out one by one from the storage channel 700e. When the second frame button (release button) 22b is pressed for a long time, variable operation control is executed so that at least two balls stored in the storage channel 700e flow out. Therefore, it is possible to change the number or timing of the balls flowing out from the storage channel 700e depending on the details of the player's operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. can let

Next, referring to FIG. 9, the flow of the operation control of the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 and the opening/closing operation of the movable valve 750 when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. explain. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b and various devices.

As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated, first, the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 is variably controlled for one second to the release (open) state. and the state shown in FIG. 4B is obtained. In this state, the balls stored between the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a flow down from the storage channel 700e. Here, since it takes about 0.5 seconds for the ball flowing down to reach the movable valve 750 when the first storage valve 770a is released (opened), the first storage valve 770a is Whether or not the ball is guided to the specific general ball entrance 630 is determined by the operating state of the movable valve approximately 0.5 seconds after the release (open) state. In the operation example shown in FIG. 9, first, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to change the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state. After 5 seconds, the movable valve 750 is in an open state (restricted state) as shown in FIG. 9(d). 700 flows out of the board unit 700 from the outflow port 700b.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), once the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated, as shown in FIGS. 9(b) and (c), variable control is executed for a total of 2 seconds, Since the next operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b is not accepted while the variable control is being executed, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. When the variable control of each storage device is executed, an operation invalid period is set for about two seconds after which operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b is not accepted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the next variable control from being started while the variable control of each storage device is being executed.

When one second has passed since the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) was released (opened), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) is not released (closed). (Fig. 9(b)), and 0.5 seconds after that point, the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is variably controlled to be released (opened). 9(c)). Then, the release (open) state of the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is continued for 0.5 seconds from that point, and as shown in FIG. 5B described above, the second storage device 771 ( A period is provided to allow the ball stored by the second storage valve 771a) to flow down to a position where it contacts the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 (FIG. 9(c)).

In other words, in this embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, one ball is made to flow down toward the movable valve 750. button) 22b is configured so as to execute the release operation of the storage device only once every two seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, unless the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (depressed) with good timing, the ball cannot enter the specific general ball entrance 630, and the second frame button ( Operation accuracy of the release button 22b is required. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a timing effect (operation effect) suggesting the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the timing effect (operation effect), the ball can be easily entered into the specific general ball entrance 630. there is As a result, the player can be motivated to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b.

In FIG. 9, at the timing when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to change the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) again to the release (open) state, the operation timing of 0 After 5 seconds, the movable valve 750e is closed (induction), and the ball flowing down toward the movable valve 750 by this operation is guided to the specific general ball entrance 630 by the closed (induction) state of the movable valve 750. be done.

The movable valve 750 is constantly variably controlled according to a predetermined rule based on the pachinko machine 10 being powered on. As will be described later, the contents of this variable control are specified by combining a plurality of operation scenarios (see FIG. 23(a)) having different operation (variable) patterns. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b so that the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750, which is variably controlled based on the operation scenario, is in the closed (induced) state, , the ball is guided to a specific general entrance 630 .

Next, timing effects (operation effects) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 17. FIG. In this embodiment, the ball stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is directed toward the movable valve 750 based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. configured to flow down. Then, when the ball reaches the movable valve 750, when the movable valve 750 is in the open (restricted) state, the ball is restricted from entering the specific general ball entrance 630, and when it is in the closed (induction) state, , to guide the ball to enter the specific general ball entrance 630 .

A short period (for example, 0.1 second) is set for the period in which the movable valve 750 is in the closed (induced) state, and the player randomly operates the second frame button (release button) 22b. Even so, it is configured to make it difficult for the balls stored in the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 ) to enter the specific general ball entrance 630 . Here, in the present embodiment, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed as an effect for notifying the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. The player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) so that the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 efficiently. Become.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a method of setting the timing for causing the player to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b in the timing effect (operation effect) described above will be described. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing points for setting the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in the timing effect (operation effect). As described above, the movable valve 750 is configured to be constantly variably controlled according to a predetermined rule, and the storage channel is opened when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. A ball flowing down from 700e (see FIG. 3) toward the movable valve 750 is configured to reach the movable valve 750 after a period of about 0.5 seconds.

In this embodiment, the contents of the variable control of the movable valve 750 are read in advance, the point at which the movable valve 750 is closed (induction) is specified (FIG. 10(a)), and the downward flow period (0.5 seconds) from that point is determined. ) can be set as a possible ball entry timing at which the ball can be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 (FIG. 10(b)). By setting the timing at which a ball can be entered in this way and executing an effect for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the timing, the player can follow the effect being executed and execute the second frame button ( A ball can be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 simply by operating the release button 22b. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect capable of awarding advantageous benefits (prize balls) to the player, and to motivate the player to participate in the game.

Also, the ball-enterable timing set as the ball-enterable timing for the specific general ball-entering port is 0.5 seconds before the timing at which the movable valve 750 is positioned in the induced state, as described above. Here, since the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state is mostly 0.1 seconds, the period during which the ball entry possible timing is set is longer than the time when the corresponding movable valve 750 starts operating. the previous period. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the timing effect executed based on the possible ball entry timing is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750 .

Further, in this embodiment, since the movable valve 750 is operated based on a plurality of operation scenarios, the interval at which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state varies. Therefore, even if the operation of the movable valve 750 executed before the operation of the movable valve 750 referred to when setting the possible entry timing coincides with the possible entry timing, The operation status of the movable valve 750 cannot be grasped based on this. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the timing effect executed based on the possible ball entry timing is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750 .

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to release (open) the first storage device 770, specifically, the first The transmission lamp 227b is turned on when the storage device 770 is released (opened) and the first ball passage sensor S3 detects a ball flowing out of the storage channel 700e. In other words, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the timing when a ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630, the ball flowing out from the storage channel 700e is the first ball. The inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible at the timing of passing the passage sensor S3 (timing 0.1 seconds after the second frame button 22b is operated). Here, since the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state is mostly 0.1 seconds, the timing at which the inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible is the movable valve 750 that is the target for setting the ball entry possible timing. This is the period before the operation of the valve 750 is started. Accordingly, the operation status of the movable valve 750 is not grasped based on the timing when the inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 17, which will be described later, as a timing effect (operation effect), the third pattern display device 81 displays a pointer that prompts the user to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b. is moved and displayed, and the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the timing when the display pointer reaches a specific position. An effect that matches the operation timing of is executed. Next, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) used in this embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 11(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during the advance notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed. b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during the timing effect (operation effect). In addition, in each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 and the operating conditions for the operation means (first frame button (production button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b) are shown. The display contents of the third pattern display device 81 that change based on the operation of the operating means will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams shown.

As shown in FIG. 11, the third symbol display device 81 displays a round number display section 714 for displaying the current number of rounds at the upper left of the screen, and the secondary display area Ds2 indicates the number of balls acquired during the big win. Acquisition display is executed, and in the sub-display area Ds3, a display of "Aim right" is displayed on the guidance display section for guiding the game method. Then, the winning number display mode 718 for suggesting the number of balls won based on the winning of balls in the specific winning hole 65a is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls in the specific winning hole 65a. This winning number display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball into the specific winning hole 65a, then moves toward the sub-display area Ds2, and finally, is displayed in the sub-display area. It is added as the winning indication of Ds2.

In the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) will start from the next round and a guide display for notifying the game nature of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. . At the bottom of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed. In this effect area, a left button display mode 715 with "left" corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b and "middle" corresponding to the first frame button (detail button) 22a are displayed. , and sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 in which display pointers 719 (see FIG. 11B) are displayed are provided corresponding to the respective button display modes. .

The secondary display areas Ds4 and Ds5 are areas in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled and displayed from right to left, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 11(b). By operating the operating means (the first frame button (effect button) 22a or the second frame button (release button) 22b) at a timing that matches the bar display portion 717, a success effect (described later in FIG. 11B )) is executed. Further, when the operation means is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display portion 717, a failure effect (see FIG. 12B, which will be described later) is executed.

The timing at which the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717 in the sub-display area Ds4 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b is the timing at which the ball can be entered as described above with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11(a), while the advance notice effect is being executed, the characters "waiting" are scrolled and displayed in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5 from right to left.

As described above, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the present embodiment, an effect is executed in which the player operates the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b. be. By constructing in this manner, the number of times the player is made to operate the buttons can be increased, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced as compared with the case of executing the performance of operating only the second frame button (release button) 22b. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11(b), the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5. When the button 22b is operated, the characters "good" are displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b changes the display mode of the left button display mode 715. It is displayed by making it variable. In this case, as a timing effect (operation effect), since the second frame button 22b for releasing the storage device is operated at the timing when the ball can be entered, the ball flowing down from the storage device based on the operation is the specific general ball entrance. It will enter the ball at 630.

In the state shown in FIG. 12A, the display pointer 719c displayed in the sub-display area Ds5 corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a coincides with the bar display portion 717 and the first frame button (effect button) 22a is displayed. button) 22a is operated, and by operating the first frame button (button for presentation) 22a at this timing, a prize ball obtained by entering the specific general ball entrance 630 A specific acquisition number display mode 721 indicating the number is displayed, and the fact that the first frame button (button for effect) 22a has been operated is displayed by changing the display mode of the right button display mode 716 .

The state shown in FIG. 12B is a state in which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719h does not match the bar display portion 717 in the timing effect (operation effect). , the characters "bad" are displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b is displayed by changing the display mode of the left button display mode 715. be. In this case, as a timing effect (operation effect), the second frame button 22b for releasing the storage device is operated at a timing different from the timing at which the ball can be entered. The ball does not enter the general ball entrance 630.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the variable display of the special symbols will be described. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in FIG. 8B described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, the effect display similar to that during the big win is executed. In addition, regarding the display of the timing effect (operation effect), the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as during the big win, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 13(a), the display mode of "START" is scrolled and displayed in order to inform the player of the timing at which the timing effect (operation effect) is started. Then, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. Acquisition display ("15") indicating a privilege (prize ball) given to the player is executed, and a display pointer 719 (719k to 719p) is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4 or Ds5.

In the present embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect) executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is fluctuating, the display pointer scrolling in the secondary display area Ds4 (in the case of FIG. 14, the display pointer 719q 719t) coincides with the bar display portion 717, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, as shown in FIG. is configured as By configuring in this way, the second frame button (release button) 22b for releasing the storage state of the storage device can be used to notify the lottery result of the special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the display contents of the big win determination display screen for notifying that the third symbol display device 81 has won the big win as a special symbol lottery result will be described. FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination display screen displayed when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and FIG. C" is a schematic diagram showing an example of a big win determination display screen displayed when the big win is won.

Here, in this embodiment, as the operation patterns of the movable valve 750, an advantageous period during which an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous period. scenarios) are set (see FIG. 23(a), which will be described later), and the movable valve 750 is configured to execute a plurality of operation patterns (operation scenarios) in a predetermined order. (see FIG. 23(b), which will be described later). Furthermore, based on the operation status of the movable valve 750, the operation pattern (operation scenario) of the movable valve 750 to be executed in the future can be determined.

In this embodiment configured as described above, a period in which a jackpot game based on the jackpot is executed on the jackpot determination display screen that notifies the third pattern display device 81 that the lottery result of the special symbols has won the jackpot. Inside, it is possible to determine whether the movable valve 750 is variably operated in an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player, and to notify the result of the determination by the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the player can grasp that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game before the jackpot game is executed. A game can be made to be performed willingly.

In an example of the jackpot determination display screen shown in FIG. 15(a), the jackpot type "jackpot A" is won, that is, after the jackpot game, the 16-round jackpot that is not given a variable state after the jackpot game is won. is displayed, and the characters "chance" are displayed as a movable valve advantageous period notification mode 721 for notifying that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game. .

In addition, in an example of the jackpot determination display screen shown in FIG. 15(b), the jackpot type "jackpot C" is won, that is, the jackpot is won in 16 rounds in which the probability variable state is given after the jackpot game ends, and , the character "super" is displayed to indicate that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game.

In this way, in addition to the mode of notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, by notifying the mode of notifying the operation status of the movable valve 750 during the big win on the big win confirmation display screen, various patterns can be obtained. It is possible to display the jackpot confirmation display mode.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, a method of setting an effect mode in the timing effect (operation effect) executed in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 16 schematically shows the content of setting the display position of the display pointer based on the timing at which the specific general ball entrance 630 can be entered and the music information executed in the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the present embodiment, information indicating the timing at which a ball can be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 described above with reference to FIG. The display position of the display pointer 719 (see FIG. 11B) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) is determined based on the difficulty level setting information for setting the difficulty level of the (operation effect).

In the present embodiment, a plurality of songs are configured to be usable in the timing effect (operation effect), and locations where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) are determined in advance for each song. This is for the purpose of operating the operation means at the timing that matches the rhythm of each song in the timing effect (operation effect). 719 is set, the operation means can be operated in accordance with the rhythm of the music being executed in the timing production (operation production), and the timing production (operation production) can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. can be executed.

16A and B shown in FIG. 16B differ in the number and spacing of locations where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (can be set). The place to be set is also different. Further, in the present embodiment, the difficulty level of the timing effect can be set, and when a high difficulty level is selected, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated in the timing effect (operation effect). Instead of setting the display position of the display pointer 719 to increase the number of times that the display position of the display pointer 719 that causes it to match the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630, the display pointer that causes the second frame button (release button) 22b to be operated The effect mode is set so that it is difficult to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b when the bar display portion 719 (see FIG. 11(b)) is aligned. On the other hand, when a low difficulty level is selected, the display position of the display pointer 719 for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is at the specific general entrance 630 compared to when a high difficulty level is selected. A state in which the display pointer 719 for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b matches the bar display portion 717 (see FIG. 11(b)) instead of setting the number of times matching with the possible timing to enter the ball to be small. , the presentation mode is set so that the second frame button (release button) 22b can be easily operated.

Specifically, when a low difficulty level is selected for song A, as shown in FIG. The number of times the ball can be entered into the mouth 630 is set to 2, and five display pointers 719 corresponding to the first frame buttons (effect buttons) 22a are set to be displayed.

On the other hand, when a high difficulty level is selected for song B, as shown in FIG. The number of times the ball can be entered is set to five times, and eight display pointers 719 corresponding to the first frame buttons (effect buttons) 22a are set to be displayed.

Furthermore, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, when a high difficulty level is selected, the display mode of the display pointer 719 displayed as a timing effect (operation effect) is higher than when a low difficulty level is selected. , a display mode is set in which timing is difficult to obtain.

In this way, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his or her own skill, and by varying the benefits to be given according to the difficulty level, various players can Therefore, the timing effect (operation effect) can be executed willingly.

In addition, the above-described content indicates both selection of music and selection of difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) executed in the present embodiment. is selected, the interval between the locations where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) differs between song A and song B. A player who selects A and wants to enjoy the timing performance (operation performance) at short intervals can select music B. As a result, it is possible to execute the timing performance (operation performance) desired by the player without changing the degree of difficulty, and to have various players willingly execute the timing performance (operation performance). can be done.

Furthermore, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed at short intervals, the balls stored in the storage channel 700e can be digested (outflow) in a short period of time, so the timing effect (operation effect) is executed at long intervals. than when the operation effect) is executed, the new ball can be stored in the storage channel 700e more easily (that is, the ball collides with the ball stored in the storage channel 700e, and the new ball It is possible to suppress the situation where the liquid does not flow into the storage channel 700e). As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630 through the timing effect (operation effect).

In the present embodiment, among the display pointers 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b set during the timing effect (operation effect), the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 is displayed. Although the upper limit of the number of matching times is set to 5 times, a higher number of times (for example, 8 times) may be set. By configuring in this way, in addition to the balls (up to 5 balls) stored in the storage channel 700e when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, new balls are stored during the timing effect (operation effect). It is also possible to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b at the timing at which the ball that has flowed into the use channel 700e can enter the specific general ball entrance 630. Therefore, the player can actively play the game so that more balls flow into the storage channel 700e.

In the present embodiment, the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) at different intervals depending on the song, and the player selects a song so that the display pointer is displayed in a timing effect (operation effect). A configuration for narrowing or widening the display interval is used, but as a configuration other than that, selection means for selecting the display interval of the display pointer 719 executed by the timing effect (operation effect) for the player. A setting unit may be provided for setting the display position of the display pointer 719 based on the display interval of the display pointer 719 selected by the selection unit. A setting means for setting the display interval of the display pointer 719 may be provided. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to execute the timing performance (operation performance) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and to provide various players with motivation. A timing effect (operation effect) can be executed.

In this embodiment, a plurality of songs (song information) with different positions (intervals) where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) are stored. 719 may be configured to correspond to the movable valve closing timing of each scenario type of the movable valve 750 . As a result, the operation state of the movable valve 750 (that is, the scenario type to be executed) during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is determined, the scenario type is specified based on the determination result, and the specified scenario is determined. By executing the music corresponding to the type as a timing effect (operation effect), the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 can be easily matched with the position where the display pointer 719 of the music can be displayed. be able to. In this case, by setting the timing at which the scenario type of the movable valve 750 switches as the start timing of the timing effect (operation effect), the display location of the display pointer 719 displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) can be set more easily. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the content of the difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) will be described. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents of a difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level to be executed in the first round of the jackpot game. Among the elements displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the elements that are the same as those in FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, "ROUND 1" is displayed on the round display section 714, and a notification display for notifying that the difficulty level selection effect is being executed is displayed in the center of the screen. Then, a guidance display is executed to guide the method of selecting the difficulty level. In this guidance display, a button display 721 is displayed to indicate selection using the first frame button (effect button) 22a.

At the bottom of the screen, an arrow 722 indicating the currently selected difficulty level is displayed moving to positions indicating low difficulty and high difficulty every two seconds, and corresponding difficulty levels are displayed in the secondary display areas Ds4 and Ds5. A demonstration pointer 723 indicating the display mode of the display pointer 719 displayed when the degree is selected is scrolled and displayed.

Here, the demonstration pointers 723a to 723d when the high difficulty level displayed in the sub-display area Ds5 is selected with respect to the demonstration pointer 723 when the low difficulty level displayed in the sub-display area Ds4 is selected are displayed in the game. A display mode is set that makes it difficult for a person to operate at a specific timing. Specifically, the demonstration pointer 723a is displayed with an obstruction indicated by a star around the display pointer 719, the demonstration pointer 723b is displayed with the display pointer 719 reduced, and the demonstration pointer 723c is displayed with the display pointer 719 is displayed in an asymmetric display mode, and the demonstration pointer 723d is displayed at a position overlapping the display pointer 719 with an obstruction display for making the display pointer 719 difficult to see.

In this way, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his or her own skill, and by varying the benefits to be given according to the difficulty level, various players can Therefore, the timing effect (operation effect) can be executed willingly. The number of times (success times) that the player has operated the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) at appropriate timing in the timing effect (operation effect) is accumulated, and the number of successes increases. Based on this, the display mode of the display pointer 719 that is executed when the difficulty level is high may be changed to the display mode of the display pointer 719 that is executed when the difficulty level is low. In addition, when a low-difficulty timing effect (operation effect) is executed, a display pointer 719 matching the ball entry timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 is displayed according to the number of successes. may be configured to increase the frequency with which is displayed. As a result, the player can participate in the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the timing effect (operation effect), if the number of successful operations of the operating means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) at appropriate timing exceeds a predetermined number, A timing effect (operation effect) with a higher degree of difficulty and a greater benefit to be obtained may be selectable. As a result, it is possible to provide a selectable effect (super-difficulty effect) only when a predetermined effect condition (the number of successes reaches a predetermined number) is satisfied for the player. This allows the player to play the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is varied in the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the operation content (success count) of the player who executes the timing effect (operation effect). For example, an operation history of the player operating the first frame button 22a in an operation effect (for example, a mini game effect during a jackpot game or a ready-to-win effect during special symbol fluctuations) executed other than the timing effect (operation effect) Based on (the number of times of operation, the content of operation, and the result of operation), the timing effect (operation effect) may be made different. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in response to various operation effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, and to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. In addition, it is not limited to the operation result of the operation means (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b) by the player. It may be configured to switch the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the game period.

Next, referring to FIG. 18, regarding the contents of the transmission effect that changes the cover member 710 provided in the board unit 700 (see FIG. 2) from the shielding state in which the inside is difficult to see, to the transparent state in which the inside can be seen. explain. FIG. 18(a) is a schematic diagram showing a shielding state, and FIG. 18(b) is a schematic diagram showing a transmitting state. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in FIG. 4 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 18( a ), the cover member 710 is attached so as to cover the entire downstream side (downstream side from the first storage valve 770 a ) area of the board unit 700 . It is attached so that the inside of the member 710 cannot be looked into. Even if an attempt is made to look into the inside of the cover member 710 from the side of the storage channel 700e, since the movable valve 750 is provided below the extending direction of the storage channel 700e, the movable state of the movable valve 750 can be visually recognized. It is configured in such a way that it cannot Furthermore, since the first storage valve 770a is positioned at the projecting position, it becomes more difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 from the storage channel 700e side. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the movable state of the movable valve 750 from being grasped when the cover member 710 is in a closed state in which the inside is difficult to see.

In the cover member 710 configured in this manner, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are lit when a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down) is established, and the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on. ), it is composed of a half-mirror so that it can be switched to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow condition of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750 .

In this embodiment, the cover member 710, which is the shielding means, is switched to the transmission state by irradiating the light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. Well, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted to the cover member 710 from the light-emitting means (LED) that is always on is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position It may be configured to be in a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized only through the lens.

In addition, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (eg, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color that allows the inside to be seen, and the surface is processed to diffusely reflect the irradiated light (eg, , texturing) may be applied. As a result, while the game is being played in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a makes the inside of the cover member 710 difficult to see, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (i.e., the decorative The inside of the cover member 710 may be visible when the lamp 227a is not lit. As a result, the inside of the cover member 710 can be easily inspected by the store clerk even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall that shields the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a is provided, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielding state and a non-shielding state. should be provided. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 even while the game is being played. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light is provided, and light emission control is performed on the light emitting means, so that the inside of the cover member 710 can be illuminated. may be switched between a state in which it is difficult to see (light is illuminated) and a visible state (light is not illuminated).

Furthermore, by providing a decorative movable member to the cover member 710 whose interior is visible and controlling the operation of the movable member, the interior of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the decorative movable member is the movable valve 750). and a state in which it is difficult to see the inside of the cover member 710 (a state in which the decorative movable member moves in an overlapping position so as to cover the movable valve 750). .

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18A, the cover member 710 covers the entire downstream side of the board unit 700, so that when the cover member 710 is in the closed state, the movable valve 750 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration that has the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the movable valve 750 in a normal game posture may be used. Just do it. For example, the cover member 710 may be configured with a size that covers only the movable valve 750 . As a result, a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the movable valve 750 can be constructed at low cost.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not win any winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. - 特許庁The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 7, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 19). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 7, 122). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 7, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to restore the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery of the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 24, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small win) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). 1st winning type counter C2 used for , stop type counter C3 used for selecting stop type, variation type counter CS1 used for selecting variation pattern, and initial value setting of 1st random number counter C1 A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In addition, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 42). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning to the first ball entrance 64 and each counter value for the winning to the second ball entrance 640. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage 203b is provided. In this embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each provided with a maximum of four reserved balls, so that a total of maximum eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a special symbol lottery period, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value changes to the special symbol. It is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and when the game ball wins the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are executed for this purpose. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. Various settings and control processing are executed.

On the other hand, during a period in which the special symbol lottery is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64. Alternatively, when the second ball entrance 640 is won, if the number of pending balls for the winning ball entrance (starting hole) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value acquisition is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning ball entrance. Also, if the number of pending balls for the winning ball entrance is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value etc. is not acquired and prize balls (5 in this embodiment) Prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of held balls is set to four for each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but is not limited to this, and is less than four (for example, 3), or more than 4 (eg, 8). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 299. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 42).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a big hit defined in 202a, it is determined as a special symbol big win.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the game state is a low probability game state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0" in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If the result is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of "1 to 4". If it is within the range of "1 to 4", it is determined to be a big hit.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. FIG. As described above, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol. 202a. In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 300, the total number of random number numbers that result in a big win is 1, so the probability of a big win in the special symbol is "1/300". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202a. In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 300, the total number of random number numbers that become a big hit is 4, so the probability of a special symbol big win is "1/75".

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 20(b)). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol is different from the symbol on which the ready-to-win is applied. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected, namely, "reach out" (for example, the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops and "complete loss" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment). It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in the variable probability state of special symbols, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, and "completely out of reach" is likely to be selected, and "out of reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, making it difficult to select "out of reach". In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. A low-probability table is selected, making it difficult to select "completely out of reach", and the range of random numbers corresponding to the "out of reach" stop type is widened to 80-99. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern selection table set by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 42), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 21 and 22) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is It is provided in the ROM 202 .

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 21(b) and 22). In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and for each variation pattern selection table for each success/failure determination result is set. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22 .

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is detected, and stored in the normal pattern execution area of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning symbol is defined in the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 20) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is 2. If it matches the value of the random number that will be a win defined in the random number table 202c, it is determined that the win is a normal symbol (second symbol). For example, in the second winning random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal design is low (during the normal state of the normal design), there are 5 random numbers that become the normal design winning, and the range is "5 to 9". ing. Among the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, the total number of winning random numbers is 5, so the probability of winning a normal pattern when the probability of a normal pattern is low is "5". /240”.

On the other hand, when the probability of normal symbols is high (during the time-saving state of normal symbols), there are 200 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 204". The total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that will be a win is 200. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2". . As described above, in the present embodiment, the random number value for winning the normal symbols is greatly different between the low probability state of the normal symbols and the high probability state of the normal symbols, so that the winning probabilities are greatly different. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 in the case of winning the normal pattern are different between when the probability of the normal pattern is low and when the probability is high. . For this reason, the ease of entering the second ball entrance 640 is greatly different between the low probability state of normal symbols and the high probability state of normal symbols, so in the low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, A player can be made to play a game aiming at the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加

In the normal pattern low probability state, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal pattern variable display is displayed on the second pattern display device 83. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the second ball entrance 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of the normal symbol for one second, and the acquired second random number. If the value of the counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is won, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). Along with being displayed, the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "1 second x 2 times". Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially added by 1 in the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal symbol variation pattern is selected based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of 0 to 99 (that is, the entire range), and the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 42).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 42) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. FIG. FIG. 20(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above-described first winning random number table 202a and second winning random number table 202c, a first winning type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, a movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e, At least a movable valve operation scenario table 202f is provided.

First, with reference to FIG.20(b), the detail of the 1st hit classification selection table 202b is demonstrated. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 20(b)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the first hit type counter C2 is determined. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 per one is selected.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), with respect to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", "jackpot A" is associated. are stipulated. This jackpot A has 16 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot A". ratio is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot A" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state of normal symbols is provided 100 times.

In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 89" in association with "jackpot B". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot with 8 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 counter values are "jackpot B". ratio is 40% (40/100). This "jackpot B" is set to 8 rounds, which is a smaller number of rounds than the "jackpot A". It is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "jackpot A", but since the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won, the player wins from the start of one jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state. This is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "jackpot A" in terms of possible balls (expected balls).

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" is a jackpot with 16 rounds, like the "jackpot A". Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot C", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot C" has a larger number of rounds than the "jackpot B", and is given a probability variable state after the jackpot is finished. Therefore, it becomes a jackpot type more advantageous than "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with "jackpot A", and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in association with the "jackpot B" in the range of "50 to 59", and the "jackpot C" is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "60 to 99". are stipulated. In other words, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same ratio of benefits (time saving state or probability variable state of normal symbols) given after the end of the jackpot (1:1 ratio), but the number of rounds is 16 The ratio of giving the round jackpot is defined so that the second special symbol is larger.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the "jackpot C" is most advantageous to the player when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win as opposed to the case where the first special symbol lottery results in a big win. ” is configured to be more likely to be selected. Therefore, once the continuous mode (probability variable state of special symbols and time saving state of normal symbols) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is made by entering the ball into the second ball opening 640 by striking to the right. is likely to be executed and a big win is likely to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with one purpose of shifting to the continuous mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202d defines random values for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 for determining the variation pattern (variation time) in the normal mode, a probability variation state, and a normal symbol time saving state (hereinafter referred to as Time saving table 202d2 for determining the variation pattern in the time saving state), and after the jackpot type "jackpot A" which is the jackpot type in which the time saving state is given 100 times after the jackpot ends, the special symbol fluctuation At least a chance table 202d3 for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the 90th to 110th times is included.

First, the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 21(b). FIG. 21(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table 202d1. As shown in FIG. 21(b), the normal table 202d1 is a random number (variation type counter value CS1 counter value) is defined.

In this embodiment, it is defined that a common variation pattern (variation time) is selected regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), specifically, complete as a stop type When a deviation is determined, a fluctuation pattern of short deviation (5 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 98" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and a long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of "99 to 198". second) is associated with the variation pattern. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is lost and the stop reach is determined as the stop type, normal reach various types (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 159" as the value of the variation type counter CS1. 160 to 198” are associated with various types of super reach (60 seconds). In addition, when a special pattern lottery results in a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and super reach is associated with the range of "51 to 179". Various types (60 seconds) are associated, and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with various types of special reach (90 seconds).

Next, with reference to Fig.22 (a), the detail of table 202d2 for probability variation / time reduction contained in variation pattern selection table 202d is demonstrated. This table 202d2 for probability variation and time saving is a table used in order to determine a variation pattern in a probability variation state and a time saving state as above-mentioned.

In this probability variation/time reduction table 202d2, the same variation pattern (variation time) is determined when the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same stop type and the same value of the variation type counter CS1. configured to be Specifically, when the special symbol lottery is lost and complete loss is determined as the stop type, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190" Short loss (5 seconds) is associated. , "191 to 198" is associated with a long deviation (10 seconds). In this way, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, it is out by lottery of special symbols, and when complete outage is determined as the stop type, the ratio of short out is higher than in normal mode (normal state). . Thereby, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the variable probability state and the time saving state which are more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode (normal state).

In addition, if the special symbol lottery is lost and the reach out is determined as the stop type, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the whole range) Normal reach various (30 seconds) are associated. Also, in the lottery of the first special symbol, if it becomes a small hit, which is a kind of outlier, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the whole range) Super reach various (60 seconds ) are associated.

On the other hand, when a special pattern lottery results in a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and super reach is associated with the range of "51 to 179". Various types (60 seconds) are associated, and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with various types of special reach (90 seconds).

In this way, in the variable probability state and the time reduction state in which the variable probability / time reduction table 202d2 is set, unlike the normal mode (normal state), a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected as the selected variation pattern. Further, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to win a big win (for example, a big win C) more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol, is easily executed. As a result, by hitting the ball aiming at the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed efficiently. That is, it becomes an advantageous state in which the variable probability state is likely to be given when the jackpot is won. Therefore, the game can be played with a stronger expectation of a big win.

Next, details of the chance table 202d3 included in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 22(b). This table for chance 202d3, as described above, after the end of the jackpot executed when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the period in which the number of times the special symbol changes is a predetermined number (90 to 110 times after the end of the jackpot) It is a table in which fluctuation patterns (variation times) are defined. In other words, at the end of the time-saving state (90 to 100 times after the end of the jackpot), and from the time-saving state to the normal state It is a table used in the early stage (101 to 110 times after the end of the jackpot) after the game state shifts.

Specifically, when complete deviation is determined as the stop type, a short deviation (5 seconds) variation pattern is associated with the range of "0 to 98" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and "99 to The range of "150" is associated with the variation pattern of long-missing (10 seconds), and the range of "151-198" is associated with the variation pattern of chance-missing (50 seconds). Also, if the special symbol lottery is lost and the stop reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 150" as the value of the variation type counter CS1. 151 to 198” are associated with various types of chance reach (50 seconds). In addition, when a special pattern lottery results in a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 10" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and chance reach is associated with the range of "11 to 179". Various types (50 seconds) are associated, and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". That is, during the period in which the chance table 202d3 is referred to, it is set so that the rate of selecting the chance variation is the highest in the case of winning the jackpot. As a result, the variation display based on the chance variation is executed, so that the player can have an expectation of a big win and an expectation of entering the ball into the specific general ball entrance 630 .

As described above, the chance table 202d3 is configured so that a special variation type (chance variation type) with a variation time of 50 seconds can be selected regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery and the selection result of the stop type. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60, but when the ball is stored in the storage channel 700e with this chance variation type selected, the second frame button (release 22b is executed. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the operation timing suggested in this operation effect, the ball stored in the storage channel 700e is entered into the specific general ball entrance 630. It becomes possible to

By configuring in this way, the balls stored in the storage channel 700e (storage device) during the game state (probability variable state or time saving state) that can provide an advantageous right-handed game to the player are normally The release operation can be efficiently performed in the state. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected using the chance table 202d3 even during the period in which the right-handed game is executed (the final stage of the time-saving game). As a result, it is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the specific general ball entrance 630 even in a state where the remaining number of times of time saving is low and the expectation of winning a jackpot during a right-handed game is low. , the player can be motivated to play the game until the end of the time-saving state.

Furthermore, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the result of this lottery is notified by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b as an operation effect. By configuring in this way, the operation means (second frame button (release button) 22b) for canceling the storage state of the storage device is used to execute an effect that suggests (notifies) the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the period in which the chance table 202d3 is referenced is set to extend from the end of the time saving state to the beginning of the normal state. , time-saving remaining number of times 20 to 10 times), or when the number of lotteries of special symbols exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 600 times) without winning a big hit, etc. A variation pattern is set using the chance table 202d3. Alternatively, without providing the chance table 202d3 as in the present embodiment, in each variation pattern selection table used according to the game state, the predetermined value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the chance variation type. may be specified as follows.

Next, detailed contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e. This movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which an operation scenario used for operation control of the movable valve 750 is stored for each scenario type. are used, the movable valve 750 is operated in the scenario setting order set at the time of power-on processing.

Specifically, operation scenarios 1 to 5 are defined as scenario types in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e. The operation scenario 1 is set as the scenario content of "open 2 seconds→close 0.1 seconds (1 set)×15 times", and is an operation scenario for 31.5 seconds. In other words, the movable valve 750 is movable so that the period during which the falling ball can be guided to the specific general ball entrance 630 (the period during which the movable valve 750 is closed) is 0.1 second out of 2.1 seconds. This is the scenario that works. This "closed 0.1 second" is the period during which the ball reaches the movable valve 750 with good timing and is guided to the specific general ball entrance 630, and the variable operation for closing the movable valve 750 is performed. It is set as a period in which the ball reaches the movable valve 750 even if the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated after the player visually recognizes it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the second frame button (release button) 22b while viewing the operating state of the movable valve 750. FIG.

The operation scenario 2 is set as the scenario content of "open 5 seconds -> close 0.1 seconds (1 set) x 6 times", and is an operation scenario for 30.6 seconds. In operation scenario 2, the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the open state (open) is set longer than in operation scenario 1 described above, and is an operation scenario that is more disadvantageous to the player than in operation scenario 1. Further, since the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the closed state (closed) is the same in the action scenario 1 and the action scenario 2, even if the player grasps the period during which the movable valve 750 is closed, the following It is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the movable valve 750 closes.

In operation scenario 3, "4 seconds open → ((0.1 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds opened) x 3) (1 set) x 6 times" is set as the scenario content, and the operation takes 29.4 seconds. It's a scenario. In this operation scenario 3, unlike the above-described operation scenarios 1 and 2, the period (0.1 seconds) in which the movable valve 750 is in the closed state (closed) is a short period (0.9 seconds) and is repeated several times ( 3 times) This is an operation scenario that is set, and is an operation scenario that makes it easy to guide the ball to the specific general ball entrance 630 .

The operation scenario 4 is set as the scenario content of "open 3 seconds→close 0.5 seconds (1 set)×9 times", and is an operation scenario for 31.5 seconds. In this operation scenario 4, the period during which the movable valve 750 is kept closed (closed) is set longer (0.5 seconds) than in the operation scenarios 1 to 3 described above. As a result, it is possible to widely set the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b for guiding the ball to the specific general ball entrance 630. FIG.

In this way, the operation contents of the movable valve 750, which are predetermined, are divided into operation periods that are advantageous to the player and operation periods that are disadvantageous to the player, and are stored. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the operation of the movable valve 750 that will be executed in the future is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario table 202f. In this movable valve operation scenario table 202f, setting order information for operating the movable valve 750 is added to each scenario type defined in a predetermined order. When the MPU of the main controller 110 executes the operation control of the movable valve 750, the information corresponding to the contents defined in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f is read out from the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e, and the movable valve 750 is moved. The valve 750 is actuated.

In this movable valve operation scenario table 202f, loop processing is executed so that the operation scenario corresponding to the setting order "1" is executed when the operation based on the operation scenario corresponding to the setting order "END" is completed. . In this embodiment, the set order is stored in advance in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f, but other configurations may be used. is provided as the operation start timing of the movable valve 750, the setting order is set to "1" for the scenario type determined at the operation start timing, and the setting order is given in ascending order thereafter. good too. As a result, it is possible to change the action scenario that is executed first when the action of the movable valve 750 is started, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the action of the movable valve 750 .

In addition, a plurality of operation scenarios defined in a predetermined order in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f can be looped and read, and the operation scenario read first (that is, the setting order "1" is set) By differentiating the position of the action scenario to be executed), it is possible to change the action scenario to be executed first when starting the action of the movable valve 750, making it difficult for the player to grasp the action of the movable valve 750. and, when viewed over a long period of time, provide fair variable motion of the movable valve 750 . In addition, it is possible to prevent the operation processing of the movable valve 750 from becoming complicated.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, variable probability flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, release flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, other memory area 203z have at least

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a first per random number counter. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reservation area), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas. Each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Among the areas in which the data is stored, the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to move winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. It is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 34).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 34, S405 in FIG. 36 reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended in the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203d is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is affected by noise and the like, and the main control device Even if there is a deviation from the actual variable display of the number of held balls held in 110, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. It is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 34). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (see S1504 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1405 in FIG. 40).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding variable display in normal symbols M) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 39: No ).

The variable probability flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state of the special symbol (during the variable probability of the special symbol). When the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. In this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game whose jackpot type is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (see S1113 in FIG. 43). Further, the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the start of the big win is set (see S219 in FIG. 34). In addition, in the initialized state (that is, the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed), the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power cut occurs. In this case, the configuration is such that the state immediately before the power cutoff occurs is backed up.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining time period (variation number of special symbols) in the time saving state (time saving state) of normal symbols. The counter 203h during time saving is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is "jackpot A" (see S1112 in FIG. 43). That is, in the present embodiment, if the variable probability state is not set after the jackpot game, the time saving state is given 100 times.

The operation scenario storage area 203i is an area for reading and storing an operation scenario from the movable valve operation scenario table 202f when the operation control of the movable valve 750 (see S1009 in FIG. 46) is started. The operation of the movable valve 750 is controlled based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

The operation counter 203j is a counter used when executing the operation control of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771). Each time the storage valve operation process (see S1206 in FIG. 45) is executed, 1 is added (S1302), and operation control is executed based on the value of the counter.

The release flag 203k is a flag for determining that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. If it is ON, it means that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. , and if it is off, it indicates that the second frame button (release button) 22b is not operated. This release flag 203k is set to ON when it is determined that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 44) (S1202 in FIG. 44: Yes), The storage valve operating process (S1206 in FIG. 45) is executed by setting it to ON, and when the storage valve operating process (S1206 in FIG. 45) ends, it is set to OFF (see S1309 in FIG. 45).

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag that is set to ON in the prize winning process (see S1010 in FIG. (see S1504 in FIG. 47) is used to start counting of a remaining ball timer, which will be described later.

The remaining ball timer 203n is counted to identify the normal range in the prize winning process (see S1010 in FIG. 47) executed to determine whether the ball is normally entering the specific general ball entrance 630. timer. If the ball does not enter the specific general ball entrance 630 even when the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (value corresponding to one second), an error command is set.

The movable valve initial setting flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON in order to start controlling the operation of the movable valve 750, and is used to set the operation of the movable valve in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 41). It is set to ON when performing (see S914 in FIG. 41).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Returning to FIG. 19, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric function. The solenoid 209 consisting of a solenoid for driving an object, the storage valve solenoid 770b for driving the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a, and the movable valve 750 are protruded (allowed) or buried (restricted). The MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205 .

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasure switch (FIGS. 7 and 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, and a storage valve of the storage device. is connected to the second frame button (release button) 22b that is operated when releasing the 7, 122) Based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, and turns on and off the lamp display device 227 (a decorative lamp 227a, a transmission lamp 227b, other lamps 227c, etc.), and changes It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display effect (variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the first frame button (the effect button) 22a, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the first frame button (production button) 22a, and when the player operates the first frame button (production button) 22a, the third symbol display device 81 It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed in , or to change the content of the performance during super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. FIG. 26A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 26(a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a movable valve operation scenario 222b, a music information storage area 222c, and a ball entry timing setting table 222d.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine more detailed variations. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

The movable valve operation scenario 222b is provided so that the operation status of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled by the main controller 110 can also be grasped on the sound lamp controller 113 side, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. This area stores the information stored in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e and the movable valve operation scenario table 202f.

Here, the contents of the movable valve operation scenario 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario 222b. As shown in FIG. 27(a), in the movable valve operation scenario 222b, the same information as the movable valve operation scenario stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is associated with the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t, which will be described later. It is Furthermore, a scenario group is set for a plurality of consecutive scenario types. As a result, based on the movable valve state command output from the main controller 110 side, the sound lamp control device side can grasp the operating status (current operating status and future operating status) of the movable valve. A scenario group set for a plurality of consecutive scenario types is used to determine whether or not the operating state of the movable valve is advantageous to the player.

The music information storage area 222c is an area in which music information used for operation effects is stored, and is referred to when setting the display position of the effect pointer for the music used for the operation effects.

Here, the contents of the music information storage area 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the music information storage area 222c. As shown in FIG. 28, in the music information storage area 222c, there are music data 222c1 and tone range type data (tone range 1 data 222c2, tone range 2 data) set for each tone range type in which the tone range of the music data 222c1 is divided by a predetermined threshold value. 222c3) are stored.

The music data 222c1 is information (scale, tempo, etc.) related to music to be executed (reproduced) in the operation effect, and the range type data (tone range 1 data 222c2, tone range 2 data 222c3) based on this information is set. It is

The range type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data 222c3) is information set by dividing the music data 222c1 into a plurality of ranges (range 1 (high range) and range 2 (low range)). In this information, the position corresponding to the tempo of the music executed in the operation effect (the position where the note is written on the scale of the music data 222c1) is set as the effect pointer displayable area. In this way, by presetting the displayable area of the effect pointer used in the operation effect for the music data, when changing the display position of the effect pointer with respect to the operation effect, it is executed in the operation effect. A performance pointer can be displayed at a timing corresponding to (reproduced) music without a sense of incongruity.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, in the music that is executed (reproduced) in the operation effect, the number of notes written is different between the range 1 and the range 2. In 222c3, many effect pointer displayable areas are set. In other words, the tone range 1 data 222c2 has a wider interval than the tone range 2 data in which the displayable area of the effect pointer can be set. In this way, by making it possible to set the effect pointer displayable area for each sound range for the music to be executed (played) in the operation effect, it is possible to execute different operation effects using the same music. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data necessary for providing various operation effects to the player.

Furthermore, in the operation presentation, when using a configuration in which the player can select the interval at which the operation means (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) are operated, the sound range corresponding to the operation interval selected by the player The operation performance desired by the player can be executed only by executing the operation performance using the type data (sound range 1 data 222c2, sound range 2 data 222c3).

It should be noted that when creating a plurality of range type data from one song data in this way and executing an operation effect corresponding to the range type data selected from each range type data, the selected range type data A corresponding sound may be output when the operating means is operated. This makes it possible to give a sense of unity between the player's operation and the operation presentation when executing the operation presentation with different sound range types for one piece of music. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of range type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data 222c3) are stored for one tune data 222c1 in the tune information storage area 222c. In addition, for example, for one piece of music data 222c1, type data may be set for each of a plurality of musical instruments used, or type data may be set for each of a plurality of different tempos.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b). FIG. 26(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 has a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223e, and a stop type selection. Flag 223f, production counter 223g, round number accumulation counter 223h, variable probability state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, ball passage flag 223n, release operation flag 223p , a release state flag 223q, an effect temporary storage area 223r, a movable valve state storage area 223s, a movable valve operation counter 223t, a movable valve initial flag 223u, a closing timing storage area 223v, and a timing effect setting flag 223w. , effect execution flag 223x, pressing period information storage area 223y, difficulty level storage area 223aa, difficulty level selection flag 223ab, ball passage information storage area 223ac, ball entry timing storage area 223ad, and other memory area 223z. and are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 50) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are variable effects (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of suspended balls (number of standby times) of variable performance suspended in the main controller 110 for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the reserved ball number of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c corresponds to the second special symbol ( It corresponds to the number of pending balls of variable production based on the lottery of special symbol 2).

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 cannot get the value of Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. , the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is added to the number of pending balls in the variable display, or when the main controller 110 When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e Send the command to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S2211 in FIG. 50). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. , while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, the second special symbol The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball patterns corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. while the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

When the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d receives a command set when the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 is increased or decreased, the value is increased or decreased according to the content of the received command. It is a counter used to synchronize the number of reserved balls of normal symbols managed by the main controller 110 side and the number of reserved balls of normal symbols managed by the sound lamp control device 113 side. be. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of normal symbol reserved balls. In addition, regarding the detailed contents of the case where the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the case where the above-mentioned special symbol reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 50), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S2702 in FIG. 55). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 49). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 50), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S2710 in FIG. 55). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated within the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by adding 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 49) is executed. . The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when a pattern of effect is determined by referring to a plurality of counter values in one loop process, different counter values are used. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used in a plurality of places, so that bias in the set effect pattern can be suppressed. It should be noted that the effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing different processing on the value obtained from the same counter. Specifically, among the production patterns, one selection refers to the ones digit of the acquired value, another selection refers to the tens digit of the acquired value, and another selection refers to the one digit of the acquired value. It is also possible to multiply the value obtained by multiplying the digits by 3 by the value obtained by multiplying the tens digits by 5, and refer to the ones digit of the obtained value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress bias in the set effect patterns while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect patterns.

The round number cumulative counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds during the jackpot game, and when a round number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, it is updated to a value corresponding to the command ( S2504 in FIG. 53), the value of the counter is reset to 0 in the jackpot ending effect process (S2513 in FIG. 53). In the sound lamp control device 113, a display round number command is set based on the round number accumulation counter 223h (S2611, S2614 in FIG. 54).

The variable probability state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a variable probability state of special symbols. If this probability variable state flag 223i is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is in a special symbol low probability state. This variable probability state flag 223i is updated according to the content of notification of the state command output from main controller 110. FIG. Depending on the state of the probability variation state flag 223i, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the probability variable state of the special symbol, or whether to display the right-handed warning image when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state. to determine whether

The time saving state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol time saving state. If this time saving state counter 223j is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal pattern time saving state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is in a normal state (low probability state) with normal patterns. This time-saving state counter 223j is updated according to the content of notification of the state command output from the main controller 110. FIG. Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current state is the time saving state of normal symbols, and the corresponding performance is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the time-saving state of normal symbols, or whether to display the right-handed warning image in the normal state.

The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining whether balls are stored in the storage channel 700e, and is set based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor S2 provided in the storage channel 700e. is done. When this storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that balls are stored in the storage channel 700e, and when it is off, it indicates that no balls are stored in the storage channel 700e. The storage state flag 223k is set to ON (see S2853 in FIG. 57) when it is determined that the storage detection sensor S2 detects a ball in the storage state monitoring process (see S2116 in FIG. 57). When it is determined that the sensor S2 has not detected a ball, it is set to OFF (S2855 in FIG. 57). Then, in the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 55), when the variation pattern of the chance pattern is acquired (S2704 in FIG. 55: Yes), it is referred to (S2705 in FIG. 55). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to ON (S2705 in FIG. 55: Yes), an effect (see FIG. 13) for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed.

The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e has reached the upper limit number (five in this embodiment). The setting is made based on the detection result of the provided storage upper limit sensor S1. If the storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the upper limit number of balls is stored in the storage channel 700e, and if it is off, the upper limit number of balls is not stored in the storage channel 700e. indicates that The storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (see S2858 in FIG. 57) when it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects a ball in the storage state monitoring process (see S2116 in FIG. 57). When it is determined that the sensor S1 has not detected the ball, it is set to OFF (S2862 in FIG. 57). Then, during the jackpot production process (see S2504 in FIG. 54), when a predetermined round (7 or 15 rounds in this embodiment) is entered (S2605 in FIG. 54: yes), it is referred to (S2606 in FIG. 54). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (S2606 in FIG. 54: Yes), an effect (see FIG. 11) for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed.

The ball passing flag 223n is a flag for determining that the ball has passed through a predetermined area (the area where the first ball passing sensor S3 is provided) in the board unit 700. FIG. If the ball passing flag 223n is on, it indicates that the ball has passed through the predetermined area. 1 second) has elapsed). This ball passing flag 223n is set to ON when the first ball passing sensor S3 (see FIG. 3) detects the passing of a ball in the ball passing monitoring process (see S1815 in FIG. 56) (S2804 in FIG. 56). Similarly, in the ball passing monitoring process (see S1815 in FIG. 56), if a ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 within a predetermined period of time after the ball passing flag 223n is set to ON (SS2806 in FIG. 56: Yes), if the second ball passing sensor S4 has detected a ball (S2807 in FIG. 56: Yes), or if a predetermined period of time has passed (S2808 in FIG. 56: Yes), it is set to OFF ( S2813).

The release operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. If this release operation flag 223p is ON, it indicates that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the second frame button (release button) 22b has not been operated. indicates This release operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S2219 in FIG. 50) when a release operation command is received (see S2218 in FIG. 50) in the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 50), and is set to ON (see S2219 in FIG. 50). In (see S2217 of FIG. 52), if a command indicating the closed (non-released) state is received (S2404 of FIG. 52: Yes), it is set to OFF (see S2406 of FIG. 52).

The release state flag 223q is a flag for determining whether or not the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is in an open (released) state. If this release state flag 223q is on, it indicates that the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is in the open (released) state. 770, indicating that the second storage device 771) is closed (unreleased). This release status flag 223q is stored in storage device related processing (see S2217 in FIG. 52) that is executed when a storage device related command is received (S2216 in FIG. 50: Yes) in the command determination processing (see S2113 in FIG. 50). is set to ON (see S2402 in FIG. 52) when an open state command (retention state command corresponding to the released state) is received (S2401 in FIG. 52: Yes), and the closed state command (retention state command status command) is received (S2404 in FIG. 52: Yes), it is set to OFF (see S2405 in FIG. 52). When the release state flag 223q is set to ON, the ball passing monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56) is executed, and the ball stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) flows downward. The situation is monitored.

The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the contents of the set effect until the effect is executed. During the period from the set timing (7th or 15th round) to the timing (8th or 16th round) of executing the timing performance (operation performance) during the jackpot, the contents of the timing performance (operation performance) are temporarily stored. . This effect temporary storage area 223r is stored in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62) when it is determined that the effect set this time is a timing effect (operation effect) to be executed during the jackpot (see FIG. 62). S3210: Yes), the set production mode is stored (see S3214 in FIG. 62), and in the jackpot medium production process (see S2504 in FIG. 54), the timing production (operation production) is executed in a round (8 or 16 rounds) ) is executed (S2609 in FIG. 54: Yes), it is read out (S2611 in FIG. 54).

The movable valve state storage area 223s is an area in which information for grasping the operation state of the movable valve 750 (see FIG. 3) on the sound lamp control device 113 side is stored. , the operation status of the movable valve 750 is updated as needed. This movable valve state storage area 223s stores the movable valve operation scenario 222b when the movable valve state information including the initial information is received (S2302 in FIG. 51: Yes) in the movable valve state command process (see S2215 in FIG. 51). is stored (see S2303 in FIG. 51), and the operation state of the movable valve 750 is updated based on the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t. Each time a movable valve state command is received from the main controller 110, it is determined whether the information stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s matches the contents of the movable valve state command (S2309 in FIG. 51). . Also, based on the information stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s, the movable valve closing timing is stored in the closing timing storage area (see S2306 in FIG. 51).

The movable valve operation counter 223t is a counter used for grasping the operation status of the movable valve 750 (see FIG. 3) on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the movable valve operation stored in the movable valve status storage area 223s. It is for updating scenario information. This movable valve operation counter 223t is set to "1" when the movable valve operation scenario is set in the movable valve state storage area 223s (see S2303 in FIG. 51) in the movable valve state command process (see S2215 in FIG. 51). A value is set (S2304 in FIG. 51), and each time the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112 in FIG. 64) executed in the main process (see FIG. 49) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the value of the counter is changed. "1" is added (S3403 in FIG. 64). If the counter value has reached the upper limit, the counter value is set to "1" again (S3404 in FIG. 64). In this way, by updating the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t in the process (main process) that is periodically (1 ms) executed, the operating status of the movable valve 750 is appropriately managed on the sound lamp control device 113 side. be able to.

The movable valve initial flag 223u is a flag for determining that the pachinko machine 10 is in a state immediately after the power is turned on, and is a state in which the movable valve operation scenario is initially set in the movable valve state storage area 223s. It is used to determine whether If this movable valve initial flag 223u is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a state immediately after the power is turned on, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not immediately after the power is turned on. This movable valve initial flag 223u is set to ON (see S2013 in FIG. 48) in the start-up process (see FIG. 48) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is referenced in the movable valve state command process (see FIG. 51) (see FIG. 51 S2301), and after the movable valve operation scenario is set in the movable valve state storage area 223s, it is set to OFF (S2305 in FIG. 51). If the movable valve state command received from the main controller 110 does not include the first time information even though the movable valve first time flag 223u is set to ON, an error command is set (see FIG. 51). (see S2307 of ).

The closing timing storage area 223v is an area for storing the closing timing of the movable valve 750. Based on the information set in the movable valve state storage area 223s, the closing timing of the movable valve 750 (that is, the ball The timing of entering the specific general ball entrance 630) is stored. This closing timing storage area 223v receives the movable valve state command including the initial information from the main controller 110 (S2302 in FIG. 51: Yes) in the movable valve state command process (see S2215 in FIG. 51). When the movable valve operation scenario is set in the storage area 223s, the closing timing of the movable valve is calculated based on the movable valve operation scenario, and the calculated closing timing is stored (S2306 in FIG. 51). The closing timing stored in the closing timing storage area 223v is referred to when setting the effect pointer in the timing effect (operation effect).

The timing effect setting flag 223w is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a timing effect (operation effect) for causing the player to operate the operating means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). If it is ON, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing performance (operation performance) is satisfied, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing performance (operation performance) is not satisfied. In the present embodiment, as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), a specific variation pattern (chance variation type) is selected, and the ball is stored in the storage channel 700e, or A state is set in which a predetermined round (8R, 16R) during a jackpot game is started.

This timing effect setting flag 223w indicates that the variation pattern acquired in the variation display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 55) is a chance pattern (variation pattern indicating the type of chance variation) (S2704 in FIG. 55: Yes), and the stored state If it is determined that the flag 223k is on (S2705 in FIG. 55: Yes), it is set to on. Also, in the hit-related process (S2221 in FIG. 53), when an interval command indicating the end of 7 or 15 rounds is received (S2507 in FIG. 53: Yes) and it is determined that the upper limit flag 223m is ON ( S2508: Yes), it is set to ON.

When the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON, the timing effect (operation effect) is set in the timing effect setting process (see S2111 in FIG. 60) (see S3102 to S3105 in FIG. 60). Then, when the timing effect (operation effect) set this time is executed during the special symbol fluctuation, in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62), after setting the display timing effect command (See S3211 in FIG. 62), it is set to OFF (S3213 in FIG. 62), and if the timing effect (operation effect) set this time is to be executed during the jackpot game, the jackpot during effect processing (Fig. 54 S2504 reference), the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started (S2609 of FIG. 54: Yes), and after setting the display effect round command (see S2611 of FIG. 54), it is turned off. It is set (S2613 in FIG. 54).

The effect running flag 223x is a flag for determining whether a timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not being executed. This effect in-execution flag 223x is referred to when it is determined whether the operation to the operating means (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b) is based on the timing effect (operation effect). The effect executing flag 223x is set to ON (see S3212 in FIG. 62) after setting the display timing effect command (see S3211 in FIG. 62) in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62). ). In addition, in the production process during the jackpot (see S2504 in FIG. 54), a round in which the timing production (operation production) is executed is started (S2609 in FIG. 54: Yes), and after setting the display production round command (FIG. 54 (see S2611 of FIG. 54), it is set to ON (S2612612 of FIG. 54). Then, it is set to OFF when the set timing effect (operation effect) is completed.

The pressing period information storage area 223y stores operation means (first frame button 22a or second frame This is an area for storing the operation timing of the button 22b). In this pressing period information storage area 223y, a successful pressing period is set corresponding to the set display pointer (effect pointer, winning pointer) in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62) (see FIG. 62). S3209 reference). The successful pressing period set here is the timing at which the frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is pressed in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 59). (See S3005 and S3006 in FIG. 59).

The difficulty level storage area 223aa is an area for storing difficulty level information of a timing effect (operation effect) selected by the player. This difficulty level storage area 223aa stores difficulty level information selected in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 59) (see S3012 in FIG. 59). The information stored in the difficulty level storage area 223aa is referred to when setting the effect mode of the corresponding timing effect (S3133 in FIG. 61(a)), and is cleared when the corresponding timing effect (operation effect) ends. be.

The difficulty level selection flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether or not an effect for selecting a difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed (whether the difficulty level can be selected). If it is OFF, it indicates that the timing is not selectable for the difficulty level. The difficulty level selection flag 223ab is referred to when determining whether the operation on the operation means (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b) is based on the effect of selecting the difficulty level. This difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON when it is determined that the first round has started (S2602 in FIG. 54: Yes) in the jackpot middle effect process (see S2504 in FIG. 54), and the first round ends. If it is determined that it is (S2602 in FIG. 54: No), it is set to OFF.

The ball passage information storage area 223ac is an area for storing information indicating the passage period until the ball stored in the storage channel 700e passes through the specific general ball entrance 630 or the outflow port 700b of the board unit 700. is. Based on the information indicating the passing period stored in the ball passing information storage area 223ac, the position where the pointer (effect pointer) is displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) is corrected. This ball passing information storage area 223ac stores information indicating the passing period calculated in the ball passing monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56) (S2812 in FIG. 56), and the timing effect correction process (see S3106 in FIG. 63). (See S3301 in FIG. 63). The ball passage information storage area 223ac is configured to be able to store a plurality of pieces of information (for example, 1000 times) indicating passage periods. Therefore, it is possible to correct the timing effect (operation effect) using the passage period calculated multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate timing effect (operation effect).

In the present embodiment, the ball passing information storage area 223ac is provided in the RAM 223. However, for example, the ball passing information storage area 223ac is provided in a recording medium capable of retaining information even when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. You may

The ball entry timing storage area 223ad stores the ball entry timing set in the timing effect correction process (see S3106 in FIG. 63) based on the passage period calculated in the ball passage monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56). It is an area for Based on the ball-entering timing stored in the ball-entering timing storage area 223ad, the setting of the production mode (production pointer) of the timing production (operation production) is performed.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) executed after the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 65) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 32) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 67(b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 65).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a ``special pattern jackpot'', the ``○'' pattern is displayed for a certain period after stopping the fluctuation production, and if it is ``off the special pattern'', the ``x'' pattern is displayed after the fluctuation production is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in the power-on varying image area 235b, and the power-on varying image is alternately displayed on the third pattern display device. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as indicated by 81 . As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 29, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main pattern (third pattern), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. Also, a right-hand navigation image (see FIG. 11(a)) and the like are stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first pattern display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third pattern display device 81 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where it is not possible.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern imitating the . These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the starting prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. 233i, a stored image data determination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state and the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a that are normally closed will be opened. The round effect is a effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is a effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state (jackpot state).

As described above, the demonstration effect is the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. , the third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, round effect, ending effect and demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 31). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 31).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 31, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 31, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third pattern display device 81 . This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231 (see S5005 in FIG. 65). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S6605 in FIG. 76(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 67(b)). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 67B) and the simple display setting process (see S5308 in FIG. 67(b) S5309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 68 to 72) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 73 to 75) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 76A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 76(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) is executed to transfer the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 32) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed (FIG. 67(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S6205 in FIG. 73) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 32), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see (b )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S6207 in FIG. 73). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S5002 in FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6713 in FIG. 77). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S6714 in FIG. 77). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 78).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed (see S6802 in FIG. 78) each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 67B) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 33 to 47. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (300 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 300, 99, 239, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is opened as the ball passes through. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, respectively. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbols) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if it is determined that the variable time has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C is given.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot is B, the red LED is turned on. Also, if the jackpot is C, the red LED is lit, and if it is a loss, the green LED is lit. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), an opening scenario for a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). The opening scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a. That is, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have won), and in the 12th round, It indicates that the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened in a pattern (see FIG. 16) corresponding to the jackpot type. When the process of S218 is completed, the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF (S219). Next, the time saving medium counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if the lottery result of this time is out (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (S222), and the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0 Yes) (S222: No), the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter 203h is 1 or more during time saving (S222: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203h during time saving (S223). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S224), and when it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S224: No), the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S224: Yes), the process proceeds to S221.

In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a "special symbol big hit" or "special symbol omission" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 .

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , and each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol jackpot is won is acquired from the first hit random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random numbers defined in the first winning random number table 202a. As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become the winning match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have a common determination value for a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 Different random values may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of determination values for the big hit, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 , the number of judgment values that result in a big hit may be varied. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player can win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (low probability game state) with special symbols, Based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. One of "200" is set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value for the special symbol jackpot. It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes). , sets the display mode at the time of the big win indicating the big win (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table 202b, and three types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot It is determined what kind of jackpot is A, jackpot B, and jackpot C).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of symbol variations such as normal reach and super reach is determined. As described above, the relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is specified in the variation pattern selection table 20d.

Variation patterns defined in this variation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, variation patterns for loss, such as "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", "chance loss", "loss Various "normal reach", various "missing super reach", and various "missing chance reach" are defined. In addition, as fluctuation patterns for common use of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared chance reach", and "shared special reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, either reach out or complete out is set.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. to decide.

After the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 42). sent. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. , when there is a starting prize, various random number counters are acquired, and processing for holding the value is executed.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), special symbol 1 reserved 1 is added to the value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is changed. , stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In addition, in the processing of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in each process of S407-S412, the same process as each process of S401-S406 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. FIG. Each of the processes of S407 to S412 is different only in that the process of holding the held ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are the same as those of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, when the processes of S407 to S412 are finished, the prefetch process is executed (S413), and this process is finished.

Next, referring to FIG. 37, the prefetching process (S413) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the starting winning process (see FIG. 36).

In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S501), and either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is If there is no new win (S501: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of start of fluctuation is the probability variable state of special symbols. If it is determined (S502), and if it is a probability variable state of special symbols (S502: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the probability variable state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is S505. to move to. In the processing of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the judgment results of the big hit, are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 38, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second symbol entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of normal symbols (S608), and if it is determined that it is in the time saving state of normal symbols (S608: Yes), Based on the value of the winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S609). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 20(c)).

In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, so the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607. And, based on the second winning random number table for low probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 20(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S609 or S610 is the normal symbol win (S611), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S611: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal pattern (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal pattern (S613: Yes), the electric role associated with the second ball entrance 640 The release period of the object 640a is set to 1 second and the number of times of release is set to 2 (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S613, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of openings is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S611, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S611: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S616). In the processing of S616, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S617, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal design (S617), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal design (S617: Yes), the variable display on the second design display device. is set to 1 second (S618), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S617: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 1 second" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 .

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second pattern display device is fluctuating (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the second pattern display device has elapsed ( S622). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the processing of S618 or S619 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S616, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S616.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether the result of the normal symbol lottery (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Determine (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process ends. When the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or S615 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) to determine whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the free reservation area (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the first area (S705), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. to start NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). In this initialization process, for example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S910.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data has been destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1017 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S911, S912).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S911, S912) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the closing of the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a is set (S913). That is, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) is always closed (that is, the storage channel 700e (see FIG. 3) is closed. It is set so that it cannot pass through). As a result, in the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) can always be in a constant state, and the specific general entrance 630 It is possible to create a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to optimize the gaming state after the RAM 203 is initialized, and to prevent the act of initializing the RAM 203 and illegally storing balls in the specific general entrance 630 .

After completing the process of S912, next, the operation of the movable valve 750 is set (S914). In the process of S914, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p for starting the operation control of the movable valve 750 is set to ON. By setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON, the operation control of the movable valve 750 is performed in the movable valve control process (see S1009 in FIG. 42) of the main process (see FIG. 42) of the main controller 110, which will be described later. be started. In the present embodiment, the initial movable valve setting flag 203p is set to ON in the process of S914 of the start-up process. It may be configured such that the timing to be performed is different.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the operation control of the movable valve is started can be varied each time the start-up process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation status of the movable valve 750 from being grasped based on the elapsed time since the pachinko machine 10 was powered on. Further, in the case of using a configuration in which the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON is different, for example, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to ON at the same timing. It is better to

As a method of varying the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON, for example, a delay timer is provided to delay the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON. It suffices to perform processing for executing a timer. The delay period set in the delay timer can be set by using the values of various counters provided in the main controller 110, by using information stored in a storage area updated as needed, or by lottery. A lottery means for determination may be provided. When the process of S914 is completed, the process proceeds to S915.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S915. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S915, a command (state command) for notifying the game state at the time of power restoration is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S915). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol probability variation state, whether or not the normal symbol time saving state, the number of times of normal symbol time saving, and the like. A state command is generated according to the value of the counter 203 h during time saving and the state of the probability variation flag 203 g and is output to the sound lamp control device 113 . By outputting this status command, the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can recognize the same game status. Therefore, even though the special symbols are in a low probability state, the right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5(a)) is displayed, or conversely, the player is in a definite variable state of the special symbols. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of the hitting right warning image (see FIG. 5B) when the player hits right. That is, it is possible to match the game state with the effect to be executed.

When the processing of S915 ends, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (S916). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S917), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the RAM 203 is not initialized, the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained. 770a, the second reservoir valve 771a) and the movable valve 750 are continuously controlled from the state before the power was turned off. Therefore, even if the power supply is temporarily turned off due to noise or the like, the game can be continued without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Note that when the start-up process is executed, the following control different from the present embodiment is performed as the operation control setting for the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) and the movable valve 750. may be executed. First, the start-up process is executed to determine whether the RAM 203 has been initialized or not. determine. This specifies which of the initialization state, the normal power-on state, and the abnormal power-on state is the state when the start-up process is executed.

In the case of an abnormal power-on state, it is a temporary power-off state (instantaneous power-off state) due to noise or the like. Execute control processing. Next, in the case of the normal power-on state, the same processing as the processing that is executed when the RAM 203 is initialized as described above in this embodiment is executed. Finally, in the initialization state, the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) is closed (that is, the ball cannot pass through the storage channel 700e (see FIG. 3). state), and the movable valve 750 is moved at a specific timing (for example, a delay period of 0 seconds) and at a specific position (for example, the position stored at the top) of the movable valve operation scenario table 202f. It is preferable to execute processing so that the motion control is started from .

As a result, in the abnormal power-on state, the game can be continued without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and in the normal power-on state, the movable valve is operated each time the start-up process is executed. The timing at which motion control is started can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation status of the movable valve 750 from being grasped based on the elapsed time since the pachinko machine 10 was powered on. Furthermore, in the case of the initialization state, the movable valve 750 is controlled by a specific operation content, so that it is possible to easily set the movable valve 750 to operate the same content for a plurality of pachinko machines 10. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) and the start winning process (see FIG. 36). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 43) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set according to the opening scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) for each round of the jackpot state. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S614 or S615 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first pattern display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) has ended, the first symbol display device 37 The variation display being executed is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 35). Display (lit display).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 or the process of S619 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) ( display).

After executing the process of S1007, the storage control process is executed (S1008). This retention control process (S1008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, but it executes a process for setting opening and closing of the first retention valve 770a and the second retention valve 771a.

After the process of S1008 is finished, the movable valve control process is executed (S1009). This movable valve control process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. Execute processing to control to the released state. Next, when the process of S1009 ends, the winning process is executed (S1010). This winning process (S1010) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1010 ends, it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011). The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1012). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1012: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1012: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1013, S1014).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (300 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1011, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S1011: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 40 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1015 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt process (S1015), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1016). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1017), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

The processing of S1011 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1010, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 42). is a process for opening or closing the

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 42). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1103). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is in progress by the processing of S1103 (S1103: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round (S1104). Then, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1104: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1107). Specifically, when a predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls (eg, 10 ), it is determined that the closing condition is established when the above wins are won.

In the process of S1107, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is closed (S1108), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a is not met (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when the special game state (16 rounds or all 8 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending command is set (S1110). The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 42). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

When the processing of S1110 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is jackpot A (S1111), and if jackpot A (S1111: Yes), after the jackpot A ends, the normal pattern time saving state is entered. In order to shift, 100 is set to the value of the counter 203h during time saving (S1112), and this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot A (that is, the jackpot B or C) (S1111: No), after the jackpot B or C ends, the special symbol high probability state In order to make the transition, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (S1113), and the process ends.

Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this storage control process (S1008). This retention control process (S1008) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for setting opening and closing of the first retention valve 770a and the second retention valve 771a. As described above with reference to FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, a plurality of balls (upper limit of five) stored in the storage channel 700e are released one by one based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. The operation of the first reservoir valve 770a of the first reservoir device 770 and the second reservoir valve 771a of the second reservoir device 771 is controlled so as to flow down one by one. By configuring in this way, the balls stored in the storage channel 700e can be caused to flow down in accordance with the timing of the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b performed by the player. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 6, by driving one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b), the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are operated differently. It has a configuration to open (release) and close (non-release) at timing (predetermined timing). By configuring in this manner, the number of parts can be reduced compared to the case where each storage valve is provided with an electric drive source, and the cost and space of the device can be reduced.

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the release flag 203k is on (S1201), and if it is determined that the release flag 203s is not on (ie, off) (S1201: No), 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed (a state is set in which balls can be stored in the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771). It is determined whether or not the player is pressing (operating) the button 22b (S1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal has been detected.

In the processing of S1202, if it is determined that the depression (operation) of the second frame button (release button) 22b has not been detected (that is, the depression detection signal has not been detected) (S1202: No), the first In order to maintain the closed state of the storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the depression (operation) of the second frame button (release button) 22b has been detected (that is, the depression detection signal has been detected) (S1202: Yes), a release button operation command is set (S1203). ). Then, in order to indicate that opening of the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a has been set, the release flag 203k is set to ON (S1204), and the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are opened. A storage state command corresponding to the open state (released state) of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set in order to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the state (S1205), End this process.

The stored state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201, the It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the released state, it outputs to the display control device 114 a display back image change command for setting the back face type corresponding to the released state. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the small area Ds2 is set to display the characters "gate open". This allows the player to easily recognize that the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are in the open state.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the release flag 203k is ON (S1201: Yes), the storage valve operation process for setting the operations of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is executed. (S1206). The details of the storage valve operating process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S1206 ends, it is determined whether the release flag 203k is off (S1207), and if it is determined that the release flag 203k is not off (that is, it is on) (S1207: No), this process ends. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1207, if it is determined that the release flag 203k is ON (S1207: Yes), the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are closed (the first reservoir device 770 and the second reservoir valve 771a are closed). The storage device 771 is set to a state where balls can be stored), so the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set (S1208), and this process is terminated.

The stored state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201, the It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When receiving the stored state command corresponding to the closed state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear face type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the small area Ds2 is set to display the characters "Press the button to open the gate!". This allows the player to easily recognize that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a can be set to the open state by pressing the second frame button (release button) 22b.

By executing this retention control process, the opening or closing of the first retention valve 770a and the second retention valve 771a can be set according to the operation status of the second frame button (release button) 22b. As a result, by storing the ball above the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a at any timing of the player, the state where the ball enters the out port, the first storage device 770 and the second storage valve 771a are stored. It is possible to switch between a state in which a ball that has flowed (entered) into the second storage device 771 flows down toward the specific general ball entrance 630 .

Here, the storage valve operating process (S1206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this storage valve operating process (S1206). This storage valve operation process (S1206) is executed in the storage control process (see FIG. 44), and is a process for setting the operations of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a.

In the storage valve operation process, first, the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the forward direction (S1301), and the operation counter 203j is incremented by 1 (S1302). Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 250 (S1303). In the process of S1303, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 250 (S1303: Yes), the reservoir valve solenoid 770b is set to OFF (S1304), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1303 that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 250 (S1303: No), then it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 375 (S1305). In the processing of S1305, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 375 (S1305: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction (S1306), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the process of S1305 that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 375 (S1305: No), then it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 500 (S1307). In the process of S1307, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 500 (S1307: Yes), the reservoir valve solenoid 770b is set to OFF (S1306). Then, the release flag 203k is set to OFF (S1309), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1310), and this processing is terminated. Also, in the process of S1307, if it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 500 (S1307: No), this process ends.

Next, the movable valve control process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this movable valve control process (S1009). This movable valve control process (S1009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the movable valve 750. FIG.

In the movable valve control process, first, it is determined whether or not the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is on (S1201). Based on the valve operation scenario table 202f, the operation scenario is stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i (S1402). When the process of S1403 ends, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to OFF (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, if it is determined that the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1201: No), the processing of S1402 and S1403 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1404.

In the process of S1404, motion information is acquired from the motion scenario storage area 203i (S1404), and based on the acquired motion information, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new scenario type (S1405). When it is determined that it is time to start a new scenario type (S1405: Yes), a movable valve state command indicating the start of a new scenario type is set (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1407. This movable valve state command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 42). Audio ramp controller 113 transmits the movable valve status command to display controller 114 as is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1405, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start a new scenario type (S1405: No), the process proceeds to S1407. In the process of S1407, based on the operation information acquired in the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not it is time to close the movable valve 750 (S1407). In the process of S1407, if it is determined that it is time to close the movable valve 750 (S1407: Yes), the movable valve solenoid 751 is turned on (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409.

On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the movable valve 750 (S1407: No), the process proceeds to S1409. In the process of S1409, based on the operation information acquired in the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the movable valve 750 (S1409). In the process of S1409, when it is determined that it is time to open the movable valve 750 (S1409: Yes), the movable valve solenoid 751 is set to OFF (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411.

On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the movable valve 750 (S1409: No), the process proceeds to S1411. In the process of S1411, 1 is added to the operation counter 203j, and this process ends.

Next, the prize winning process (S1010) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S1010). This winning process (S1010) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1501). If it is determined that the remaining balls timer flag 203m is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the release flag 203k is on (S1502). If it is determined that the release flag 203k is ON (S1502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the first ball passage sensor S3 has detected the passage of the game ball (S1503). When it is determined that the first ball passage sensor S3 has detected the passage of the game ball (S1503: Yes), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if it is determined that the release flag 203k is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1502: No), and in the process of S1503, the first ball passing sensor S3 detects the passage of the game ball. If it is determined that it has not (S1503: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to S1505.

When it is determined in S1501 that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1501: Yes), and when the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON in S1504, the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a means the release period (open period) of the first and second storage valves 770a and 771a. Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n after updating is the upper limit value (that is, whether one second has passed since the release of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a was set) (S1506). ), if it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (one second has not passed) (S1506: No), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 (S1507), When it is determined that the game ball has not entered the general ball entrance 630 (S1507: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1507, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to S1508. On the other hand, in the process of S1506, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit (S1506: Yes), an error command is set (S1510), and the process proceeds to S1508. The error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 42). It is sent towards device 113 . When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is set, and an error signal is set to be output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball from entering the specific general ball entrance 630 illegally.

In the process of S1508, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1508), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1509). After that, this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 63. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 48, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2120 (see FIG. 49) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 49, when the audio lamp controller 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 49), it executes power-off processing in S2120. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2120 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2120. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to SS2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2120 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2120 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 49). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2120 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2120 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), an interrupt Permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010). Next, the variable probability state flag 223i is updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2011), the interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main processing. By updating the variable probability state flag 223i based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main controller 110 and the game state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect according to the game state.

The reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process of S2008 is reached from S2004 via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2112 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S2113 command determination processing, S2114 variable display setting processing, S2115 ball passage monitoring processing, and S2116 retention state monitoring processing are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay. In addition, by executing the process of S2115 in a short cycle, it is possible to set the passing counter without delay based on the first ball passing sensor S3 and the second ball passing sensor S4, and the process of S2116 can be performed in a short cycle. By being executed, it is possible to set the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m without delay based on the storage state.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2116 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing, an input as to whether or not the first frame button 22a operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect is monitored, and the input of the first frame button 22a is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case. In this process, when the player's operation of the first frame button 22a is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the first frame button 22a is set in the display control device 114. FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the processing of S2110 ends, timing effect setting processing is performed (S2111). Details of this timing effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the process of S2111 is finished, the movable valve operation counter update process is executed (S2112). This movable valve operation counter update process is a process for updating the movable valve operation counter based on the movable valve operation scenario. The details of this movable valve operation counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the movable valve operation counter update process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S2113). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In the process of S2114, a variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S2115. In the process of S2115, ball passing monitoring process is executed (S2115). In the ball passage monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this ball passage monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S2116. In the process of S2116, a storage state monitoring process is executed (S2116). In the storage state monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the storage state monitoring process is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S2117). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2117 (S2117: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2119), and the power-off processing is executed (S2120). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2121), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2117 (S2117: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2118), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2118: No), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2118: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. This process is for

In the command determination process (FIG. 50, S2113), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is determined. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2201). In addition, the variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and from the main controller 110, the selected variation pattern (variation time) is the first special symbol and the second special It is output corresponding to each of the patterns.

In the process of S2201, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command is extracted (S2203), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so that the variation pattern type of the special symbol can be identified for each type of special symbol (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol). When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later. (When setting a variation pattern command for displaying special symbols) is used.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). If it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) is received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the type of the received command is set to ON (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to ON. Next, the stop type (completely off, out of reach, small hit, jackpot A to C) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the process ends. The stop type extracted in the processing of S2206 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. Then, it is referred to when the later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) is executed, and is used to set a stop type command for display that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

In the processing of S2204, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2207). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), the display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this processing ends.

Next, it is determined whether or not a pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S2209). If it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command (i.e., the number of holding balls for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is extracted. The counter value is updated (S2210), and this process ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value of is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). Every time there is, by the processing of S2210, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 are set to special symbol 1 reserved of the main control device 110 It is possible to match the values of the ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Or even if the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e deviates, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

Also, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2212). In the process of S2212, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2212: Yes), the winning information command reception process is executed (S2213). In this winning information command reception process (S2213), setting of various flags and setting of various counters to be referred to for setting various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 are performed. As a result, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, before the variation of the pending special symbol is started (that is, the special symbol executed before the target special symbol variation) During the variable display), it is possible to execute a performance showing the lottery result of the special symbol for which the winning information command is transmitted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. Suggestion notification can be performed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that the winning information command has not been received (S2212: No), it is determined whether or not the movable valve state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2214). If it is determined that the movable valve state command has been received (S2214: Yes), the movable valve state command process is executed (S2215), and this process ends.

Here, referring to FIG. 51, the movable valve state command processing (S2215) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the movable valve state command process (S2215). This movable valve state command processing (S2215) is executed for the sound lamp controller 113 side to grasp the operating state (open, closed state) of the movable valve 750 controlled by the main controller 110. FIG. In this embodiment, the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores a movable valve operation scenario 222b that includes the same information as the operation information (operation scenario) for the main controller 110 to operate the movable valve 750. By synchronizing the progress of the operation information with the operation control of the main controller 110 , the sound lamp control device 113 side can grasp the future operation status of the movable valve 750 . As a result, the effect based on the opening timing and closing timing of the movable valve can be set and executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side. By executing an effect based on the opening timing and closing timing of the movable valve, it is possible to suggest the timing to operate (press) the second frame button 22b to the player.

When the movable valve state command process (S2215) is executed, first, it is determined whether the movable valve first time flag 223u is ON (S2301). If it is determined that the movable valve first time flag 223u is ON (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether the first time information is included in the movable valve state command received this time (S2302). That is, the movable valve state command received in the state where the movable valve initial flag 223u, which is set to ON when the power is turned ON, is set to ON is executed in the startup processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 41). It is determined whether the command is a movable valve state command including initial information indicating that the operation control of the movable valve 750 set in the operation setting of the movable valve (see S914 in FIG. 41) is started. In the processing of S2302, if it is determined that the first time information is included in the movable valve state command received this time (S2302: Yes), the content of the movable valve operation scenario 222b is set in the movable valve state storage area 223s (S2303 ), the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t is set to 1 (S2304), and the movable valve initial flag 223u is set to OFF (S2305).

Then, based on the movable valve operation scenario set in the movable valve state storage area 223s and the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t, the timing at which the movable valve 750 is closed is acquired. The acquired movable valve closing timing is stored in the closing timing storage area 223v (S2306), and this processing ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 has the same information as the operation scenario information used when the main control device 110 controls the operation of the movable valve 750, and the main control device 110 controls the operation of the movable valve 750. 750, information indicating the start (initial information) is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113, and when the audio ramp control device 113 receives the initial information, the operation scenario of the movable valve 750 is set. The same information as the information is used to grasp the operation status of the movable valve 750 . The first time information set in the startup process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 41) includes the start timing of movable valve 750 and the type of operation scenario to be used. As other information, for example, when using a configuration in which the operation start timing of the movable valve 750 is different (delayed), the actual movable valve 750 is actually movable after the start-up process (see FIG. 41) of the main controller 110 is executed. Period information indicating a period until the operation of the valve 750 is started (that is, a delay period) may be included in the initial information.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the start point of the operation scenario is changed when the operation of the movable valve 750 is started, it is preferable to include information indicating the start point set this time in the initial information. Further, the initial information may include period scenario information indicating operation scenario information for a predetermined period after the operation of the movable valve 750 is started. As a result, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the initial information, it becomes possible to set the contents of the movable valve operation scenario 222b in the movable valve state storage area 223s based on the period scenario information for a predetermined period. Synchronization with the operation status of the movable valve 750 can be facilitated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2302 that the information received this time does not include the first time information (S2302: No), the main controller 110 start-up processing (see FIG. 41) and the sound lamp control device 113 are started. It is determined that the timing at which the process (see FIG. 48) is executed is different, an error command is set (S2307), and this process ends. When an error command is set here, a notice to the effect that the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again is made to the third symbol display device 81 based on the set error command. Then, by turning on the power again, the start-up processing of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 is executed again, and the normal state can be restored. If the error command is set even after the power is turned on again several times, it is determined that the start-up timing of the main controller 110 and the start-up timing of the sound lamp control device 113 are not normal timings. It may be configured to change the setting contents of the error command.

In the processing of S2301, if it is determined that the movable valve first time flag 223u is not ON (it is OFF) (S2301: No), the current operation status of the movable valve 750 updated by the sound lamp control device 113 as needed is read from the movable valve state storage area 223s (S2308), and compared with the movable valve state command received this time to determine whether the contents match (S2309). Here, if it is determined that the contents match (S2309: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the contents do not match (S2309: No), an error command indicating that the contents do not match is set (S2307), and this processing ends.

Here, if the information indicating the operating status of the movable valve does not match the movable valve status command received from the main controller 110 and the operating status of the movable valve status storage area 223s of the sound lamp control device 113, it means that they do not match. A storage means capable of storing the number of determinations may be provided, and an error command may be set when the number of times stored in the storage means is stored a predetermined number of times, more specifically, when the number of times is stored consecutively a predetermined number of times. As a result, it is possible to suppress the determination as an error of a case in which a result of determination that does not match the contents due to a sudden noise is generated.

In this embodiment, the operation scenario used when controlling the operation of the movable valve 750 by the main controller 110 is configured by combining a plurality of scenario types for a predetermined period (approximately 30 seconds). is configured to transmit a movable valve state command at the timing of switching to a new scenario type. As a result, the total number of commands output from main controller 110 to sound lamp controller 113 can be reduced. In addition, when the sound lamp control device 113 is in a state where there is a possibility of executing an effect based on the operation status of the movable valve 750, that is, when the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern , when the chance table 202d3 is referred to, when a chance variation type is actually selected from the chance table 202d3, when a big win is started, etc., the movable valve state command is output. As a result, the total number of commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and effects that make the player feel uncomfortable can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 50, the description continues. In the processing of S2214, if it is determined that the movable valve state command has not been received (S2214: No), it is determined whether or not the storage device related command has been received (S2216). If it is determined in S2216 that a storage device-related command has been received (S2216: Yes), storage device-related processing is executed (S2217), and this processing ends.

Here, the storage device related processing (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing storage device related processing (S2217). This storage device related process (S2217) is the operation of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) executed based on the player's operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. This is a process for the audio lamp control device 113 to grasp the content.

When the storage device-related processing (S2217) is executed, first, the storage device-related command received this time indicates that the storage device is in an open (released) state (a state in which a ball can flow down the storage channel 700e (see FIG. 3)). (S2401). In the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the command indicates the open state (S2401: Yes), the release state flag 223q is set to ON (S2402), the release command for display is set (S2403), and this processing is executed. finish. The display release command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114, and when the storage device is released, a dedicated effect is executed. As this exclusive effect, for example, a suggestion mode suggesting a privilege (15 prize balls) given to the player when the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630, the suggested mode is changed to the confirmed mode, and when the ball does not enter the specific general ball entrance 630, the suggested mode is changed. A disappearing effect is executed.

In the process of S2401, if it is determined that the storage device-related command received this time is not a command indicating an open state (S2401: No), it is determined whether the storage device-related command received this time is a command indicating a closed state. (S2404), if the command indicates the closed state (S2404; Yes), the release state flag 223q is set to OFF (S2405), the release operation flag 223p is set to OFF (S2406), and the non-release for display is set. A command is set (S2407), and this processing ends.

In this embodiment, the non-released state in which the balls are stored in the storage channel 700e and the released state in which the balls can flow down in the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) are divided into the first It is made variable by controlling the operation of the storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a (see FIG. 9). Since this operation control is a control for varying the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a in a preset order, after receiving a command indicating a release (open) state in which the ball can flow down, There is a fixed period (1 second) before receiving a command indicating a non-released (closed) state in which the ball is parked. Therefore, in the storage device-related processing (S2217), a measuring means is provided for measuring the period from the reception of the command indicating the open (released) state, and the measuring means measures the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, one second). It may also be configured to set an error command if no command is received indicating a closed (non-released) state. As a result, it is possible to immediately determine that the status of the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) whose operation is being controlled by the main controller 110 is not normal.

Returning to FIG. 50, the description continues. If it is determined in the processing of S2216 that the storage device related command has not been received (S2216: No), then it is determined whether or not the release operation command has been received (S2218). In the process of S2218, if it is determined that the release operation command has been received (S2218: Yes), the release operation flag 223p is set to ON (S2219), and this process ends. This release operation command is a command output when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the release operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command has been received (S2220).

In the process of S2220, if it is determined that the win-related command has been received (S2220: Yes), the win-related process is executed (S2221), and this process ends. Details of the win-related process (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S2220, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S2220: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S2222), and this processing ends.

In the process of S2222, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114. For example, a ball entry command set based on the entry of a ball into each ball entry hole provided on the game board 13 is received, a process of accumulating the number of balls entered for each type of entrance into which the ball entered is executed.

Next, the hit-related processing (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the win-related processing (S2221). This hit-related process (S2221) is a process executed during the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 560) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This process is executed when a hit-related command is received from the device 110 .

When the winning related process (S2221) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot opening command is received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then the display opening command is set (S2502), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that the opening command has not been received (S2501: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2503). In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2503: Yes), the round number cumulative counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the jackpot middle effect process is executed ( S2505), the process ends.

Here, the effect processing (S2505) during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the effect processing (S2505) during the big hit. In this jackpot middle effect processing (S2505), as effects to be executed during the big win, in addition to the jackpot game effect for congratulating the big win, an operation effect ( A timing effect) and a difficulty level selection effect for allowing the player to select the difficulty level of the operation effect (timing effect) are set, and each effect is executed.

When the big hit production process (S2505) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the production execution flag 223x is ON. If it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is not on (is off) (S2601: No), then it is determined whether the round number command received this time is the round number command indicating the first round of the jackpot. (S2602). In the process of S2602, if it is determined that the command is the number of rounds command indicating the first round (S2602: Yes), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON (S2603), and this process ends. By setting the difficulty level selection flag 223ab to ON here, based on the operation signal of the frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) operated while the first round of the jackpot is being executed The process of selecting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S2107 in FIG. 59), which will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2602, if it is determined that the command is not the number of rounds indicating the first round (S2602: No), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to OFF (S2604), and then the number of rounds received this time is It is determined whether the command is the 7th round or the 15th round of the jackpot (S2605). In the processing of S2605, if it is determined that the command is the number of rounds indicating the 7th or 15th round (S2605: Yes), it is determined whether the upper limit flag 223m is ON (S2606), and the upper limit flag 223m is determined. is on (S2606: Yes), the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, so the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (S2607), and the forewarning round command for display is set (S2608), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2605, if it is determined that the number of rounds command received this time is not the 7th or 15th round of the jackpot (S2605: No), or in the processing of S2606, the storage upper limit flag 223m is not ON If so (S2606: No), the timing effect (operation effect) is not executable, so the process proceeds to S2609 without setting the timing effect setting flag 223w to ON.

In the processing of S2609, it is determined whether the round number command received this time is the 8th or 16th round of the jackpot (S2609), and if it is determined that it is the 8th or 16th round (S2609: Yes) , determines whether the timing effect setting flag 223w is ON (S2610). That is, whether the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON in the round (7th round or 15th round) immediately before the 8th round or 16th round received this time (timing effect (operation effect) can be executed) condition is met). In the processing of S2610, if the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (S2610: Yes), next, the timing effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and the display effect round command is set (S2611). ). Then, the effect executing flag 223x is set to ON (S2612), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to OFF (S2613), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S2611, the read timing effect information is set in the timing effect setting process (see S2111 in FIG. 60), which will be described later, based on the fact that the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON. There is, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S2609, if it is determined that the number of rounds command received this time is not the 8th or 16th round of the jackpot (S2609: No), or in the process of S2610, the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON. If it is determined that it is not (set to OFF), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2614), and this process is terminated.

Various display round number commands set here are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 and are , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives various display round number commands, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Thus, in this embodiment, the current round number is determined by the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. A configuration other than this may be used. For example, by including information indicating the current round number in the round number command, the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h may be eliminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, the first round (first round) is performed to select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) that is executed during the jackpot. (See FIG. 17). Furthermore, the condition (storage channel 700e (see FIG. 3) that the maximum amount of balls is stored) is established, and if the condition is satisfied, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the next round. is executed (see FIG. 11(a)). Then, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 11(b)).

In this way, since the notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the player is made to operate the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). It is possible to inform in advance that the performance will be executed. In addition, in the round in which the notice effect is executed, it is determined that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and the notice effect is executed only when the condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the advance notice effect is executed.

Furthermore, since the fact that the upper limit number of balls is stored in the storage channel 700e is set as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the effect used as the timing effect (operation effect) is can be fixed to the effect using five, and the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not limited to this, and may be a condition that a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls are stored, or a ball is stored in the storage channel 700e. The timing effect (operation effect) may be executed regardless of whether or not is stored. Also, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e may be discriminated, and the presentation mode of the timing effect (operation effect) may be changed based on the determination result. Specifically, the number of times the second frame button (release button) 22b for changing the storage channel 700e to the released state is operated corresponds to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e. It may be changed, and regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e, a specific timing effect (operation effect), that is, the number of operations of the second frame button (release button) 22b is fixed. It may be configured to execute a timing effect (operation effect).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect), the player can select the timing effect (operation effect) effect mode according to his or her skill level. can be set, the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured such that the advance notice effect is executed when the conditions for executing the timing effect (operation effect) are satisfied. That is, the fact that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is established is suggested to the player based on the execution of the advance notice effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e and the number of stored balls required for executing the timing effect (operation effect), and , an effect prompting to store balls in the storage channel 700e may be executed. As a result, the player can play the game of storing the balls in the storage channel 700e in addition to the game of winning the balls in the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, in order to store the balls in the storage channel 700e, even in the state (interval state) in which the variable prize winning device 65 is closed during the big win, the balls are continuously launched, so the operation of the game is prohibited. can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of rounds provided as a jackpot is 8 rounds and a jackpot (jackpot type is "jackpot B"), and a 16-round jackpot (jackpot types are "jackpot A" and "jackpot C"). are provided. In other words, in the case of the 8-round jackpot, the maximum number of times the timing production (operation production) is executed during the jackpot game is 1, and in the case of the 16-round jackpot, the timing production (operation production) is executed during the jackpot game. The maximum number of times that the As a result, it is possible to give different benefits depending on the type of jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the player.

In this embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, but other configurations may be used. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are stored in the next round, the timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. As a result, the player can more positively play a game in which balls are stored in the storage channel 700e.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description is continued. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not the number-of-rounds command (S2503: No), then it is determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from main controller 110 when each round in the jackpot ends. In the process of S2506, if it is determined that an interval command has been received (S2506: Yes), the number of completed rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the calculated result is the 7th or 15th round. It is determined whether it indicates the end (S2507).

In the processing of S2507, if it is determined that the interval command received this time is the interval command indicating the end of the 7th or 15th round (S2507: Yes), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is ON (S2508). , is determined to be on (S2508: Yes), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to on (S2509), the corresponding display interval command is set (S2509), and this processing ends. That is, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 54, in the round (seventh or fifteenth round) in which the announcement effect is executed, it is determined whether the conditions for executing the timing effect (operation effect) are established. In addition to this, even at the timing when the round (7th or 15th round) before execution of the timing effect (operation effect) ends, It is determined again whether the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is established, and based on the determination result, the timing effect setting flag 223w can be set to ON.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied until immediately before the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started, It is possible to increase opportunities to provide timing effects (operation effects) to the player. In this case, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed without executing the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected timing effect (operation effect) to a player who is disappointed that the advance notice effect has not been executed.

Although details are not shown, for the processing of S2507 to S2509, when the timing effect setting flag 223w is already set to ON in the effect processing during the jackpot (see S2504 in FIG. 54), the process is configured to be skipped. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether the jackpot ending command has been received (S2511). In the process of S2511, when the jackpot ending command is received (S2511: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S2512), the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is cleared (S2513), and this process ends. Moreover, in the process of S2511, also when it determines with not having received the jackpot ending command (S2511:No), this process is complete|finished.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2114). This variable display setting process (S2114) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) is based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, a process of generating a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (complete failure, reach failure, jackpot), a process of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variable display setting process (FIG. S2114), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S2709. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is ON (S2701: Yes), based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the detailed aspect of the fluctuation display of the special symbol of this time is determined. Each process of S2702 to S2708 for the purpose is executed.

More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S2702), then the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S2703), and it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern extracted this time is a chance pattern (S2704 ). In the processing of S2704, in the special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S213 in FIG. 35), when a variation pattern command in which "chance lost" and "chance reach" are determined as the variation type of the variation pattern is received Secondly, it determines that the variation pattern extracted this time is a chance pattern. In the processing of S2704, if it is determined that the acquired variation pattern is a chance pattern (S2704: Yes), then it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2705), and it is determined that it is ON. In this case (S2705: Yes), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON assuming that the conditions for executing the timing effect (operation effect) are satisfied (S2706).

In the present embodiment, when a variation pattern command indicating a variation type of a variation pattern capable of executing a chance effect (operation effect) is received as described above, it is established that balls are stored in the storage channel 700e. As a condition, the chance effect (operation effect) is executed, but the chance effect (operation effect) may be executed without determining whether or not there is a ball on the storage channel 700e. As a result, when a ball flows into the storage channel 700 e during the chance production, the ball can be easily entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 .

Then, a display variation pattern command is set (S2707), and then 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c). Then, based on the subtracted value, the data in the winning information storage area included in the command storage area is shifted (S2709), and the process proceeds to S2709.On the other hand, in the process of S2704, the variation pattern acquired this time is the chance pattern. If it is determined that it is not (S2704: No), or if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (it is off) in the processing of S2705 (S2705: No), that is, the current fluctuation display setting In the process (S2114), when it is determined that the conditions for executing the timing effect (operation effect) are not established, the process of S2706 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2707.

In the processing of S2709, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2709). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2709: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2709, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is ON (S2709: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to OFF (S2710), then the command determination process (FIG. 50 ), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2711), and the acquired stop type is set (S2712). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S2713), and this processing ends.

Next, the ball passage monitoring process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this ball passage monitoring process (S2115). This sphere passage monitoring process (S2115) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and (See FIG. 3) is a process for monitoring the passage of the ball that has flowed down.

In the ball passage monitoring process (S2115), first, it is determined whether the release state flag 223q is ON (S2801). Here, if it is determined that the release state flag 223q is not ON (is OFF), the storage channel 700e is not in a release (open) state in which the ball can flow down, so this processing ends. In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the release state flag 223q is ON (S2801: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball passage flag 223n is ON (S2802). In the process of S2802, if it is determined that the ball passing flag 223n is off (S2802: No), then, based on the detection result of the first ball passing sensor S3, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the first ball passing sensor S3. is determined (S2803). In the process of S2803, if it is determined that the ball has passed (S2803: Yes), the ball passing flag 223n is set to ON (S2804), the passing counter 223ae is set to "1" (S2805), and the process of S2806 is performed. to

In other words, in the processing of S2801 to S2805 described above, the cancellation state flag 223q is set to ON, and the period is is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S2802, if it is determined that the ball passing flag 223n is ON (S2802: Yes), the measurement of the period has already started, so the processing of S2803 to S2805 is skipped. Move to S2806. In addition, in the processing of S2803, if it is determined that the first ball passage sensor S3 has not detected the passage of the ball (S2803), it is immediately after the storage channel 700e has been changed to the release state, and the ball has not yet passed. Since the ball has not yet reached the first ball passing sensor S3, this process is terminated.

In the process of S2806, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 (S2806). In the process of S2806, if it is determined that no ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 (S2806: No), then it is determined whether the second ball passage sensor S4 has detected the passage of the ball ( S2807), if the passage of the ball is not detected (S2807: No), it is determined whether the value of the passage counter 223ae has reached the upper limit (value corresponding to 1 second) (S2808). In the processing of S2808, if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached (S2808: No), 1 is added to the value of the passage counter 223ae (S2809), and this processing ends. Thus, in the process of S2805, when the value of the passage counter 223ae is set to "1", the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630, or the passage of the ball is detected by the second ball passage sensor S4, or , the value of the passing counter 223ae is incremented by "1" each time this process is executed (every 1 ms) until the value of the passing counter 223ae reaches the upper limit (adds up to the value indicating 1 second).

On the other hand, in the process of S2806, if it is determined that the ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 (S2806: Yes), the passing period of the ball (the ball is (S2811), and information indicating the calculated passing period is set in the ball passing information storage area 223ac (S2812). ), and the process proceeds to S2813. Also, in the process of S2807, when the second ball passing sensor S4 detects the passing of the ball (S2812: Yes), the passing period of the ball (when the ball passes through the first ball passing sensor) is determined based on the current value of the passing counter 223ae. The period from passing through S3 to passing through the second ball passing sensor S4) is calculated (S2811), the process of S2812 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2813.

In the processing of S2808, if it is determined that the value of the passage counter 223ae is the upper limit value (value indicating 1 second) (S2808: Yes), a predetermined period has passed since the first ball passage sensor S3 detected the passage of the ball. Since the ball does not enter the specific general ball entrance 630 and does not pass through the second ball passing sensor S4 during (1 second), there is a possibility of ball jamming, so an error command is issued. is set (S2810), and the process proceeds to S2813.

In the process of S2813, since the process for the ball whose passage was detected by the first ball passing sensor S3 is completed, the ball passing flag 223n is set to OFF (S2813), and the value of the passing counter 223ae is reset (S2814). , the process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the ball passing monitoring process (S2115), a process for correcting the timing effect (operation effect) effect mode is executed based on the period information indicating the ball passing period stored in the ball passing information storage area 223ac. be done. Specifically, based on the period until the ball flowing down the storage channel 700e passes through the specific general ball entrance 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4, the player is given a second Correction processing is executed to change the display timing of the effect pointer indicating the timing for operating the frame button (release button) 22b. Details of this correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. It is possible to more deeply associate the effect mode to be executed and the actual ball flow situation, and it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

Note that in the present embodiment, the reference period required for the ball that has passed through the first ball passing sensor S3 to enter the specific general ball entrance 630 and the specific general period that the ball passing through the first ball passing sensor S3 The mounting position of the second ball passing sensor S4 is determined so that the reference period required for the ball to enter the ball entrance 630 is the same as the reference period. By using both the passage period calculated when the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 and the passage period calculated when the ball passes through the second ball passage sensor S4, It is possible to determine whether there is a need for correction in the timing performance.

Note that the method for measuring the passage period is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and for example, the passage period based on when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated) , or the passage period may be measured only when the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 . In addition, the position of the second ball passing sensor S4 is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and the second ball passing sensor S4 is located at a point where the passing period differs from the passing period of the ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630. may be placed.

Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2116) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this storage state monitoring process (S2116). This storage state monitoring process (S2116) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and (See FIG. 3) This is a process for determining whether a ball is stored above.

Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771 are provided as storage devices capable of storing balls on the game board 13, and a maximum of five storage devices are provided. spheres can be stored. Each storage device has a first storage valve 770a and a second storage valve 771a, respectively. The first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are second frame buttons (release buttons) that can be operated by the player. 22b is operated (depressed) to cause the stored balls to flow down one by one. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the storage detection sensor S2 capable of detecting the presence of the first ball stored when the second storage valve 771a is closed, and the upper limit number of balls (5 A storage upper limit sensor S1 capable of detecting that the number of balls is stored is provided, and the state of storage of the balls on the storage channel 700e can be determined.

In this storage state monitoring process (S2116), first, it is determined whether the storage detection sensor S2 is on (S2851). When it is determined that the storage detection sensor S2 is ON in the processing of S2851 (S2851: Yes), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2852), and it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not ON. If so (S2852: No), the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2856. On the other hand, in the process of S2852, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2852: Yes), the process of S2853 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2856.

Further, in the process of S2851, if it is determined that the storage detection sensor S2 is off (S2851: No), then it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2854), and it is determined that it is on. If so, the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF (S2855), and the process proceeds to S2856. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2854 that the storage state flag 223k is off (S2854: No), the process of S2855 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2856. In this manner, the setting of the storage state flag 223k is updated at any time based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor S2.

In the process of S2856, it is determined whether the storage upper limit sensor S1 is ON (S2856). In the process of S2856, if it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is ON, that is, if it is determined that the upper limit amount of balls is stored in the storage channel 700e (S2856: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (S2857), and if the storage upper limit flag 223m is OFF (S2857: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is set to ON (S2858). When it is determined that the state flag 223k is ON (S2858: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (S2859), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2858, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is off (S2858: No), the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects the ball even though the storage detection sensor S2 does not detect the ball. Since it is in the detected state, an error command is set (S2860), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2857, if the storage upper limit flag 223m is ON (S2857: Yes), this process ends.

Also, in the process of S2856, if it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is off (S2856: No), then it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2861), and it is not on (off ) (S2861: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is ON in the process of S2861 (S2861: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to OFF (S2862), and this process ends.

As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2116) in this embodiment, it is determined whether the balls are stored in the storage channel 700e and whether there is an abnormality in the ball storage. Since the upper limit flag 223m) and an error command can be set, the sound ramp control device 113 can perform an effect based on the storage state of the storage channel 700e.

Next, the lamp output process (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this lamp output process (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and sets a lamp lighting command to be sent to the lamp display device 227. This process is for Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, as the lamp display device 227, a decorative lamp 227a used for effects provided over the entire pachinko machine 10, and a board surface unit 700 (see FIG. 3 ), a transmission lamp 227b for making the inside of the cover member 710 visible to the player, and another lamp 227c. It is

When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is within a predetermined period of time (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, a predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) clocked by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 . In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the time is within 30 seconds (S2901: Yes), a transmissive lamp lighting command is set (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905.

Here, in this embodiment, the cover member 710 is provided in order to prevent the player from visually confirming the operating state of the movable valve 750 in the normal game state. As described above, the cover member 710 is configured to change from a shielding state in which the inside is difficult to see to a transparent state in which the inside can be seen, by irradiating the predetermined light (light of the lamp for transmission) from the back side as described above. there is For a predetermined period after turning on the gaming machine (predetermined period after execution of start-up processing), the transparent lamp is lit regardless of the game state. As a result, the inside of the board unit 700 covered with the cover member 710 can be easily visually recognized immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, that is, at the timing when the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by the clerk.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2901, if it is determined that the present time is not within the predetermined period (30 seconds) after the startup processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (the predetermined period (30 seconds) has passed), ( S2901: No), next, it is determined whether or not the first ball passing sensor S3 has detected the passage of the ball (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the first ball passing sensor S3 detects the passage of the ball (S2902: Yes), a transmissive lamp lighting command is issued so that the player can visually recognize the ball that has passed the first ball passing sensor S3. set (S2904) and proceed to the processing of S2905. In this case, the transmission lamp lighting command is set so that the transmission lamp 227b is turned on for a time sufficient for the ball to pass through the area covered by the cover member 710 (for example, 0.7 seconds). However, for example, on condition that a ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 or that the second ball passage sensor S4 has detected the passage of the ball, the transmission lamp 227b is turned off. You may As a result, the period during which the cover member 710 is in the transparent state can be minimized, making it difficult for the player to grasp the operating state of the movable valve 750 .

Here, in the present embodiment, in the board unit 700, the area where the balls stored in the storage channel 700e can flow down (the area where the specific general ball entrance 630 and the movable valve 750 are provided) is difficult to see. is covered with a cover member 710 (see FIG. 2). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the operation status of the movable valve 750, but when the ball passes through the area covered by the cover member 710, the player cannot grasp the whereabouts of the ball. However, there is a risk that the player will be dissatisfied. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is determined by detection of the ball by the first ball passing sensor S3 that the ball passes through the area covered by the cover member 710, and the cover member 710 is changed to the transmission state. With this configuration, the player can reliably grasp the passing (flowing down) state of the ball, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, by changing the cover member, which is in a state where the inside cannot be seen in the normal state (the state where the lamp for transmission is not lit), to the transparent state where the inside can be seen, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to make it easy for the player to notice that the ball will pass through the area covered by the cover member 710 by giving a change.

In the process of S2902, if the first ball passing sensor S3 has not detected the passage of the ball (S2902: No), then it is determined whether or not the specific effect is being executed (S2903). In the processing of S2903, when it is determined that the specific effect is being executed (S2903: Yes), a transmissive lamp lighting command is set based on the effect mode of the specific effect (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905. Here, in the process of S2903, the specific effect determined is when the display variation pattern command set in the variable display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113 is a specific effect. While the effect is being executed, the effect mode using the transmissive lamp lighting command is executed. As a result, the cover member 710 can be changed to the transparent state only when a specific condition is satisfied in the variable performance showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to provide a playability in which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated by oneself. Also, a player who has played a game in which a special symbol lottery is executed may be given a privilege (a privilege of allowing the cover member 710 to pass through) that is advantageous to the player regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on when it is determined that the specific effect is being executed. ) state, it is determined whether or not a ball is stored in the storage channel 700e, and only when it is determined that a ball is stored, an effect of turning on the transmission lamp 227b is executed, and the ball is not stored. If it is determined that, instead of the transmission lamp 227b, it is preferable to perform an effect of turning on the decorative lamp 227a provided near the cover member 710. FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily viewing the operating state of the movable valve 750 by changing the cover member 710 to the transparent state unnecessarily.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the variable display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 55) of the audio lamp control device 113, if the set display variation pattern command is a specific effect, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on. In addition, for example, after the end of the previous big win, the number of special symbol lotteries (number of fluctuations) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 500 times) without winning the big win. On this condition, the cover member 710 may be set to the transmission state, or the transmission lamp may be set so that the cover member 710 is set to the transmission state while the real-time clock (RTC) is counting a predetermined period. Lighting control may be executed. In addition, when the cover member 710 is configured to be transparent for a long period of time (a period in which the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (eg, 30 times) or a period of time to be clocked for a long period of time (eg, 10 minutes)), Guidance display for guiding a game of hitting a ball toward the storage channel 700e may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the game in which the player is advantageous.

Returning to FIG. 58, the description is continued. In the processing of S2903, if it is determined that the specific effect is not being executed (S2903: No), or after the processing of S2904 is finished, a decorative lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state). (S2905), and the process ends. The decoration lamp lighting command is variously set according to the variation pattern to be executed, the current game state, and the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (2107), an input as to whether or not the frame buttons (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b) operated by the player in order to enhance the effect of the effect is monitored. This is processing for setting to perform a corresponding effect when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when an operation on a frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is detected, a frame button operation command is issued to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. Setting and setting of various flags based on the contents of the operation are performed.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the frame buttons (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is the depression success period, and the determination result is obtained. frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22a, second frame Based on the operation of the button 22b), processing such as setting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). Then, in the process of S3001, when it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is ON (S3001: Yes), next it is determined whether the release operation flag 223p is ON (S3002). In the process of S3002, when it is determined that the release operation flag 223p is ON (S3002: Yes), the release operation flag 223p is set to OFF (S3003), and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the release operation flag is off (S3002: No), then it is determined whether the second frame button 22a has been operated (depressed) (S3004).

If it is determined in the process of S3004 that the second frame button 22a has not been operated (depressed) (S3004: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3004 that the second frame button 22a has been operated (pressed down) (S3004: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005.

Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the first frame button (effect button) 22a is configured to output an operation signal based on the operation to the sound lamp control device 113. The second frame button (release button) 22b is configured to output an operation signal to the main controller 110 based on the operation. The timing effect (operation effect) in which the effect mode is set by the sound lamp control device 113 is based on the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b described above. It is configured such that the mode of production (result of production) is variable.

Therefore, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) of FIG. A process (S3002) is executed to determine whether or not the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated (pressed) based on the setting contents of the release operation flag 223p which is set to ON when an operation command is received. be. As a result, operation contents for a plurality of operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) outputting operation signals to different control means (main control device 110, sound lamp control device 113) are aggregated. It is possible to smoothly perform variable setting of the presentation mode corresponding to the operation of each operation means (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b), thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Further, in this embodiment, prior to the process of determining the operation of the first frame button 22a (S3004), the process of determining the setting of the release operation flag 223p indicating the operation status of the second frame button 22b (S3002). is configured to run. This is because, when both frame buttons (first frame button 22a and second frame button 22b) are operated at the same time, an effect is executed based on the operation of the second frame button 22b. That is, in the present embodiment, the second frame button (release button) 22b changes the state of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) from the closed (unreleased) state to the open (released) state. It is an operation means provided for making the variable, and since it is possible to give a privilege to the player by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the first frame button is provided merely for the effect. The effect on the game is greatly different from that of the (effect button) 22a. Therefore, in the timing effect (operation effect), the presence/absence of the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, which may affect the game result, is more important than the determination of the presence/absence of the first frame button (effect button) 22a. We are raising the priority. By configuring in this way, an effect ( In the timing effect (operation effect), an effect corresponding to the result of the game can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 59, the description continues. In the process of S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the button type whose pressing is detected is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y (S3005). That is, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the release operation flag 223p is ON and the process proceeds to S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the second frame button 22b is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y, and S3004. If it is determined that the pressing of the first frame button 22a has been detected in the processing of 1, and the process proceeds to S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the first frame button 22a is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y.

After the processing of S3005 is completed, it is next determined whether the current frame button operation was performed during the successful pressing period based on the pressing period information read out by the processing of S3005 (S3006). If it is determined that it is not during the press success period (S3006: No), a display failure effect command is set (S3007), and the process proceeds to S3011. Here, when the display failure effect command is set, "bad" is displayed as the result display mode 720 as shown in FIG. 11(b).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3006 that it is during the successful pressing period (S3006: Yes), it is determined whether the operation determined in the current process is the second frame button (release button) 22b. (S3008). In the process of S3008, if it is determined that the operation is the second frame button (release button) 22b (S3008: Yes), a display release button success effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3011. . Further, in the processing of S3008, if it is determined that the operation is not the second frame button (release button) 22b but the first frame button (effect button) 22a (S3008: No), display effect A button success effect command is set (S3010), and the process proceeds to S3011.

Here, when the display release button success effect command is set, as shown in FIG. The left button display 715 shown is changed to the pressed state mode. Further, when the display effect button success effect command is set, as shown in FIG. 11A, "good" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the first frame button 22a is schematically shown. The middle button display 716 is changed to the pressed state mode. Furthermore, in this timing effect (operation effect), when the ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630, the specific ball entry display mode 721 indicating that the ball is entering the specific general ball entrance 630 is displayed in a mode ("15" indicating the number of prize balls) indicating the privilege given to the player by the entry of the ball.

Returning to FIG. 59, the description continues. In the process of S3011, it is determined whether the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON (S3011). In the process of S3011, if the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is off (S3011: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3011, if the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is on (S3011: Yes), it is determined whether the first frame button 22a has been pressed (S3012), and if it has been pressed (S3012: Yes). Next, the difficulty level information indicating the selected difficulty level is set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa (S3013), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to OFF (S3014), and the present process ends. If it is determined in the process of S3012 that the first frame button 22a has not been pressed (S3012: No), this process ends.

Next, the timing effect setting process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the contents of the timing effect setting process (S2111). This timing effect setting process (S2111) is a process for setting the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) to be executed.

When the timing effect setting process (S2111) is executed, first, it is determined whether the timing effect setting flag 223w is ON (S3101). In the process of S3101, if it is determined that the timing effect setting flag 223w is ON (S3101: Yes), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is in progress (S3102), and if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S3102: Yes), a big hit timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) for setting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the big win is executed, and the process proceeds to S3105. A detailed description of the jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) will be given later with reference to FIG. 61(a).

On the other hand, in the processing of S3102, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S3102: No), normal timing performance presetting processing for setting the performance mode of the timing performance (operation performance) based on the variable display of the special symbol (S3104) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3105. This normal timing effect pre-setting process (S3104) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 61(b).

In the process of S3105, the timing effect common setting process executed in common regardless of the timing effect (operation effect) executed at any timing (during the jackpot, normal) is executed (S3105), and then this process exit. This timing effect common setting process (S3105) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Also, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the timing effect setting flag 223w is off (S3101: No), the timing effect correction process (S3106) for correcting the ball entry timing in the timing effect (operation effect) is executed. Execute, and then terminate this process. This timing effect correction processing (S3106) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Here, with reference to FIG. 61(a), the big hit timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) will be described. FIG. 61(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (S3103). This jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) is executed based on the difficulty level set during the jackpot. It sets the sound (sound effect) to be output at the time of operation.

When the jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) is executed, first, the difficulty level information set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa is read out (S3131), and pointer setting conditions corresponding to the read out difficulty level are acquired. (S3132). Specifically, from the difficulty level information set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa, the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b and the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 are determined. , the number of operations of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the display mode information of the effect pointer corresponding to the difficulty level.

After completing the process of S3132, next, it is determined whether the read difficulty level information is low difficulty level (S3133). In the processing of S3133, if it is determined that the difficulty level information is low difficulty (S3133: No), the tone range 1 data 222c2 indicating the low difficulty level is read out from the music information storage area 222c (S3134), and corresponding to tone range 1. A voice command is set (S3135), and this processing ends. As the voice command set here, since the sound range 1 indicates the high sound range in the music information, a high-pitched voice (sound effect) is set so as to correspond to it.

On the other hand, in the process of S3133, if it is determined that the difficulty level information is high difficulty (S3133: No), the tone range 2 data 222c3 indicating the high difficulty level is read from the music information storage area 222c (S3136), A corresponding voice command is set (S3137), and this processing ends. As the voice command set here, since the sound range 2 indicates the low range of the music information, a low-pitched voice (sound effect) is set so as to correspond to it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61(b), the normal timing effect pre-setting process (S3104) will be described. FIG. 61(b) is a flowchart showing the details of the normal timing effect pre-setting process (S3104). In this normal timing effect presetting process (S3104), when the target special symbol lottery result is a hit, the second frame button (release button) 22b is pressed during the successful period. Settings are made so that the results of the lottery will be notified.

When the normal timing effect pre-setting process (S3104) is executed, first, a low difficulty pointer setting condition is acquired (S3151), and then it is determined whether or not the current special symbol variation is a winning variation ( S3152). In the process of S3152, if it is determined that the hit is fluctuating (S3152: Yes), the win pointer setting flag 223af is set to ON (S3153), and from the pointer setting conditions obtained in the process of S3151, the number of displayed pointers is determined. is decremented by 1 (S3154), and the process ends.

Next, the timing effect common setting process (S3105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the contents of the timing effect common setting process (S3105). This timing effect common setting process (S3105) is the above-described jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (see S3103 in FIG. 61(a)) or normal timing effect pre-setting process (see S3104 in FIG. 61(b). ) and based on the operation state of the movable valve 750 and the pointer setting condition of the timing effect (operation effect) set by ), the process of determining the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed.

When the timing effect common setting process (S3105) is executed, first. Based on the current movable state (operable state) of the movable valve 750 stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s, closing timing information up to 30 seconds later is read from the closing timing storage area 223v (S3201). Then, the ball entry timing information stored in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad is read out, and entry possible timing information is calculated by subtracting the ball entry timing information from the closing timing (S3202).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a timing at which the pointer setting condition of the current timing effect (operation effect) and the possible ball entry timing information calculated in the process of S3202 match (S3203). Specifically, a location where the effect pointer displayable area (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the musical range data of the music set as the pointer setting condition and the possible entry timing information match is set as the pointer setting condition. Determines whether there are matching locations for the number of matches that exist. In this case, the ball-enterable timing information is calculated based on the closing timing of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled according to a predetermined rule. is shifted within a predetermined period (up to 10 seconds), it is determined whether there is a matching timing (see FIG. 16).

In the processing of S3203, if it is determined that there is a matching timing (S3203: Yes), the start timing of the timing effect (operation effect) is set based on the matching timing (S3204). If it is determined that there is no matching timing (S3203: No), a special pointer display position is set outside the effect pointer displayable area (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the range data of the music set as the pointer setting condition, Match timing is created (S3205). After that, based on the created matching timing, the production start timing is set (S3204).

After the process of S3204 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the winning pointer setting flag 223af is set to ON (S3206). In the processing of S3206, if it is determined that the win pointer setting flag 223af is ON (S3206: Yes), that is, the timing effect (operation effect) of this time is executed based on the variation effect of the special symbol that wins. If so, the second frame button (release button) is placed at the non-matching point where the pointer setting condition of the current timing effect (operation effect) does not match the entry possible timing information calculated in the processing of S3202. 22b is set (S3207), the winning pointer setting flag 223af is set to OFF (S3208), and the process proceeds to S3209. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3206 that the win pointer setting flag 223af is off (S3206: No), the processes of S3207 and S3208 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3209.

By configuring in this way, in the timing performance (operation performance) executed during the variation of the special symbol, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the non-matching point that does not match the entry possible timing information. It is possible to set a display pointer for As a result, even if the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing with respect to the display pointer for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the specific general entrance 630 When the ball does not enter, the player can expect that the lottery result of the changing special symbols will be a big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When using such a configuration, when it is determined that the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing with respect to the display pointer set to the non-coincidence point, the second The 3-symbol display device 81 may be configured to notify the lottery result of the special symbol. Thereby, the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b can be used as a means for informing the lottery result of the special symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display pointer is set to the above-mentioned non-matching point only when the special symbol lottery result is a win, but in other cases, that is, the special symbol lottery result is a win. It may be configured to set a non-matching point even if it is not.

In the process of S3209, the display pointers for the number of matches set in the pointer setting condition are set (S3209), and the set display pointers (the display pointer set in the process of S3207 and the display pointer set in the process of S3209 The successful pressing period is determined in correspondence with the display pointer) and set in the pressing period information storage area 223y (S3210). After the processing of S3210 is finished, it is next determined whether the current jackpot is in progress (S3211). The data is stored in the storage area 223r (S3215), and the processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3211, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (S3211: No), the display timing effect command is set based on the various contents set in this process (S3212), and the effect is being executed. The flag 223x is set to ON (S3213), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to OFF (S3214), and this process is terminated.

Next, the timing effect correction process (S3106) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the contents of the timing effect correction process (S3106). This timing effect correction process (S3106) is a process for correcting the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 set in the timing effect (operation effect) based on the actual ball passing period. . Here, in this embodiment, as the ball entry timing, the ball entry timing (normal) in which the ball passage period is set to 0.5 seconds and the ball entry timing (early) in which the ball passage period is set to 0.4 seconds are used. , and ball entry timing (late) in which the ball passage period is set to 0.6 seconds can be selected and set in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad. Then, based on the ball entry timing information set in this process, the ball passing period corresponding to the ball entry timing information set in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad is subtracted from the closing timing information of the movable valve 750. , the timing at which a ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 is set.

When the timing effect correction process (S3106) is executed, first, the passing period set in the ball passing information storage area 223ac is read (S3301), the read passing period is analyzed, and the passing period (short) and the passing period are determined. The number of pieces of information for the period (normal) and transit period (long) are calculated (S3302). After that, it is determined whether or not the calculated transit period information number is greater than or equal to the transit period (short) information number (S3303). In the process of S3303, if it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the transit period (long) is smaller than the number of pieces of information in the transit period (short) (S3303: No), then the calculated number of transit period information is the transit period (normal). is greater than or equal to the number of information in the transit period (short) (S3304). In the process of S3304, if it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the transit period (normal) is greater than or equal to the number of pieces of information in the transit period (short) (S3304: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3304, if it is determined that the number of pieces of information on the passage period (short) is larger (S3304: No), it is determined whether the currently set ball entry timing information is the ball entry timing (late). It is determined (S3305). In the processing of S3305, if it is determined that the ball entry timing (late) is not reached (S3305: No), the timing (early) is selected as the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630, and the ball entry timing is stored. The area is set (S3306), and then this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3305, if it is determined that it is the ball entry timing (late) (S3305: Yes), the timing (normal) is selected as the timing at which the ball can be entered into the specific general entrance 630, and the ball is entered. It is set in the timing storage area (S3310), and then this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S3303 that the number of pieces of information in the transit period (long) is greater than or equal to the number of pieces of information in the transit period (short) (S3303: Yes), then the calculated number of transit period information is It is determined whether or not the number of (normal) information is greater than or equal to the number of information of the transit period (long) (S3307). In the process of S3307, if it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the passage period (normal) is greater than or equal to the number of pieces of information in the passage period (long) (S3307: Yes), this process ends.

In the process of S3307, if it is determined that the number of pieces of information for the passage period (normal) is smaller than the number of pieces of information for the passage period (long) (S3307: No), then the currently set ball entry timing information is used. It is determined whether it is the timing (early) (S3308). In the process of S3308, if it is determined that the ball entry timing (early) is not reached (S3308: No), the timing (late) is selected as the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630, and the ball entry timing is stored. The area is set (S3309). On the other hand, in the process of S3308, if it is determined that it is time to enter the ball (early) (S3305: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3310 described above, and then the process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball passes through a predetermined section (the section from the first ball passing sensor S3 to the specific general ball entrance 630 or the second ball passing sensor S4). By varying the ball entry timing period subtracted from the closing timing of the movable valve 750 based on the passage period information that measures the period required for the ball to correct the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 However, other configurations may be used. For example, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing in the release of the storage device or in the timing effect (operation effect). may be set as the start condition, and the period from when the start condition is set until the ball passes through the specific general ball entrance 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4 may be measured. Even with this configuration, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be obtained.

Also, instead of varying the ball-entering timing period, by varying the degree of progress of the effect executed based on the passing period information, correction processing may be performed so that the display pointer is displayed at an appropriate timing. good.

Next, referring to FIG. 64, the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the contents of the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112). In this movable valve operation counter update process (S2112), a process for updating the movable valve operation counter 223t for updating the operation scenario of the movable valve 750 is executed.

When the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is a movable valve operation scenario setting (S3401). If it is determined in the process of S3401 that there is no setting (S3401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a setting (S3401: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the movable valve operation counter is the upper limit value (S3402). Here, the value of the movable valve operation counter is a value necessary to execute the 24 operation scenarios set in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f, and the value of the counter corresponding to 732 seconds is set as the upper limit value. It is

In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S3402: No), 1 is added to the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t (S3403), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3402 that it is the upper limit value (S3402: Yes), the value of the movable valve operation counter is set to 1 (S3404), and this process ends. As a result, the operation status of the movable valve 750 can be grasped at any time on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 78. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S5001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S5001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S5102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored therein are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S5103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S5104), the command pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after completion of this boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 65). By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) (S5105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S5001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 66, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S5101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a at step S5101. and the processing of S5102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S5103 to S5105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S5103 to S5105 without performing the processes of S5101 and S5102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S5003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S5005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 76(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S6502 in FIG. 76A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 67(b)) performs the simple command determination processing (see FIG. 67(b) S5308) and simple display setting processing (see S5309 in FIG. 67(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and the simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S5005, interrupt permission is set (S5006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S5006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 67(a). FIG. 67(a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 67(b) is a flow chart showing this V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 32) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 67(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301). If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S5302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S5303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S5302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is transferred. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72. FIG.

In the display setting process (S5303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S5304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S5303) or the simple display setting processing (S5309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S5306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S5304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S5305). 32, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S5307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to (loss, chance) are compared with each other, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S5301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S5309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S5304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72, the details of the command determination process (S5302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 68, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S5403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S5402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S5403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S5404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S5405) and returns to the processing of S5401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S5405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 69(a). FIG. 69(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S5501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S5501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S5501 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S5503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S5503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5506), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S5505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S5504 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation defined in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S5404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S5406), If there is a display variation type command (S5406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S5407), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the stop type command process (S5407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 69(b). FIG. 69(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance number) is determined (S5601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S5602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S5603), and the process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S5602. In the above-described task processing (S5304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S5602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by the processing of S5603, and the specification The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S5601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S5602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 68, the description is continued. In the processing of S5406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S5406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S5408). If there is an opening command (S5408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S5409), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the opening command process (S5409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 70(a). FIG. 70(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S5701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5702).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5705), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S5704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, At the same time as extracting the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and specifying the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored by the processing of S5702. From the set transfer data table, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Also, when this opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a long time to transfer the image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The number-of-rounds command for display indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 ends, so it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that this will take time and cause the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the action has stopped.

In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 15 rounds) in the third pattern display device 81 are completed. If the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the ending command for display, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the motion has stopped or to have a sense of incompatibility.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device 81 ends the variation display of the jackpot. , the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, and the round effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81 (for 15 rounds). ) When the game ends, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81, so that the player does not feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Returning to FIG. 68, the description is continued. In the process of S5408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S5408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S5410), and the If there is a round number command for use (S5410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S5411), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the round number command process (S5411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 70(b). FIG. 70(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S5702).

Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5705), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S5410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S5410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S5412). If there is an ending command (S5412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S5413), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the ending command process (S5413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S5901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S5902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S5412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S5412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S5414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S5414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S5415), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the back image change command process (S5415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 72(a). FIG. 72(a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S6001). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back image corresponding to the other back image type is turned on. The determination flag is set to OFF (S6002), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S6001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S6002. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set by the processing in S6002 is used. , specifying the back image type to be displayed at that time, further specifying the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S5414, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S5414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S5416). Otherwise (S5416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S5417), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the error command processing (S5417) will now be described with reference to FIG. 72(b). FIG. 72(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S6101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S6102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S6101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S6102, and the error type corresponding to the error type is determined. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S6102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S5416 that there is no error command (S5416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S5418), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

In the process of S5401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes ), and the processing of S5402 to S5418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S5401 to S5418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 69(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 69(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 69(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S5501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S5303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 73, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S6202 to S6204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S6205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S6201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S6202), S6203-S6204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S6203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S6203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S6204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S6301).

Based on this expanded warning image data, task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle necessary for drawing. determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6204), or if it is determined in the process of S6203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S6203: No), then the process proceeds to S6205.

In S6205, pointer update processing is executed (S6205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S6401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6403). If it is a demonstration display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S6405), the present process is terminated, and the display is displayed. Return to setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S6406). ), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. Since the drawing contents are always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S6402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 73, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) forming the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S6206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S6208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S6209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is ON (S6209: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S6210), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6211). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S6214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S5304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last time stop design determination flag set by the processing of S6215, specify the stop design of the fluctuation effect performed one before , the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S6209: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is ON (S6216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the timer counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. 233d (S6217), and then by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6221), this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the third pattern display device 81 automatically displays the demonstration effect. You can set the drawing content so that is displayed.

In the process of S6216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S6216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image has ended. A process of setting a display data table that defines to be displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, the details of the transfer setting process (S5305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S6502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S6501, that is, if it is turned off (S6501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been transferred to In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 76(b). FIG. 76B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S6601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6602). In the process of S6602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S6602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S6602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to S6603. Also, as a result of the process of S6601, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the process proceeds to S6603.

In the process of S6603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S6603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S6603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 68 to 72) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 73 to 77) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 77) (see S6601: No in FIG. 76A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6205) of the previously executed display setting process (S5303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S6701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6705.

Also, in the processing of S6702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S6702: No), the processing of S6703 and S6704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S6705. In the processing of S6705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6706).

In the process of S6706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S6706 that the transfer process has not ended (S6706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6706: Yes), the process proceeds to S6707. Also, as a result of the process of S6705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S6705: No), the process proceeds to S6707.

In the processing of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707). is turned off (S6708), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S6713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S6709). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S6709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S6711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image indicated by the back image determination flag is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) The start address is obtained (S6712), and the process proceeds to S6713.

In the process of S6713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6713). The determination in the process of S6713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6713 (S6713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S6713 (S6713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S6714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S6714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6715), and this normal transfer setting process ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, details of the drawing process (S5306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 32 is generated (S6801). That is, in the processing of S6801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S5304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S6802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S6803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 67(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 enters the guided state (closed state) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general ball entrance 630. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b for changing the storage state of the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) to the released state, the storage device (first storage device 770 and A ball stored in the second storage device 771 ) can be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 . Therefore, the player can play the game while timing the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the movable valve 750 is set to operate in various predetermined patterns, and most of the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state (closed state) is is set as a period (0.1 seconds) during which only one ball can be guided. Therefore, since accuracy is required in the timing at which the ball stored in the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) can be guided to the specific general ball entrance 630, the player is more motivated. can be made to play.

In this embodiment, by operating the operation means (the second frame button (release button) 22b), the balls stored in the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) are released one by one. Since it is configured so that it can flow down toward the specific general ball entrance 630, the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state (closed state) is the period during which only one ball can be guided (0.1 second ) are continuously set, the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) can be set by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at an appropriate timing. It becomes possible to enter all the stored balls into the specific general ball entrance 630 . Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game in order to obtain more prize balls.

A plurality of balls may be discharged from the storage device in response to the operation of the operation means, and the number of balls to be discharged from the storage device may be varied based on the details of the player's operation of the operation means. You may do so. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of games, and to improve the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the portion of the board surface unit 700 covered with the cover member 710 (see FIG. 2) is covered with the cover member 710 from the back side (the game board 13 side with respect to the cover member 710). Transmissive lamps 227ba to 227be, which are light emitting means for irradiating light onto the substrate, are provided. By irradiating the cover member 710 with light from the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the inside covered with the cover member 710 can be brought into a transmission state in which the player can visually recognize. Although the details will be described later, the transmitting lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from releasing the storage device while grasping the operation status of the movable valve 750 during the normal game in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Also, when the release operation of the storage device is performed and the ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is in a transparent state, so that the player can visually recognize the situation where the ball flows down near the movable valve 750. can be done.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the cover member 710 is provided as a shielding means for making it difficult for the player to grasp the operation status of the movable valve 750, the second frame button can be pressed while the player is aware of the operation status of the movable valve 750. It is possible to prevent the act of operating the (release button) 22b. In addition, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is a half mirror so that it is switched to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized based on a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down). Since it is configured, when the game ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 switches to the transparent state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow condition of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750 .

In this embodiment, the cover member 710, which is the shielding means, is switched to the transmission state by irradiating the light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. Well, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted to the cover member 710 from the light-emitting means (LED) that is always on is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position It may be configured to be in a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized only through the lens.

In addition, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (eg, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color that allows the inside to be seen, and the surface is processed to diffusely reflect the irradiated light (eg, , texturing) may be applied. As a result, while the game is being played in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a makes the inside of the cover member 710 difficult to see, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (i.e., the decorative The inside of the cover member 710 may be visible when the lamp 227a is not lit. As a result, the inside of the cover member 710 can be easily inspected by the store clerk even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall that shields the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a is provided, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielding state and a non-shielding state. should be provided. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 even while the game is being played. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light is provided, and light emission control is performed on the light emitting means, so that the inside of the cover member 710 can be illuminated. may be switched between a state in which it is difficult to see (light is illuminated) and a visible state (light is not illuminated).

Furthermore, by providing a decorative movable member on the cover member 710 whose interior is visible and controlling the movement of the movable member, the interior of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movement of the decorative movable member is small). state) and a state in which it is difficult to see the inside of the cover member 710 (a state in which the decorative movable member moves frequently).

Further, in this embodiment, the timing for operating the operating means (the second frame button (release button) 22b) is set based on the operation of the movable valve 750, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is displayed. It is configured so as to produce a performance display. As a result, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the player receives a privilege (a prize based on entering the specific general ball entrance 630). It is possible to provide a ball), and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In the present embodiment, the above-described effect (timing effect) is configured to be executed during the jackpot game or when a specific variation pattern is selected. An effect (timing effect) may be executed, for example, when it is determined that the upper limit amount of balls has been stored in the storage channel 700e, or when it is determined by a timing means (RTC, etc.) When the time is clocked, or in the effect (so-called mini game, etc.) for operating the effect button (first frame button) 22a that is executed during the special symbol fluctuation or during the jackpot game, a specific condition (for example, mission It may be configured such that a predetermined condition is established when a condition such as clearing is established. As a result, it is possible to execute timing effects (operation effects) at various timings, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Also, when a predetermined winning command (a command output when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is received from the main controller 110, the command corresponding to the winning command is received. A timing effect (operation effect) may be executed using a period of effect (so-called look-ahead effect) executed before the start of the variation of the special symbols.

In this embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, one ball is made to flow down toward the movable valve 750. ) 22b is configured to perform the release operation of the storage device at least once every two seconds. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, unless the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (depressed) with good timing, the ball cannot enter the specific general ball entrance 630, and the second frame button ( Operation accuracy of the release button 22b is required. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a timing effect (operation effect) suggesting the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the timing effect (operation effect), the ball can be easily entered into the specific general ball entrance 630. there is As a result, the player can be motivated to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b.

In the timing effect (operation effect) in this embodiment, an effect is executed in which the player operates the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b. By constructing in this manner, the number of times the player is made to operate the buttons can be increased, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced as compared with the case of executing the performance of operating only the second frame button (release button) 22b. can be done.

In this embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect) that is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is winning and fluctuating, at the timing when the display pointer scrolling in the sub-display area Ds4 matches the bar display portion 717. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, as shown in FIG. 14, the special symbol lottery result is displayed in the sub-display area Ds2. By configuring in this way, the second frame button (release button) 22b for releasing the storage state of the storage device can be used to notify the lottery result of the special symbol.

Also, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to notify the lottery result of the special symbol, the ball flowing out from the storage device based on the operation enters the specific general ball entrance 630. Difficult timing is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily given a privilege (a prize for a ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630). In the case of setting such timing, it is preferable to issue a notification suggesting that a big win has occurred if the ball does not enter the specific general ball entrance 630 . As a result, the player is given a privilege regardless of whether or not the outflow ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630, so that the player can be provided with a sense of security.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of songs are configured to be usable in the timing effect (operation effect), and locations where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) are determined in advance for each song. This is for the purpose of operating the operation means at the timing that matches the rhythm of each song in the timing effect (operation effect). 719 is set, the operation means can be operated in accordance with the rhythm of the music being executed in the timing production (operation production), and the timing production (operation production) can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. can be executed.

In the present embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect), the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is determined from a position where a display pointer preset for each song can be displayed (set). Although it is configured to select, the above-described configuration may be used in the operation effect in which only the first frame button (effect button) 22a is operated. As a result, various effects can be executed as operation effects for operating the first frame button (production button) 22a.

In this embodiment, the movable valve 750 is operated during the period in which the jackpot game based on the jackpot is executed on the jackpot decision display screen that informs the third pattern display device 81 that the lottery result of the special symbol has won the jackpot. It is possible to discriminate whether or not the variable motion is performed in the motion pattern (motion scenario) that is advantageous to the player, and inform the result of the determination by the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the player can grasp that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game before the jackpot game is executed. A game can be made to be performed willingly.

In this embodiment, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his or her own skill, and by varying the benefits to be given according to the difficulty level, various players can On the other hand, it is possible to voluntarily execute a timing effect (operation effect).

In addition, the above-described content indicates both selection of music and selection of difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) executed in the present embodiment. is selected, the interval between the locations where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) differs between song A and song B. A player who selects A and wants to enjoy the timing performance (operation performance) at short intervals can select music B. As a result, it is possible to execute the timing performance (operation performance) desired by the player without changing the degree of difficulty, and to have various players willingly execute the timing performance (operation performance). can be done.

In the present embodiment, the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) at different intervals depending on the song, and the player selects a song so that the display pointer is displayed in a timing effect (operation effect). A configuration for narrowing or widening the display interval is used, but as a configuration other than that, selection means for selecting the display interval of the display pointer 719 executed by the timing effect (operation effect) for the player. A setting unit may be provided for setting the display position of the display pointer 719 based on the display interval of the display pointer 719 selected by the selection unit. A setting means for setting the display interval of the display pointer 719 may be provided. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to execute the timing performance (operation performance) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and to provide various players with motivation. A timing effect (operation effect) can be executed.

In this embodiment, the ROM 222 of the audible lamp control device 113 stores the movable valve operation scenario 222b so that the audible lamp control device 113 can grasp the operation status of the movable valve 750, and the information of the movable valve operation scenario 222b is is updated from time to time, the current operation status and future operation details of the movable valve 750 are grasped, and the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 is set. Based on the information of the movable valve operation scenario 222b, an execution scenario for executing the movable operation of the decorative movable member, decorative lamp, sound (sound effect), etc. is generated, and based on the generated execution scenario , the timing at which a ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 may be indirectly set. Also, in this case, it is preferable that the movable operation of the decorative movable member executed based on the execution scenario, the decorative lamp, the output of the sound (sound effect), etc. are executed in a place where the player has difficulty in grasping them.

In the first embodiment, two storage devices (a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771) are provided in the storage channel 700e, a maximum of five balls are stored, and the second frame button 22b is operated. 79, the storage device is changed to the released (opened) state and the ball is discharged from the storage channel 700e, but other configurations may be used, for example, as shown in FIG. A plurality of storage channels 700e and 700g may be provided as shown. Here, with reference to FIG. 79, a modification of the configuration for storing balls on the game board 13 will be described. In addition, in this modification, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the element same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 79 is a partial front view of the game board 13 showing a modification of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 79, this modification differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a second storage channel 700g is provided above the storage channel 700e, and The second storage valve 771a, which had been previously installed, is provided in the storage channel 700g, and the second storage upper limit sensor S5 and the second storage detection sensor S6 for detecting the balls stored in the storage channel 700g are provided. They are different in one respect. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the above-described first embodiment, the operation of the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a is controlled using one reservoir valve solenoid 770b, but this modification example The difference is that each storage valve has an individual storage valve solenoid and that a release button is provided corresponding to each storage device (storage valve) (for example, see FIG. 87 to be described later).

The second storage channel 700g, which is newly provided in this modified example, is formed to make it more difficult for balls to flow in than the storage channel 700e. Inflow is possible. Specifically, among the balls that flow down the distribution channel 700d, of the balls distributed in the lower right direction (the direction of the storage channel 700e), about 1 ball flows into 30 balls. there is By adjusting the angle and position of the adjustment member 701a, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the balls flowing into the second storage channel 700g.

As shown in FIG. 79, in this modification, five balls can be stored in the storage channel 700e, and five balls can be stored in the second storage channel 700g, for a total of ten balls. there is Furthermore, the ball that has flowed into the second storage channel 700g, which is more difficult to flow in than the storage channel 700e, flows down toward the specific general ball inlet 630 without being affected by the variable operation of the movable valve 750. Therefore, the exit is provided so as to face the specific general entrance 630 . As a result, when the ball is stored in the flow path (second storage flow path 700g) in which it is difficult to store the ball, the player can be assured of receiving a special benefit (that the ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630). Based on the prize ball) can be given. Therefore, the player always expects the balls to flow into the second storage channel 700g while playing the game.

Here, the game flow when the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 87 is used in this modified example will be described. First, the pachinko machine 10 of FIG. 87 will be described. FIG. 87 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of release buttons for releasing the storage device. Unlike the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) of the first embodiment described above, this pachinko machine is provided with a third frame button (second release button) 22c and release (opening) of the first storage device 770. ) Control is performed based on the operation of the second frame button 22b, and the release (opening) control of the second storage device 771 is performed based on the operation of the third frame button 22c. differ in Other elements are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 87, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a second frame button (release button) 22b on the left side of the lower tray unit 15, and a third frame button (second release button) on the right side of the lower tray unit 15. button) 22c is provided. Since the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are arranged in the lower tray unit 15 with an interval of about 20 cm, the player can However, it is difficult to operate with one hand at the same time. Between the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c, the first frame button (effect button) 22a is positioned between the second frame button (release button) 22c. button) 22b and a third frame button (second release button) 22c so as to block a straight line connecting the button surfaces of the third frame button (second release button) 22c. button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c.

Further, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (pressed down), control is performed to change the storage state of the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state. Executed, and when the third frame button (second release button) 22c is operated (pressed down), the storage state of the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is changed to the release (open) state. configured to be controlled.

As a result, the player can operate the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c at a desired timing, thereby accumulating according to the details of the player's operation. The release control of the device can be executed, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since it is difficult for the player to simultaneously operate the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c with one hand, (that is, while operating the operation handle 51 with one hand), the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are simultaneously operated, resulting in a plurality of Processing load due to simultaneous execution of storage device release control (e.g., movable valve movement control using an electric drive source), or simultaneous driving of an electric drive source (e.g., solenoid, motor, etc.) Temporary increases in power consumption can be suppressed. When the player simultaneously operates the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c with both hands, the operation handle 51 is not operated. Since it is in the state, even if the release control of a plurality of storage devices is executed at the same time, the game control for the operation to the operation handle 51 (for example, the firing control using the electric drive source) is not executed. It is possible to suppress the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 as a whole, or the temporary increase in power consumption due to the driving of the electric drive source (for example, solenoid, motor, etc.) at the same time.

In other words, by using this configuration, release control for the two storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) and game control (for example, launch control) for the operation of the operation handle 51 are performed at the same time. The processing load (control processing using the electric drive source) and power consumption (power consumption for driving the electric drive source) in the pachinko machine 10 temporarily increases. It can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 79, the description continues. 87 (the second frame button (release button) 22b and a third frame button (second release button) 22c), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) is operated based on the operation of the second frame button 22b. ) is opened (released), the ball flows out from the storage channel 700e, and the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is opened (released) based on the operation of the third frame button 22c. , the ball flows out from the storage channel 700g.

As shown in FIG. 79, the sphere flow path is formed so that the spheres flowing out from the storage channel 700e and the second storage channel 700g can all enter the specific general ball entrance 630. A sphere flow path is formed above the ball inlet 630 so that the spheres flowing out of the storage flow path 700e and the spheres flowing out of the second storage flow path 700g join together. As a result, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 depending on the flow condition of the ball flowing out from each storage channel (storage channel 700e, second storage channel 700g). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement of the ball and enjoy the game.

87, the second frame button 22b and the third frame button 22c are arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate with one hand at the same time. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the balls collide with each other and the ball cannot enter the specific general ball entrance 630. - 特許庁

A second storage upper limit sensor S5 and a second storage detection sensor S6 are provided in the second storage channel 700g, and when the second storage upper limit sensor S5 detects a ball, that is, the second storage channel When it is detected that the upper limit amount of balls is stored in 700g, even if a game (right-handed game) is executed in this state, the balls cannot be stored in the second storage channel 700g any more. , a notification prompting the player to operate the third frame button 22c (for example, a display prompting the player to press the third frame button 22c on the third symbol display device 81; 22c, and by lighting the third frame button 22c (or its surroundings), a voice output prompting the user to press the third frame button 22c) are executed. As a result, the game is continued in a state in which the amount of balls stored in the second storage passage 700g, in which the outflow balls are likely to enter the specific general ball entrance 630, is at its upper limit, and the game is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

Also in the configuration of this modified example, the contents described in the description of the first embodiment may be appropriately combined. , the operation of the first reservoir valve 770a or the second reservoir valve 771a may be controlled so that only one ball flows out, or one operation of the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c may Based on this, it may be controlled to flow out all the stored spheres. Also, the number of balls to be discharged and the timing of the discharge of balls may be changed based on the operation content (for example, normal press or long press) of the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c. As a result, the operation means (second frame button 22b, third frame button 22b, third frame button) operated by the player in order to flow out the balls stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) from the storage device It is possible to diversify the operation timing and operation contents of 22c), and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In this modification, the second storage channel 700g is configured so that the stored balls flow out to a location facing the specific general ball entrance 630, which is advantageous for the player. A channel (second storage channel 700g) and a more disadvantageous storage channel (first storage channel 700e) are provided. Advantages and disadvantages are set for both of them, and it is sufficient that the advantageous storage channel is configured so that the balls are less likely to flow into the disadvantageous storage channel.

For example, a second movable valve is provided between the ball outlet of the second storage channel 700 g and the specific general ball inlet 630 , and the second movable valve moves the ball more than the movable valve 750 to the specific general ball inlet 630 . It may be configured such that the rate of being in an induced state that can be induced to is high. Also, the upper limit of the number of balls stored in each storage channel may be different for each storage channel.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the first frame button (production button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b are separately configured as operation means that can be operated by the player. In addition, as a timing effect (operation effect) for allowing the player to operate the operation means, a display pointer is displayed for each operation means (first frame button (effect button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b). It was configured to execute the effect display for scrolling movement.

In contrast, in the second embodiment, instead of the operating means (the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b) in the first embodiment, the first frame button (Production button) 1122a and a second frame button (release button) 1122b are provided. Interlocking means for pressing the second frame button (release button) 1122b in conjunction with the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 1122a is provided. A linked state in which the second frame button (release button) 1122b is operated based on the operation of the production button) 1122a, and a second frame button (release button) based on the operation of the first frame button (production button) 1122a. ) 1122b is provided with a variable control means for varying between a released state in which 1122b is not operated.

As a result, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed for the player to operate the first frame button (effect button) 1122a, and the action of the player operating the first frame button (effect button) 1122a is executed. Only by executing it, the second frame button (release button) 1122b can be operated. Therefore, the storage device can be released without making the player feel uncomfortable.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that instead of the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b, the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122a The difference is that a frame button 1122b is provided. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 80, a first frame button 1122a and a second frame button 1122b are provided in the central portion of the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. Next, with reference to FIG. 81, configurations of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 81(a) is a schematic plan view of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b, and FIG. 81(b) is an interlocking operation configuration of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b. It is a schematic diagram showing.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are configured to be connectable via interlocking means 1125. As shown in FIG. In addition, the second frame button 1122b is formed in a shape that is one size smaller than the first frame button 1122a, and a regulation wall 1123 is provided around it. This prevents the player from touching the second frame button 1122b and erroneously pressing it when the player tries to operate the first frame button 1122a at an unintended timing, for example.

Next, detailed configurations of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b will be described with reference to FIG. 81(b). Note that the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are provided with return means (for example, an elastic member using a spring member or a rubber member) for returning the pressed button to its normal position, or a button operable button. Light-emitting means and the like are provided for informing that the period of time has passed. detailed description is omitted.

A detection switch S22a is provided below the first frame button 1122a for detecting that it has been pressed, and a detection switch S22b is provided below the second frame button 1122b for detecting that it has been pressed. It is This detects that each frame button has been operated (depressed). Between the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b, interlocking means 1125 that can be engaged with both frame buttons is provided. , the second frame button 1122b is depressed in conjunction with the depression of the first frame button 1122a. Since the interlocking means 1125 is configured not to be pressed when the second frame button 1122b is pressed, the first frame button 1122a is not pressed in conjunction with the second frame button 1122b. do not have.

Next, referring to FIG. 82, the operation of pressing the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b will be described. FIG. 82(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the first frame button 1122a is pressed in the released state in which the interlocking means 1125 is buried, and FIG. 1122a is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the first frame button 1122a is pressed. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), while the interlocking means 1125 is in the released state, the first frame button 1122a and the interlocking means 1125 are not engaged. The interlocking means 1125 does not move in conjunction. Therefore, the second frame button 1122b is not pressed. On the other hand, while the interlocking means 1125 is in the interlocking state, the first frame button 1122a is engaged with the interlocking means 1125 as shown in FIG. , the interlocking means 1125 moves downward. Then, the second frame button 1122b engaged with the interlocking means 1125 also moves downward, and the pressing operation is detected by the detection switch S22b.

Also, the restriction wall 1123 provided around the second frame button 1122b is positioned around the second frame button 1122b even when the second frame button 1122b is pressed as shown in FIG. 82(b). , are provided so as to protrude toward the inside of the lower tray unit 15 . This makes it possible to smoothly restore the second frame button 1122b from the pressed position (the position shown in FIG. 82(b)) to the normal position (the position shown in FIG. 82(a)). In addition, when the pressing operation is performed in conjunction with the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a, the pressing operation in the one-sided holding state can be made smooth.

It should be noted that in this embodiment, each frame button (first frame button 1122a, second frame button 1122b) is operated by the player from the initial position (see FIG. 81(b)) where the player has not operated it. The movement distance to the detected detection position (see FIG. 82(b)) is configured to be the same, which will be explained in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 59) of the first embodiment. As described above, since the process based on the operation of the second frame button 1122b is preferentially executed (see S3002 in FIG. 59), the interlocking means 1125 enters the interlocking state, and the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are pressed at the same time, an effect based on the pressing motion of the second frame button 1122b is executed. Therefore, since an effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means (second frame button 1122b) different from the operation means (first frame button 1122a) operated by the player, an unexpected effect is provided to the player. can do.

Note that, in this embodiment, when the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are simultaneously pressed by the control processing, an effect based on the second frame button 1122b is executed. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the distance to move the first frame button 1122a from the initial position (see FIG. 81(b)) to the detection position (see FIG. 82(b)) is shorter than the It is preferable that the distance to move the two-frame button 1122b from the initial position (see FIG. 81(b)) to the detection position (see FIG. 82(b)) is shorter. As a result, when the interlocking means 1125 is in the interlocked state and the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are pressed simultaneously, the second frame button 1122b is detected first. An effect based on the 2-frame button 1122b can be preferentially executed.

Next, the contents of control for variably controlling the interlocking means 1125 in the second embodiment will be described. The interlocking means 1125 is variably operated between an interlocking state (protruding state) in which it engages with each frame button (first frame button 1122a and second frame button 1122b) and a released state (recessed state) in which the engagement is released. It is set to be in an interlocking state corresponding to the successful pressing period of the second frame button (release button) 22b set in the pressing period information storage area 223y of the first embodiment described above. be. As a result, in the timing effect (operation effect) of the first embodiment described above, the second frame button (release button) 1122b is pressed at the same timing as the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. can be made

The interlocking means may be changed to the interlocking state at a timing other than the timing described above. For example, the state of the interlocking means may be set by the player. As a result, the period during which the player sets the interlocking means to the interlocked state can be matched with the display period of the display pointer indicating the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 1122b in the timing effect (operation effect). Since the result of the game is affected depending on whether or not it is selected, the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) using the first frame button (effect button) 1122a in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect). In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the above-described first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the second embodiment, the middle button display mode 716 for prompting the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 1122a and the timing for operating the first frame button (effect button) 1122a are set to A sub-display area Ds5 for displaying a suggestive display pointer is displayed. That is, in the first embodiment, the display pointer 719 is displayed for each of the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b, and each frame button is displayed to the player. Although it was designed to be operated, in reality, only by operating only the display pointer corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b at the timing that matches the bar display section 717, a privilege advantageous to the player is given. Therefore, there is a problem that a player who understands the mechanism does not participate in the game willingly.

On the other hand, according to the timing effect (operation effect) of the second embodiment, only the effect for the player to operate the first frame button 1122a is executed, and the plurality of display pointers 719 displayed in the effect are executed. The timing at which one of the display pointers 719 matches the bar display portion 717 is matched with the ball entry possible timing, and when the display pointer 719 passes near the bar display portion 717, the interlocking means 1125 is brought into the interlocking state. , and by operating the first frame button 1122a at the timing when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717, the second frame button 1122b is pressed at the timing when the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630. can be operated by pressing As a result, it is possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) without letting the player know which of the display pointers 719 that are scrolled and displayed indicates the timing at which the ball can be entered. Therefore, it is possible to operate the first frame button (button for effect) 1122a in a state in which all of the display pointers 719 scroll-displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) match the bar display portion 717, A player can be motivated to participate in a game.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the interlocking means 1125 for engaging the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b, and the interlocking means 1125 are connected to the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b. A variable control means is provided that can change between an interlocking state in which the second frame button 1122b is engaged and a disengaged state in which the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are disengaged. When the player operates the first frame button 1122a while being changed to the state, the second frame button 1122b is pressed in conjunction with the operation (pressing motion). Although it is possible to operate the second frame button 1122b without making the person feel uncomfortable, another configuration that achieves the same effect as the second embodiment may be used.

For example, by configuring the interlocking means 1125 with a magnetic material and energizing the interlocking means 1125, a plurality of operating means (the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b) are interlocked to operate, A plurality of operation means (the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b) may be configured to be in a released state in which they do not operate in conjunction by demagnetizing the interlocking means 1125. Means capable of switching between the interlocked state and the released state may be used using a structure different from that of the second embodiment. Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, a configuration in which two operating means can be interlocked is used, but it may be configured to interlock three or more operating means, or It may be configured to be controllable so that a combination of a plurality of operation means that are in an interlocked state is different. As a result, various combinations of operation effects can be executed based on the operation performed by the player on the operating means, so that a game (effect) with unexpectedness can be provided to the player.

Also, for example, a frame button unit 1022 as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 may be provided as a modification of the second embodiment. This frame button unit 1022 is a unit structure having a second frame button 1022b as a release button so as to surround a first frame button 1022a as a production button.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, a frame button unit 1022 is provided in the central portion of the lower tray unit 15 . In this way, a plurality of frame buttons (the first frame button 1022a and the second frame button 1022b) are configured as a unit and arranged collectively in one place, so that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively used. can be done.

Next, the configuration of the frame button unit 1022 in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the frame button unit 1022 is operated by the player, and FIG. 85(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the frame button unit 1022. FIG. FIG. 86(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the frame button unit 1022 is operated (depressed) in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button 10222b of the frame button unit 1022 is restricted. ) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the frame button unit 1022 is operated (depressed) in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b of the frame button unit 1022 is released.

First, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the frame button unit 1022 of the second embodiment is configured so that when the player presses the first frame button 1022a and the second frame button 1022b, the player's hand presses the first frame button 1022a and the second frame button 1022b. The first frame button 1022a is configured in a circular shape with a diameter of 5 cm so as to abut on both of the two, and the second frame button 1022b is configured in an annular shape with a diameter of 7 cm with the first frame button 1022a inside. there is In other words, the frame button unit 1022 has a circular unit structure with a diameter of 7 cm as a whole.

Next, the configuration of the frame button unit 1022 will be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). As shown in FIG. 85(b), the frame button unit 1022 is provided so as to protrude from the lower plate unit 15 toward the surface side of the pachinko machine 10 (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85(b)). Further, of the frame button unit 1022, the first frame button 1022a is configured to protrude toward the surface side of the pachinko machine 10 (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85(b)) rather than the second frame button 1022b. . By configuring in this manner, the first frame button 1022a can be operated (depressed) even in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b is restricted.

A detection switch S22a for detecting that the first frame button 1022a is pressed is provided in the pressing direction of the first frame button 1022a (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85(b)). A detection switch S22b for detecting that the second frame button 1022b has been pressed is provided in the pressing direction of the button 1022b (downward from the viewpoint in FIG. 85(b)). Furthermore, a regulating member 1023a is provided as a regulating means for regulating the pressing action of moving the second frame button 1022b, which is in a non-pressed state (normal state), to a pressed state (pressed state). By the operation of the solenoid 1023, which is a physical drive source, the second frame button 1022b can be changed between a regulating position for regulating the pressing motion of the second frame button 1022b and a release position for not regulating the pressing motion of the second frame button 1022b.

FIG. 85(b) shows a state in which the regulating member 1023a is positioned at the regulating position, and the regulating member 1023a regulates the movement of the second frame button 1022b from the normal state to the depressed state. . The regulating member 1023a is made of an elastically variable material (for example, rubber). The detection switch S22b cannot detect the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b unless the pressing operation is performed with a strong force. With this configuration, the second frame button 1022b can always be pressed, but the pressing force required for the pressing operation can be changed depending on the state (according to the state of the regulating member 1023a). becomes possible. In addition, regarding the pressing force required to press each frame button, the second frame button 1022b, the first frame button 1022a, and the regulating member 1023a in the state where the regulating member 1023a is located at the release position are at the regulating position. The pressing force required for the pressing operation increases in the order of the second frame button 1022b in the positioned state. As a result, when the second frame button 1022b is in the restricted state, only the first frame button 1022a is made easier to be pressed, and when the second frame button 1022b is in the released state, the pressing operation on the first frame button 1022a is made easier. can be made easier to press the second frame button 1022b.

In this modified example, a configuration is used in which the second frame button 1022b can always be pressed, but other configurations may be used. The second frame button 1022b may not be pressed when the restricting member 1023a is positioned at the restricting position.

Further, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 85(b), the distance from when the first frame button 1022a is pressed until it is detected by the detection switch S22a (first frame button pressing stroke) 1022b to be detected by the detection switch S22b (second frame button depression stroke). As a result, even in a state where the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b is restricted, it is possible to perform the pressing operation on the first frame button 1022a without discomfort.

In each of the embodiments described above, the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) and the second storage device (second storage valve 771a) are used as storage means for storing balls in the storage channel 700e. was provided, and the variable operation of the storage means was controlled so that one ball flowed out (flowed down) each time the second frame button 22b was operated. Alternatively, only the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) may be provided.

In this case, when the second frame button 22b is normally operated (normally depressed), the storage device is opened (released) for a period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds) during which one ball flows out. It may be configured such that when the second frame button 22b is pressed for a long time, the open (released) state is continued until all the balls stored in the storage means flow out. Here, as a method for determining whether the second frame button 22b is being pressed for a long time, the first pressing operation performs the same processing as the normal pressing, and the opening period of the first storage device 770 based on the normal pressing is It is preferable to determine the operation status of the second frame button 22b again at the timing of the end, and to determine that the long press operation is performed when the second frame button 22b is continuously pressed at that time. As a result, when it is determined that the continuous pressing for a predetermined period is being executed, the first storage device 770 can respond quickly to the operation of the second frame button 22b compared to the case where the operation of opening the first storage device 770 is executed. Device 770 can be opened.

Further, by using such a configuration, in order to enter all the balls stored in the first storage device 770 into the specific general ball entrance in the timing effect (operation effect), the second frame button 22b is pressed. , and wants to have at least one of the balls stored in the first storage device 770 enter the specific general ball entrance, can select a long press operation. It becomes possible, and it is possible to execute a performance game that matches the skill of the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the operation pattern of the movable valve 750, an operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 23(a)) is provided in which the induction state is changed a plurality of times in a short period of time. Therefore, when the long press operation is selected at the timing when the movable valve 750 executes the action scenario 3, many balls can enter the specific general ball entrance.

In addition, when the frame button 22b capable of executing the long-pressing operation is provided in this manner, a notification effect indicating the timing at which the action scenario 3 is executed may be executed. As a result, the player can select the normal operation or the long-pressing operation while guessing based on the content of the notification effect, and can prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Further, when the frame button 22b is pressed for a long time, the first storage device 770 is not kept open (released), but controlled to open and close the first storage device 770 at specific intervals. good too. In this case, the specific interval should be set based on the operation scenario (operation pattern) of the movable valve 750 . As a result, when the first ball flowed out based on the long-pressing operation enters the specific general ball entering means, the remaining balls can also flow out at a timing that facilitates entry.

In each of the embodiments described above, as a configuration for storing balls in the storage channel 700e or the storage channel 700g, a storage valve that is variably operated between a storage state and a release state by an electric drive source is used for storage. Although a device is provided, other configurations may be used, for example, a configuration in which balls are retained by magnetic force may be used. In this case, a variable member is used to change the magnetic body having a magnetic force between a storage position where it approaches the sphere and a release position where it moves away from the sphere. The state and the released state may be variably controlled.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the ball flowing out from the storage means (storage device) can be varied between a guided state in which the ball is guided to a specific ball entrance means (specific general ball entrance 630) and a difficult state in which guidance is difficult. As such, a movable valve 750 is provided that is variably operated between a protruded position and a retracted (retracted) position in a predetermined variable pattern (operation scenario). Any other configuration may be used as long as it can be changed between a guided state in which the sphere can be guided and a difficult state in which guidance is difficult. If the ball enters a predetermined opening among the plurality of openings, the ball is guided to the specific general ball entrance 630, and if the ball enters the other openings, the specific general A rotating body configured so that the ball is not guided to the ball entrance 630 may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, a frame button is used to determine that the operating means has been operated when the player presses it. A lever-shaped operation means that can determine whether the player has been operated by tilting left or right or forward or backward, or can determine whether the player has touched or approached the operation means. A touch sensor type operation means, or a wireless operation means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, among the balls fired by the right-handed game, the balls that flow into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 and do not enter the variable winning device 65 and the second ball entrance 640 are stored. It is configured to flow into the flow path 700e, and one ball is configured to flow into the storage flow path 700e for about 30 balls hit by a right-handed game. The rate at which the balls flow into the storage channel 700e may be determined as appropriate, and the configuration of the right side area of the game board may also be changed as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement of components in the board unit 700 may be different from those in the above-described embodiments so that the rate of flow into the storage channel 700e is increased.

Next, another example of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in another example. The game board 13 in this example and the game board 13 used in each of the above-described embodiments are different in the layout relationship of each configuration in the board unit 700 provided in the right side area of the game board. are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the game board 13 of this example, similar to the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. About 95% of the balls (about 95 out of 100 balls) launched into the right game area by the game flow into the inlet 700a of the board unit 700, and about 93% of the balls that flowed into the inlet (launched by the right-handed game). About 90% of the collected balls) flow down toward the variable winning device 65 after passing through the through gate 67 .

When the variable winning device 65 is in an open state (open state), the ball flowing down toward the variable winning device 65 enters the variable winning device 65, and the variable winning device 65 is in a closed state (closed state). In the case of , it passes through the variable winning device 65 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

A ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is closed flows down on the closed electric accessory 640a and into the distribution channel 700d (see FIG. 3). An adjustment member (such as a nail) is provided so that one out of about nine balls flowing into the sorting flow path 700d flows into the storage flow path 700e. That is, in the configuration of the game board 13 in this example, one out of about ten balls launched into the right game area by the right-handed game flows into the storage channel 700e (that is, in the board unit 700 The number of balls (10 balls) less than the number of prize balls (15 balls) of the specific general ball entrance 630 (see FIG. 3)) provided in the ball flow into the storage channel 700e) It is configured.

According to the game board 13 configured in this manner, the ball hit to the right during the jackpot game can be efficiently entered into the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable prize winning device 65 is closed during the jackpot game. Since the balls that have passed through the variable prize winning device 65 without entering the variable prize winning device 65 at the timing (during the interval between rounds) can be efficiently flowed into the storage channel 700e, the player can execute the jackpot game in an advantageous manner. be able to.

However, when the game board 13 configured in this way is used, by hitting the ball toward the right side area of the game board during the normal game, it is possible to use the game board 13 as compared with the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. Since it becomes easy for the ball to flow into the flow path 700e, there is a risk that the player may enter the ball into the specific general ball entrance 630 during the normal game.

On the other hand, in this example, as described above with reference to FIG. Even if the ball is made to flow into the storage channel 700e during the game, the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second 2 storage device 771) can be made difficult to grasp the release timing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of executing a game in which a ball is entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 during a normal game and acquiring a large amount of balls.

Furthermore, as described above in each of the above embodiments, the movable valve 750 is configured to move in various operation patterns, so that a game in which a ball is entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 during a normal game is performed. The act of executing and acquiring a large number of balls can be suppressed more.

In the case of using the game board 13 configured as in this example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied even during a normal game, the balls stored in the storage channel 700e The timing of releasing the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) so that the ball enters the mouth 630 (the timing of operating the frame button 22) may be notified. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out for a predetermined number of times (eg, 500 times) consecutively, or when a predetermined time (eg, 3 hours) has passed since the game was started, When a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern to be executed by the 3-symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with means (for example, a real-time clock) capable of determining the current time, and the current time is specified. Triggered by the time (for example, noon), it is preferable to execute the timing notification for notifying the player of the timing described above.

As a result, the player who has not won the special symbol jackpot can be provided with a game that can be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period of time. You can prevent yourself from getting bored. Also, the duration of the timing notification from the execution of the timing notification to the end thereof may be set to always be a constant time, or may be set to a different time each time. In addition, the condition for ending the timing notification is not only the passage of time, but also the fact that a predetermined number (for example, two) of balls enter the specific general ball entrance 630 during the period in which the timing notification is being executed. It can be used as a condition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the specific general ball entrance 630 during the period in which the timing notification is performed.

It should be noted that, when such timing notification is executed, the game that is advantageous to the player is the right-handed game. "Aim right" is displayed as a guidance display. This guidance display is set to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 from a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) before the timing notification is actually executed. This is a preparatory notification for the purpose of storing balls in the storage channel 700e before the timing notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which no balls are stored in the storage channel 700e when the timing notification is performed.

Furthermore, whether or not to execute the above-described preparation notification is determined based on the determination results of the determination means (storage upper limit sensor S1, storage detection sensor S2) that determines the presence or absence of balls stored on the storage channel 700e. should be determined by Specifically, when the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects a ball, it is preferable to set so that the notification for preparation is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from wastefully executing a right-handed game by executing the preparation notification in a state in which a new ball cannot flow into the storage channel 700e. can. In addition, the period during which this preparation notification is executed may be set as appropriate. ), the length of the notification period for preparation may be variable based on the number of balls. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are not stored in the storage channel 700e in the state where the timing notification is executed, and to wastefully execute the right-handed game for the player. You can prevent it from happening.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration of this example shown in FIG. By hitting the number of balls (for example, 10 balls) smaller than the number of balls (for example, 15 balls) that are paid out when the balls enter the specific general ball entrance 630, the balls are placed in the storage channel 700e. Even if a configuration that allows inflow is used, since the cover member 710 is provided to make it difficult to visually recognize the operating state of the movable valve 750 from the outside, the balls stored in the storage channel 700e are not allowed to enter the specific general ball entrance 630. It is possible to make it difficult to release the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) at the timing of entering the ball.

In addition, in this another example, the number of balls (10 balls) that is less than the number of prize balls (15 balls) paid out when the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 is hit to the storage channel 700e. Since it can be made to flow in, the ball is stored in the storage channel 700e during the normal game (that is, the game state in which the variable winning device 65 is not opened and the electric accessory 640a is difficult to be opened). Even if there is no state, even if the above-described timing notification is executed, and the ball is stored in the storage channel 700e and then entered into the specific general ball entrance 630, the game that is advantageous to the player ( It is possible to provide a game in which the number of balls paid out is greater than the number of balls hit.

As a result, the player who has not won the special symbol jackpot can be provided with a game that can be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period of time. You can prevent yourself from getting bored.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (Suggestion of release timing of storage device by production)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. A1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the game machine A1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball enters the specific ball entry means. It is structured so that it is easy to Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing at which the ball is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is reduced.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

In the gaming machine A1, storage means storing a plurality of variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means, and one variable pattern selected from the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means. and variable pattern setting means for setting.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, one variable pattern is set and varied by the variable means from a plurality of variable patterns. By easily aiming at the timing, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is excessively advantageous.

Here, the storage means storing a plurality of variable patterns is stored with a plurality of types of variable patterns in which a first period in which the variable means is in the first state and a second period in which the variable means is in the second state are defined. It is a means of In addition, this variable pattern may be one variable pattern in which the minimum unit for varying the variable means may be set. The motion may be one variable pattern. In the former case described above, one variable pattern is set for one operation of the variable means. can be made difficult to grasp. Further, in the latter case described above, the execution period of one variable pattern can be lengthened, so the frequency of setting variable patterns can be suppressed.

In the game machine A2, the variable pattern setting means repeatedly sets the variable pattern in a predetermined order after the power is turned on.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, since the variable patterns after the power is turned on are repeatedly set in a predetermined order, one variable pattern is biasedly selected, which is advantageous. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the disadvantage is biased.

Here, after the power is turned on means after the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the variable operation of the variable means is executed, and the variable patterns of the variable means are set in a predetermined order. By doing so, the above-described effects can be obtained.

In addition, in the game machine A3, a process is added to change the period from when the game machine is turned on until the execution of the variable operation of the variable means is started, and the variable pattern of 1 is biasedly selected. It is also possible to change the variable operation to be executed after a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on while suppressing problems. That is, by changing (delaying) the period from when the power is turned on to when the execution of the variable operation is started by, for example, 3 seconds, the variable operation is executed after a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on, and the variable operation is performed for 3 seconds. It can be delayed (delayed). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the time elapsed from power-on being measured and the timing at which the variable means is brought into the first state from being grasped based on the measurement result. In this case, as a method for differentiating the variable operation to be executed a predetermined time after the power is turned on, in the process executed after the power is turned on, the timing to start controlling the variable operation is determined by lottery, or is determined in advance. A method of sequentially executing the set start timings is conceivable.

In addition, when a setting order storage means is provided in which the order of setting the variable patterns of the variable means is predetermined, and the variable patterns are set such that the order stored in the setting order storage means is repeatedly executed. may be provided with variable pattern determination means for determining which variable pattern stored in the setting order storage means is to be set as the first variable pattern to be executed when starting the variable operation of the variable means. As a result, it is possible to change the variable operation to be executed after a predetermined period of time from the power-on, while suppressing the problem of biased selection of one variable pattern.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A3, a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player, and a mode of the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means. and suggestive effect mode setting means for setting based on the variable pattern executed by the variable control means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the mode of the suggestive effect is set based on the variable pattern in which the variable means is variable, so that the variable is easily executed. There is an effect that it is possible to set the execution of suggestive effects in accordance with the pattern.

When using the configuration of the gaming machine A4, it is preferable to prevent the player from predicting the timing at which the variable means is positioned in the first state. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a shielding member (blindfold member) for making it difficult to visually recognize the variable operation of the variable means. As a result, the player can grasp the timing when the variable means changes to the first state based on the suggested performance to be executed, instead of directly looking at the variable means, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, when the configuration of the gaming machine A2 is provided, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the variable means will be in the first state. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine A4, the suggestive effect mode set by the suggestive effect mode setting means is set corresponding to each of the plurality of variable patterns.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the mode of suggestive performance is set corresponding to each of the plurality of variable patterns, so even if the variable pattern is switched, the suggestive performance is beneficial to the player. can be easily executed.

Incidentally, as a suggestive effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means, a moving object is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device, and the timing when the moving object is positioned at a specific position coincides with the operation timing. It is conceivable that the timing at which the sound executed as the command becomes a predetermined sound coincides with the operation timing. In this case, it is preferable to use a preliminary effect that allows the player to recognize that the operation timing is approaching. Specifically, it is preferable to use an effect in which a moving object is displayed moving in a straight line at a constant speed toward a specific position, or an effect using voice to count down a number toward a specific number (for example, 0). As a result, the timing of operating the operating means can be grasped to some extent in advance, so even if the operating timing is set only for a short period, the operating means can be appropriately operated.

On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for the player to operate the operation means at an operation timing that is advantageous to the player, it is preferable to execute an inhibition effect different from the preliminary effect described above. As this hindrance effect, it is conceivable to execute the preliminary effect with different timings. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to operate the operation means at an operation timing that is advantageous to the player.

The game machine A4 or A5 has a determination means for determining the contents of the variable pattern executed by the variable control means, and the suggestive effect execution means performs a start timing based on the contents determined by the determination means. A game machine A6, characterized in that it starts the suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the suggestive effect is started at the start timing based on the variable content of the variable pattern that is actually performed. There is an effect that a suggestion production can be executed.

Here, as the content of the variable pattern, content information indicating whether or not the variable pattern is advantageous to the player, content information indicating the period in which the variable means is actually in the first state, variable Content information or the like indicating the remaining period until the pattern is switched can be considered.

In the gaming machine A6, the variable means has period determination means for determining a period during which the variable means is in the first state, and the suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect at a timing based on the determination result of the period determiner. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that it is to start.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the suggestive effect is started at the timing based on the result of determining the period of the first state. There is an effect that the suggestion performance can be easily executed at the timing when the ball flowing out from the ball is changed to the first state and can be moved to the variable means.

In any one of the game machines A3 to A7, the operation timing of the operation means suggested by the suggestive effect is that at least one ball flowed out from the storage means when the operation means is operated based on the operation timing. is set movably to said variable means which is changed to said first state.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A3 to A7, by operating the operation means at the timing based on the suggestive effect, the game ball can be easily entered into the specific ball entry means. , there is an effect that the interest in operating the operating means can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A8, timing specifying means for specifying timing at which the variable means changes to the first state based on the variable pattern stored in the storage means, and outflow from the storage means. period setting means for setting a period for the ball to reach the variable means; A game machine A9 characterized by having an operation timing setting means for setting the operation timing of and a suggestive performance execution means for executing a performance suggestive of the operation timing set by the operation timing setting means.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A8, the timing of changing to the first state is specified, and the balls flowing out from the storage means reach the variable means from the specified timing. A value obtained by subtracting the period until the operation is set as the operation timing, and the performance suggesting the operation timing is executed, so that the precision of the performance suggesting the operation timing can be improved, and the player participates in the performance enthusiastically. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine A9, a measuring means for measuring a period until the ball flowing out from the storage means reaches the variable means, a measuring period measured by the measuring means, and a period set by the period setting means. and period correcting means for correcting the setting contents of the period setting means based on the result of the judgment by the period judging means.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the period until the ball actually reaches can be measured, and the set period can be corrected based on the measurement result. There is an effect that it is possible to further enhance the performance, and that the player can be motivated to participate in the presentation.

In any one of the game machines A4 to A10, a ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determination means for performing determination when a ball enters the ball entrance means, and A performance executing means for executing an effect for suggesting a determination result by the determining means, and a privilege game executing means for performing a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result. , the game machine A11, wherein the suggestive effect is executed by the suggestive effect executing means based on the determination result of the determining means.

According to the gaming machine A11, the suggestive effect is executed based on the determination result of the determination means for determining whether or not the privilege game is to be executed, so that the player can identify the game aiming at the privilege game. The ball-entering means can be associated with a game in which a ball is entered, and there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

Here, as conditions for executing the suggestive effect, for example, the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result that the privilege game is executed, or the determination result that the privilege game is not executed (so-called failure) is predetermined. A case where the number of times is consecutive can be considered.

Further, the timing at which the suggestive effect is executed may be a period before the determination result of the determination means is notified to the player, or may be the timing at which the determination result is notified, or when the determination result is a specific determination result. In the case of , it may be during a privilege game that is executed after the determination result is notified. If the suggestion performance is executed during the privilege game, it is possible for the player to simultaneously play the privilege game and the game of entering the ball into the specific ball-entering means, which is more advantageous to the player. A game state can be provided.

<Feature B group> (execution of production using release operation)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. B1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine B1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball enters the specific ball entering means. It is structured so that it is easy to Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing at which the ball is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is reduced.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

In the gaming machine B1, a ball entering means that is provided in the game area and that allows a ball to enter, a determining means that performs determination when a ball enters the ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the effect execution means is a gaming machine B2, characterized in that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific effect indicating that it is time to operate the operating means is executed.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, an operation is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied as an effect for suggesting the determination result of the determination means for determining whether or not the privilege game is executed. Since the specific effect suggesting the operation timing of the means is executed, it is possible to provide the player with the privilege game or the specific effect based on the determination result of the determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the game machine B1 or B2 has a storage determination means for determining that the storage means stores balls, and the storage determination means determines that the storage means stores the balls. A game machine B3, characterized in that it is at least one condition for establishing a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the specific performance is executed when at least the storage determination means determines that the balls are stored in the storage means. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball does not flow out from the storage means even though the operation means is operated at the operation timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the effect executing means, when executing the effect for suggesting the specific determination result, produces a effect for suggesting a determination result different from the specific determination result. A game machine B4 characterized in that it is easier to execute the specific performance than when it is executed.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result that the privilege game is executed, the determination result other than the specific determination result Since the specific performance is more likely to be executed than in a certain case, both the privilege game and the specific performance can be easily given to the player at once. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B4, the operation timing suggested by the specific effect executed by the effect execution means is at least one ball flowed out from the storage means when the operation is executed at the operation timing. is set movably to said variable means which is changed to said second state.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines B2 to B4, the operation timing at which at least one ball discharged from the storage means reaches the variable means changed to the second state is controlled by the specific effect. Therefore, when the ball stored in the storage means is caused to flow out from the storage means while the performance that suggests the determination result of the determination means is being executed, the ball enters the specific ball entrance means. It can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B5, the effect executing means notifies information based on the determination result by the determining means based on the operation of the operation means during the execution of the specific effect. A game machine B6 characterized by executing a notification effect.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines B2 to B5, information based on the determination result of the determination means is obtained based on the fact that the operation means is operated during the period during which the specific effect is being executed. Since the notification effect to notify is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the action of causing the balls stored in the storage means to flow out from the storage means.

In the gaming machines B2 to B6, an advantage suggesting effect execution means for executing an advantage suggesting effect suggesting the operation timing of the operating means that is advantageous to the player during the period when the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game. A gaming machine B7 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B2 to B6, during the period when the privilege game is executed, the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player is suggested by the advantage suggesting effect, so the privilege The game value during execution of the game can be increased, and the player's desire to play can be increased.

<Characteristic group C> (makes the operation of the movable valve difficult to see)
A ball entering means that allows a ball to enter, a first state in which a ball is likely to enter the ball entering means, and a second state in which a ball is less likely to enter the ball entering means than in the first state. and a switching means capable of switching between a difficult state in which at least a part of the variable means is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside and an easy state in which it is easier to visually recognize than the difficult state, and a predetermined condition is established. and switching control means for switching from the difficult state to the easy state by the switching means when the game is in a state of difficulty.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable means is provided that is variable between an allowable position that allows a game ball hit on a game board to enter a specific area and a regulation position that regulates it. By passing the ball through the variable means in a state in which is at the allowable position, the ball passes through the specific area, giving a privilege to the player. (For example, JP-A-2015-083161).

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the specific area depending on the timing at which the game ball hit on the game board reaches the movable means. It was possible to entertain whether or not the timing reached the variable means. However, since it is configured so that the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, there is a problem that the action of causing the game ball to reach the variable means is performed in accordance with the timing when the movable means reaches the allowable position. there were. In addition, since the player can grasp the operating state of the movable means, the player will quickly perceive that the game ball that is hit will not enter the specific ball entrance, thereby reducing the player's desire to play. I had a problem with it.

According to the gaming machine C1, a variable state that can be changed between a first state in which a ball is likely to enter the ball entering means and a second state in which a ball is less likely to enter the ball entering means than in the first state. Since at least part of the variable state of the means can be switched between a difficult state that is difficult to visually recognize from the outside and an easy state that is easier to visually recognize than the difficult state, the player does not have to grasp the state of the variable means. The state and the state to be grasped can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the player's early detection that the launched game ball does not enter the specific ball entrance. .

In the game machine C1, the switching means has a shielding member arranged on the front side of the variable means, and irradiation means capable of irradiating the shielding member with light of a specific color from the rear side. and the shielding means is configured to be in the difficult state when not irradiated by the irradiation means, and to be changed to the easy state by being irradiated by the irradiation means. Characteristic gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the difficulty state and the easy state can be switched by irradiating light from the irradiating means, so there is an effect that the switching means can be easily designed. .

In the game machine C1, the switching means has a movable member movable between a position on the front side of the variable means and a retracted position retracted from the front side of the variable means, and the switching control means moves the movable member. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that switching to the difficult state is performed by moving the movable member to the front side position, and switching to the easy state is performed by moving the movable member to the retracted position.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, by moving the movable member, it is possible to switch between the difficult state and the easy state, so there is an effect that the switching means can be easily designed. be.

In the game machine C1, the switching means includes a shielding member arranged on the front side of the variable means, an irradiation means capable of irradiating the shielding member with light, and and variable means for varying the incident angle of the light irradiated to the light, wherein the shielding means varies the incident angle of the light to the easy state by setting the incident angle of the light to a first angle by the variable means. A game machine C4 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the shielding member can be changed to the easy state only by varying the incidence of light on the shielding member, so that the switching means can be easily designed. has the effect of being able to

In the game machine C4, the variable means is movable means for moving the shielding member, and by moving the shielding member by the movable means, the incident angle of the light is set to the first angle. A gaming machine C5 characterized by:

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, by moving the shielding member, each incident light is set to the first angle, so that the shielding member can be put into the easy state without moving the irradiation means. Since it can be varied, there is an effect that the switching means can be easily designed.

Any one of the game machines C1 to C5 has ball detection means capable of detecting a ball flowing down toward the variable means, and the predetermined condition is established when the ball detection means detects a ball. A gaming machine C6 characterized by:

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C5, when it is detected that the ball flows down toward the variable means, the predetermined condition is satisfied, so the ball is blocked by the shielding member. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the flow cannot be visually recognized.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C6, a ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determination means for performing determination when a ball enters the ball entrance means, and Effect execution means for executing an effect for suggesting a determination result by the determination means; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result; and the determination means. and measuring means for measuring the number of determinations, and when the measurement means measures the number of determinations in which the determination result of the determination means continuously becomes a determination result other than the specific determination result for a predetermined number of times, A gaming machine C7 characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C6, when the determination result of the determination means is other than the specific determination result continuously for a predetermined number of times, the shielding member can be set to the easy state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming extremely disadvantageous.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C7, a second irradiation means for irradiating light different from the irradiation means, and based on the establishment of a first condition, for either the irradiation means or the second irradiation means irradiation control means for executing irradiation control; and second condition satisfaction determination means for determining whether a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the first condition; The irradiation control means executes the irradiation control on the irradiation means when the second condition is satisfied, and controls the second irradiation means when the second condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine C8 characterized in that it executes the above-described irradiation control.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C2 to C7, when the first condition for executing the irradiation control is satisfied, based on the determination result of whether or not the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, even if the shielding member is not set to the easy state, the irradiation control is executed by the second irradiation means, so that the effect of light irradiation is reduced. has the effect of being able to suppress

By arranging the irradiating means and the second irradiating means close to each other, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity with respect to the effect of the light irradiation. Further, when the configuration of the game machine C8 is used, the contents of the irradiation control by the irradiation control means are made the same, and switching control for switching only the output destination for executing the control between the irradiation means and the second irradiation means can be executed. do it. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control load of the irradiation control means, and to suppress the deterioration of the rendering effect.

<Characteristic group D> (Rhythm game is set so that the operation means is operated at a specific timing)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. D1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine D1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball is entered into the specific ball entering means. easily configured. Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing at which the ball is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is reduced.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine D1, an effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed in accordance with an operation to the operation means; effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode to a specific effect mode when the means is operated; and specific timing setting means for setting a specific timing based on the state of the variable means varied by the variable control means. and operation effect setting means for setting the specific period in the operation effect based on the specific timing set by the specific timing setting means when a specific condition is satisfied. D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the effect execution means executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed in accordance with the operation corresponding to the operation means, and the operation means is operated during the operation effect. Since the specific period in which the effect mode is changed to the specific effect mode based on the operation can be set by the specific timing set based on the state of the variable means, the operation effect and the state of the variable means can be set. can be associated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

In the game machine D2, the specific timing is the timing at which at least one ball flowing out from the storage means can be moved to the variable means changed to the first state when the operation means is operated. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being set by.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, when the operation means is operated, at least one ball flowing out from the storage means can be moved to the variable means changed to the first state as the specific timing. Therefore, by operating the operation means so as to change the effect mode to the specific effect mode in the operation effect, the ball stored in the storage means can be easily entered into the specific ball entering means. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the operation performance, and the player's desire to play can be increased.

In the gaming machine D2 or D3, operation determining means for determining whether the operating means is operated within the specific period, storage means for storing information updated based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and and frequency varying means for varying the frequency of establishment of a specific condition based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2 or D3, the establishment frequency of the specific condition is varied depending on whether or not the operation means is operated within the specific period in the operation performance. can be made to participate in the operation performance willingly. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the operation production can be enhanced.

In this case, it is desirable to increase the frequency of establishment of the specific condition as the number of times the operation means is operated within the specific period set during the operation presentation increases. By configuring in this manner, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means within the specific period, and there is an effect that the effect of the operation presentation can be further enhanced.

In any one of the game machines D2 to D4, a second operation means different from the operation means is provided, and the operation effect executed by the effect execution means is executed according to an operation on the operation means or the second operation means. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the performance mode is variable.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, it is possible to increase the number of operating means that can be operated by the operation presentation, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines D2 to D5, the operation effect executed by the effect executing means is set for the specific period based on a predetermined music, and corresponds to the progress of the predetermined music. specific period settable area storage means for storing a plurality of specific period settable areas in which the specific period can be set; and the plurality of specific period settable areas stored in the specific period settable area storage means; Matching point determination means for determining a point where the specific timing matches the specific timing, and specific period setting means for setting the specific period of the operation effect to the point determined to match by the matching point determining means. A gaming machine D6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D6, in the operation effect in which the specific period is set based on the music, the specific period of the operation effect is set at the place where the specific period settable region corresponding to the progress of the music matches the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to operate the operation means at a specific timing by using a specific period corresponding to the music used for the operation presentation, and there is an effect that the production effect of the operation presentation can be further enhanced.

<Feature group E> (correction of operation effect based on ball flow situation)
a ball path through which the ball can pass; ball passage detection means for detecting that the ball has passed through a specific position in the ball path; and ball passage detection means for detecting the ball after a predetermined condition is established. period setting means for setting a first period as a period until the time period is set; notification timing setting means for setting notification timing for notifying a specific effect mode based on the first period set in the period setting means; and effect notification means for notifying the specific effect mode at the notification timing set by the notification timing setting means; and period specification for specifying a passage period from when the predetermined condition is established until the ball passage detection means detects the ball. means, period determining means for determining the passage period specified by the period specifying means and the first period set by the period setting means, and determining the period based on the result of determination by the period determining means and period correcting means for correcting the first period set by the setting means.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines execute an effect corresponding to the period during which the game balls are flowing, in order to notify the player of the flowing state of the game balls in an easy-to-understand manner. (For example, JP-A-2011-235016). In addition, there is a configuration in which a holding device capable of holding game balls struck on the game board is provided, and the game balls held in the holding device flow down to the ball entrance when the player performs a release operation. . (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, since it is possible to notify the player of the game ball flow-down state in an easy-to-understand manner, the player can enjoy the game based on the content of the notification (content of the performance). In addition, since it is determined whether or not the ball enters the specific ball entrance depending on the timing at which the game ball hit on the game board reaches the movable means, the player is asked at what timing the game ball It was something that could be enjoyed whether or not it reached the movable means. However, if there is a difference between the period during which the effect corresponding to the period during which the game ball flows and the period during which the actual game ball flows, the state of the game ball flowing down and the effect will differ. There is a problem that the player is confused, and the performance effect is lowered. In addition, since it is configured so that the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, there is a problem that the action of causing the game ball to reach the variable means is performed in accordance with the timing when the movable means reaches the allowable position. there were. In addition, since the player can grasp the operating state of the movable means, the player will quickly perceive that the game ball that is hit will not enter the specific ball entrance, thereby reducing the player's desire to play. I had a problem with it.

According to the gaming machine E1, the first period referred to when setting the notification timing for notifying the specific effect mode can be corrected based on the passage period during which the ball actually passes. It is possible to easily match the situation with the execution situation of the specific effect mode. As a result, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Here, when the configuration of the gaming machine E1 is used in a gaming machine in which an effect for suggesting whether or not the ball passes through a specific ball path is executed as a specific effect mode, the passing situation of the ball and To suppress a problem such as execution of a performance for suggesting that a ball passes through a specific ball path after the ball passes through the specific ball path due to deviation from notification timing of a specific performance mode. can be done.

In the gaming machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the specific effect mode notified by the effect notification means suggests that the ball passes through the specific position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, it is possible to correct the timing at which the effect suggesting that the ball passes through the specific position is notified according to the period during which the ball actually passes. , there is an effect that the production effect can be further enhanced.

The game machine E1 or E2 has a ball passage determining means for determining that a ball has passed a predetermined position on the upstream side of the specific position in the ball path, and the ball passage determining means determines whether the ball passes the predetermined position. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the predetermined condition is established when it is determined that the ball has passed through the .

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1 or E2, the notification timing preset based on the period from when the ball passes through a predetermined position to when it passes through a specific position in the ball path is provided. Since correction can be made based on the actual passage period of the ball, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine E3, the case where the ball passes through the predetermined position is shown as the trigger for the establishment of the predetermined condition. In addition to the method of detecting with a sensor), for example, a method of detecting that a regulating member that regulates the ball flowing down toward a predetermined position has changed from the regulating position to the release position that releases the regulation is conceivable. In this case, even if the regulating member is changed to the release position, the ball does not necessarily flow down toward the predetermined position immediately. It is preferable to use a method of providing retention means for retention and determining that the regulation member has changed to the release position in a state in which the ball is retained in the retention means. Even if such a method is used, it is possible to indirectly determine that the ball has passed through the predetermined position, and the same effect as that of the game machine E3 can be obtained.

In the gaming machine E3, the ball path has a first ball path provided with the specific position, and a second ball path branching from the first ball path in a section between the predetermined position and the specific position. A game machine E4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine E3, there is a possibility that the ball that has passed through the predetermined position will pass through the second ball path without passing through the specified position. There is an effect that it is possible to entertain the player and improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine E4, the ball path is divided into a first state in which the ball passing through the ball path is more likely to pass through the first ball path and a second state in which the ball is more likely to pass through the second ball path than in the first state. and whether the ball that has passed through the predetermined position is in a path state that allows it to pass through the first ball path based on the path state of the ball path that is varied by the variable means. and the effect notification means, when the path state determining means determines that the ball passing through the predetermined position is in a path state in which the ball can pass through the first ball path. Secondly, the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that it notifies the specific effect mode.

According to the gaming machine E5, when the ball can pass through the specific position, the specific effect mode is notified. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that it will be so, and that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Also, in this case, if the predetermined first period differs from the period actually spent for the ball to pass from the predetermined position to the specific position, even though the specific effect mode has been notified, This causes a problem that the ball does not pass through the first ball path frequently. Since the first period can be corrected, there is an effect that the reliability of the specific rendering mode can be increased and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

In any one of gaming machines E3 to E5, second ball passage detection means for detecting that a ball has passed a second specific position in the second ball path; a second period identifying means for identifying a second passing period from to the second passing period until detected by the second ball passing detecting means, wherein the period discriminating means includes the preceding passing period and the second passing period, and the A gaming machine E6 characterized in that it distinguishes between the first period and the first period.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the first period can be corrected using the period required for the ball to pass through the second path. It is possible to increase the amount of information for correcting the first period and improve the correction accuracy as compared with the case where the first period is corrected based only on the sphere obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that the reliability of the specific presentation mode can be increased, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the configuration of the gaming machine E6, it is preferable to provide the second specific position at a location that requires the same period as the period required for the ball to pass from the predetermined position to the specific position. As a result, the information on the transit period specified by the period specifying means and the information on the second transit period specified by the second period specifying means can be collected without distinction, and the control load can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to

Also, in the gaming machine E6, the period determining means uses both the passage period and the second passage period, but may be configured to use only the second passage period.

<Feature F Group> (Making it possible to operate multiple operation means with the same operation)
A first operation means operable by the player, a first determination means for determining that the first operation means has been operated, and a second operation means different from the first operation means operable by the player. An operation means, a second determination means for determining whether the second operation means has been operated, and an effect for executing a predetermined effect based on the result of determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. Execution means, in which interlocking means for variably operating said second operating means interlocking with the variable operation of said first operating means, and said interlocking means being coupled to said first operating means. variable control means for varying between an interlocking state in which the second operating means is interlocked and a release state in which the coupling state is released, wherein the variable control means activates the interlocking means when a predetermined condition is satisfied; The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it is variable to the interlocking state.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a plurality of operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation effect is executed based on the operation of each operation means. (For example, JP-A-2006-55481).

In such a conventional gaming machine, the player operates the operation means corresponding to the effect among the plurality of operation means, so that the player is instructed to use the plurality of operation means. There is a problem in that it is necessary to select and operate the corresponding operation means, which reduces the motivation to operate the operation means. Further, by operating one operating means among a plurality of operating means, an effect corresponding to the operation to the one operating means is executed, so that an unexpected effect can be provided to the player. There was a problem that it was not possible to

According to the gaming machine F1, when the player operates the first operation means, either an effect based on the determination result of the first determination means or an effect based on the determination result of the second determination means is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the same effect as when a plurality of operating means are operated by operating only one operating means, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to operate the operating means. be.

In addition, when the first operation means is operated, since the performance based on the determination result of the second determination means can be executed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, resulting in a performance effect. has the effect of increasing

In the gaming machine F1, the effect executing means, when the first operating means is operated in a state in which the interlocking means is changed to the interlocking state by the variable control means, is determined by the second determining means. The game machine F2 is characterized in that it executes the predetermined effect based on the result.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, by changing the interlocking means to the interlocking state, when the first operating means is operated, an effect based on the determination result of the second determining means is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine F2, the first operation means and the second operation means are configured to be movable from a first position to a second position, and the first determination means and the second determination means are: It is determined that the corresponding first operating means or second operating means has moved to the second position, and the first operating means is moved from the first position to the second position. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the distance for moving the second operating means from the first position to the second position is shorter than the distance for moving.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the second operation means has a shorter distance until it is determined that the operation has been performed than the first operation means. In the interlocked state, it is possible to reliably execute an effect based on the determination result of the second determination means when the first operation means is operated. Therefore, there is an effect that an unexpected performance can be executed with a simple configuration.

The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the interlocking means is provided inside the gaming machine which is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the interlocking means is provided at a position that is difficult to see from the outside, making it difficult for the player to grasp the state of the interlocking means. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a game area in which a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered ball, and a player based on the entry of the game ball. and the storage means is varied from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released based on the operation of the second operation means. a first state in which a ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specified ball entering means by being changed to the released state by the storage control means; A game machine F5 characterized by comprising a variable means capable of changing between a ball-entering means and a second state in which it is difficult to enter a ball.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the first operation means is operated, the retention control means may change from the retention state to the release state. On the other hand, there is an effect that a game with unexpectedness can be provided and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine F5, a timing setting means for setting the operation timing of the second operation means at which the ball discharged from the storage means is likely to enter the specific ball entering means, and the operation timing set by the timing setting means. a game machine F6, characterized in that it has an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect for operating the first operation means based on.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F5, by operating the first operation means according to the operation presentation for operating the first operation means, it is possible to make the ball enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the operation presentation.

In the game machine F6, the operation effect is a effect in which operation timings for operating the first operation means are reported a plurality of times, and at least one of the operation timings reported a plurality of times is the timing setting means. A gaming machine F7, characterized in that the operation timing is set by.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, one of the plurality of operation timing notifications executed during the operation performance is the second operation means that makes it easy to enter the specific ball entry means. Since the operation timing can be suggested, the first operation means can be operated for all of a plurality of operation timings executed during the operation presentation. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Feature G group> (Prediction and notification of the state in which the movable valve is advantageous)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. G1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the game machine G1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball enters the specific ball entering means. It is structured so that it is easy to Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing at which the ball is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is reduced.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

In the gaming machine G1, the variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means includes at least a first period during which the variable means is likely to be in the first state, and and a second period during which the first state is unlikely to occur, and a period determining means for determining timing at which the first period is set as variable control of the variable means by the variable control means, and a period determining means for the period determining means. a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the timing at which the first period is set is determined by the game machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, by executing the specific performance, the player is made to understand that the first period in which the variable means is likely to be in the first state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

The game machine G2 has an advantage suggesting effect executing means for executing an advantageous suggesting effect suggesting an operation timing of the operating means that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is established, and the specific effect executing means The game machine G3 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed during a period from when the predetermined condition is established until the advantageous suggestive effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, it is possible to inform the player that there is a possibility that the current advantage-suggesting effect is being executed during the first period. There is an effect that the game can be motivated to play.

In the gaming machine G3, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect when the first period is set within the period in which the advantageous suggestive effect is executed. Machine G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, it is possible to inform the player that the current advantageous suggesting effect will be executed during the first period, so that the player can play the game more enthusiastically. There is an effect that it can be done.

In any one of the game machines G2 to G4, it has a storage determination means for determining that the storage means is storing balls, and the specific effect execution means at least determines whether the storage means is a ball by the storage determination means. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed when it is determined that the is stored.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G2 to G4, the specific effect is executed only when the balls are stored in the storage means, so that the player can actively operate the operation means. can be operated. In addition, since it is prohibited to execute the specific performance in a state in which no balls are stored in the storage means, the specific performance is executed unnecessarily, and the player grasps the variable pattern of the variable member. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines G2 to G5, a ball entering means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determining means for performing determination when a ball enters the ball entering means, and A performance executing means for executing an effect for suggesting a determination result by the determining means, and a privilege game executing means for performing a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result. The game machine G6 is characterized in that said specific effect executing means executes, as said specific effect, a specific fusion effect for notifying that the determination result by said determining means is said specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G2 to G5, it is possible to execute an effect combining the fact that the privilege game is executed and the fact that the first period is set, so that it is more advantageous to the player. It is possible to notify that a game state is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while having a sense of anticipation.

In any one of the game machines G2 to G6, the specific effect execution means changes the notification mode for notifying the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player suggested during the advantageous suggestive effect to a specific notification mode. A gaming machine G7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines G2 to G6, it is possible to notify the player that the first period is set according to the notification mode during the advantageous suggestive presentation, so that the presentation effect has the effect of increasing

<Characteristic H group> (Makes it possible to select the difficulty level of the release suggestion effect)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. H1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine H1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, it is entered into the specific ball entering means. easily configured. Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing at which the ball is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is lowered.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

Advantageous suggesting effect execution means for executing an advantageous suggesting effect suggesting the operation timing of the operating means that is advantageous to the player based on the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means in the gaming machine H1; a selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect executed by the advantageous suggestive effect executing means; and an effect for setting the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect based on the effect mode selected by the selecting means. A gaming machine H2 characterized by comprising mode setting means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the advantageous suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode selected by the player, so that the advantageous suggesting effect can be executed in the effect mode desired by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H2, the advantageous suggesting effect executed by the advantageous suggesting effect executing means can suggest the operation timing of the operating means that is advantageous to the player a plurality of times, and the effect mode setting means includes: Suggestion frequency setting means for setting the number of times of suggesting the advantageous suggesting effect based on the effect mode selected by the selecting means; and suggestion mode setting means for setting a suggestion mode.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, based on the presentation mode selected by the selection means, the number of suggestions and the suggestion mode of the advantageous suggestion presentation are set, so that the player is motivated. There is an effect that it is possible to make the selection of the selection means.

In the gaming machine H3, when the number of times of suggestion is set by the number of suggestions setting means to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, the suggestion mode set by the suggestion mode setting means is displayed in the first mode in which the player can visually recognize. Also, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the second mode, which is more difficult to see than the first mode, is easily set.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of the game machine H3, when the selection means selects an effect mode in which a large number of suggestions is set, the operation means is operated at an operation timing that is advantageous to the player. The second mode is set in which it is difficult to operate the . As a result, the effect mode corresponding to the number of suggestions less than the predetermined number of times is selected for the player, and the advantageous suggestive effect in which the first mode is likely to be set is executed. It is possible to select whether or not to select a performance mode corresponding to the number of times of suggestion equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, and to execute an advantageous suggestion performance in which the second mode is likely to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select an advantage-suggesting production suitable for his/her skill, and can be motivated to participate in the production.

In the game machine H3 or H4, when the number of suggestions equal to or greater than a predetermined number is set by the number of suggestions setting means, the number of suggestions less than the predetermined number of times is set by the suggestion mode setting means. A game machine H5 characterized in that a short interval is easily set as the interval at which the suggested mode is set by.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, when the selection means selects an effect mode in which a large number of suggestions is set, the effect mode in which the number of suggestions less than the predetermined number of times is set. Since a shorter interval is more likely to be set as the interval at which the suggestive mode is set than when is selected, the player can select an advantageous suggestive effect according to his/her own skill and participate in the effect willingly. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines H3 to H5, an operation content determining means for determining the operation content of the operating means while the advantageous suggestive effect is being executed, and the operation content determined by the operation content determining means are: A game machine H6 characterized by comprising a performance mode changing means for changing the performance mode of the advantageous suggestive performance to a special performance mode advantageous to the player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines H3 to H5, the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect is changed to a special effect mode advantageous to the player based on the operation contents of the operating means during the advantageous suggestive effect. , there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

In the game machine H6, the operation content determination means determines the number of times the operation means is operated at the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player. A game machine H7 characterized in that, when the number of operations reaches the predetermined number of times, the effect mode changing means changes the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect to the special effect mode.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of the game machine H6, the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect can be changed to a special effect mode that is advantageous to the player based on the number of times the operation means is operated at appropriate timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can operate the operating means more willingly.

<Feature Group I> (Valve operation monitoring on the sub side)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. I1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235). In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine I1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, it is entered into the specific ball entering means. easily configured. Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing at which the ball is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is reduced.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

The gaming machine I1 has main control means for executing game control, and slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, wherein the main control means Storage control means, the variable control means, and variable control information generation means for generating variable control information for notifying the control contents of the variable control means to the slave control means, wherein the slave control means , display means for executing a predetermined effect; variable information storage means for storing variable information corresponding to a predetermined variable pattern for which the variable means is variably controlled; variable control situation specifying means for specifying the variable control situation of the variable means based on the variable control information and using the variable information stored in the variable information storage means; The apparatus is characterized by having an effect setting means for setting an effect to be displayed on the display means based on a variable control situation, and an effect executing means for executing the effect set by the effect setting means. game machine I2.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, when executing an effect based on the variable state of the variable means variably controlled by the main control means, the slave control means is output from the main control means. Since the performance is executed based on the variable control information and the variable information stored in the variable information storage means of the slave control means, there is an effect that the control load of the main control means can be reduced. .

In the game machine I2, the variable control information generation means includes at least start timing information for starting the variable operation of the variable means in the variable control information generated first after the game machine is powered on. A gaming machine I3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, the variable control information generated first after the gaming machine is powered on includes the start timing information for starting the variable operation of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the accuracy of specifying the variable control state by the slave control means can be improved.

In the game machine I3, the main control means has operation start period setting means capable of setting a different period as an operation start period from when the game machine is powered on until the variable operation of the variable means is started. A gaming machine I4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, it is possible to vary the period from when the gaming machine is turned on until the variable operation of the variable means is started. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game player from easily grasping the variable motion of .

In the gaming machines I2 to I4, the main control means includes storage means storing a plurality of variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means, and and initial variable pattern setting means for setting a variable pattern to be executed first from among the plurality of variable patterns, wherein the variable control means preselects the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means. The variable control information generating means sets at least the initial variable pattern setting means to the variable control information generated for the first time after the game machine is powered on. A gaming machine I5 characterized by including initial variable pattern setting information.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, even if the variable means is variably controlled so that a plurality of variable patterns are repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, the gaming machine Since the variable pattern to be executed first when the power is turned on can be set from a plurality of variable patterns, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the variable operation of the variable means. It has the effect of being able to Further, since the variable means is variably controlled so that a plurality of variable patterns are repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, there is an effect that the processing load of variable control can be reduced.

<Feature J Group> (A player can select an operation interval in an operation presentation for operating the operation means for a predetermined number of times)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. J1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine J1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball is entered into the specific ball entering means. easily configured. Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing when it becomes easier for the ball to enter the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is reduced.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

Advantageous suggesting effect executing means for executing an advantageous suggesting effect suggesting the operation timing of the operating means that is advantageous to the player based on the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means in the game machine J1; a selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect executed by the advantageous suggestive effect executing means; and an effect for setting the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect based on the effect mode selected by the selecting means. A gaming machine J2 characterized by comprising mode setting means.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the advantageous suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode selected by the player, so that the advantageous suggesting effect can be executed in the effect mode desired by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine J2, the advantageous suggesting effect executed by the advantageous suggesting effect executing means notifies the operation timing of the operating means at predetermined intervals. , an interval setting means capable of setting a first interval and a second interval shorter than the first interval, wherein the selecting means selects at least the first A game machine J3 characterized in that it is possible to select a first effect mode corresponding to the interval and a second effect mode corresponding to the second interval.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by selecting the effect mode of the advantageous suggesting effect by the selection means, it is possible to change the length of the notification interval at which the operation timing of the operation means is notified. As a result, since the player can select an effect mode corresponding to the operation interval according to his or her skill, the player can actively participate in the effect using the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine J3 has display means for displaying the advantageous suggesting effect, and selection display control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of the effect modes selectable by the selection means as a selection screen, and the selection The game machine J4 is characterized in that the display control means causes the display means to display the notification intervals corresponding to the plurality of selectable presentation modes.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one effect mode can be selected by the selection means from among the plurality of effect modes displayed on the display means after grasping the reporting interval at which the operation timing of the operating means is reported. As a result, the player can easily select the effect mode in which the operation timing is notified at the intended notification interval, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided and the interest in the game can be enhanced. be.

In the game machine J4, the selection display control means displays frequency information indicating the number of times the operation timing of the operation means is notified, corresponding to the plurality of presentation modes. J5.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one effect mode can be selected by the selection means from among the plurality of effect modes displayed on the display means after grasping the number of times the operation means should be operated. As a result, when the number of operations is small, the notification interval at which the operation timing of the operation means is notified is shortened, and when the number of operations is high, the notification interval at which the operation timing of the operation means is notified is lengthened. It is possible to make it easier to select a combined presentation mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22b Second frame button (operation means)
64 1st ball entrance (ball entry means)
630 Specific General Entrance (Specific Entrance Means)
640 2nd ball entrance (ball entry means)
770 first storage device (storage means)
771 second storage device (storage means)
750 movable valve (variable means)
S1, S2 Storage determination means S1008 Storage control means S1009 Variable control means S2111 Effect execution means

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding game balls struck on a game board, and the game balls held in the holding device are made to flow down to a ball entrance by a player's releasing operation. Some have configurations. In this conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing for the game balls held in the holding device to flow down. This was intended to increase interest.

JP 2006-95235 A

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a game area in which balls can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing entering balls, and a game ball in which the game balls enter. specific ball entry means for giving advantageous benefits to the player based on the above, an operation means operable by the player, and a storage state in which the balls can be stored in the storage means based on the operation of the operation means. a storage control means for changing the storage state to a release state for releasing the storage state; and a second state in which it is difficult for the outflowing ball to enter the specific ball-entering means. and a control means.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the game area in which the ball can flow down, the storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entering ball, and the game based on the entering of the game ball. A specific ball entry means that gives a privilege advantageous to a player, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and the storage means is changed from a storage state in which balls can be stored to the storage state based on the operation of the operation means. and a first state in which a ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means. and a second state in which it is difficult for the outflowing ball to enter the specific ball-entering means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means in accordance with a predetermined variable pattern. have.

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is the front view which expanded the lower right area|region (III part in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in 1st Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the upper limit number of balls are stored in the storage device, and (b) is a state in which the first storage device is released and the movable valve is in an induction state ( FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where a projecting state is reached. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the first storage device is in the released state and the movable valve is in the restricted state (buried state), and (b) is a schematic diagram in which the first storage device is in the storage state. and is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the second storage device is in a released state. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the retention valve solenoid when the first retention device is in the release state and the second retention device is in the retention state; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the reservoir valve solenoid when the second reservoir is in the released state; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the operation of the second frame button (release button) and various devices. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing points for setting the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) in the timing effect (operation effect); FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during the advance notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and (b) is a timing effect (operation effect). FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents inside. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents during a timing effect (operation effect). (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the display contents during the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the variable display of the special symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content during the timing production|presentation (operation production|presentation) performed during the variable display of a special symbol. (a), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the big-hit confirmation display screen. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of setting the display position of the display pointer based on the timing at which a ball can be entered into a specific general entrance and music information executed in a timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content of the difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level to be executed in the first round of the jackpot game. 18A is a schematic diagram showing the shielding state of the cover member, and FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram showing the transmission state of the cover member. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a table for variable probability/working time, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a table for chance. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a movable valve operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a movable valve operation scenario table. It is the figure which showed the outline|summary of various counters. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the main controller; FIG. 2(a) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM within an audio ramp control device, and FIG. 3(b) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM within the audio ramp control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a movable valve operation scenario; 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a music information storage area; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the look-ahead process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing storage control processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is the flowchart which showed the storage valve operation|movement process performed by MPU in a main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing a movable valve control process executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flow chart showing a prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; Fig. 10 is a flow chart illustrating a movable valve state command process performed by the MPU within the audio ramp controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart illustrating reservoir related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the hit-related processing performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation processing during a jackpot performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing ball passage monitoring processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a storage state monitoring process executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing lamp output processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp controller; It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the timing production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot timing production preset process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a normal timing production executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing presetting processing; It is the flowchart which showed the timing production|presentation common setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the timing production|presentation correction|amendment process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flow chart showing a movable valve operation counter update process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 4 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; It is the front view which expanded the lower right area|region (III section in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic plan view of a first frame button and a second frame button, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an interlocking operation configuration of the first frame button and the second frame button. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the first frame button is pressed in the released state in which the interlocking means is buried; It is a schematic diagram showing a pressed state. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing display contents of a timing effect (operation effect) in the second embodiment; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a player operates a frame button unit, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a configuration of the frame button unit. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the frame button unit is operated (depressed) in a state where the pressing action of the second frame button of the frame button unit is restricted; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the frame button unit is operated (depressed) in a state where the depressing action of the second frame button is released; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in another example of each embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in another example of each embodiment.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 and 5 are schematic diagrams showing the ball flow inside the board unit 700, and FIG. 6 is a storage valve solenoid provided in the board unit 700. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device 65, etc. can be attached to and detached from the front side of the inner frame 12. is attached to the A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 19) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. A metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15. The front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 can be opened and closed by using the hinge 19 side as an opening/closing axis. A unit 15 is supported on the front side so that it can be opened and closed. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. . On the other hand, on the right side of the lower tray unit 15, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is provided. a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation, a push-button type stopping switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is detected by a change in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the configuration described above is used, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. may be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of game balls detected may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clearing is executed.

A first frame button (effect button) 22a is provided at the center of the lower plate unit 15, and a second frame button (release button) 22b is provided at the upper portion of the lower plate. The first frame button 22a is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later. It is operated by the player when releasing the storage state of the device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771). By arranging a plurality of frame buttons (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) that can be operated by the player at the center and left sides of the pachinko machine 10, The frame buttons can be easily operated even when the operating handle 51 provided is being operated (the player is operating the operating handle with the right hand).

In addition, a ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when the balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general ball entrance 63, a The first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are used for playing games. It is fixed by wood screws or the like from the front side of the board 13 . Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13, and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a starting port and the like are arranged and the shot ball is area). In addition, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 or the prize winning port (entering ball port).

In this pachinko machine 10, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (the left side when the game board 13 is viewed from the front) is formed as a left game area, and the right side is formed as a right game area. In the left-handed game), a game is performed in which a ball is entered into the general ball entrance 63 or the first ball entrance 64, and the ball is aimed at the right game area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). ), a game is played in which the shot ball passes above the variable display unit 80 and aims at the board unit 700 provided in the right game area. The pachinko machine 10 configured in this way prevents the game from becoming monotonous by allowing the player to play a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) according to the game state. A detailed description of each game state and the board unit 700 provided in the right game area will be given later.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 is continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 19) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a special symbol (first symbol) lottery is conducted, and the ball enters the through gate (normal When passing through the ball entrance) 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is a big hit. When it is done, the judgment of the jackpot type is also performed. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls are won). ) is opened, and the opening is repeated the number of times (the number of rounds) corresponding to the jackpot type. As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot types of special symbols, three types of "jackpot A" to "jackpot C" are provided, and after the special game state is finished, as an added value after the jackpot is finished, a game based on the result of the jackpot game (game value) is given to the player. The three types of "jackpots A to C" are determined when a jackpot is won in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is a type of jackpot to be obtained, and a lottery (hereinafter referred to as a first special symbol lottery) that is executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. and a lottery (hereinafter referred to as a lottery for the second special symbol) triggered by the entry of a ball, so that the ratio of selection when a big hit is won is different.

When the lottery for the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 90 seconds) has passed, the result of the lottery is displayed. A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each game is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is carried out. , the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, whether or not the normal symbol wins is determined. When the normal pattern hits, the second ball entrance 640 is opened by changing the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second). be released. It should be noted that normally, the second ball entrance 640 is closed because the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position. Therefore, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

In addition, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second or 30 seconds) has passed, the lottery is performed. A normal symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is changed to the first symbol. It is displayed by the display device 37 and is also indicated by the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of pending balls for the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and according to the lottery. variable display is started.

As described above, there are three types of special symbol jackpot types, "jackpot A" to "jackpot C". When "jackpot A" and "jackpot C" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16-round jackpot). On the other hand, when the "jackpot B" is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 8 rounds (8-round jackpot). In addition, when "jackpot B" and "jackpot C" are reached, the game shifts to a high-probability state (during probability variation of special symbols) in which the jackpot probability of special symbols increases after the completion of the jackpot. In the game state in which the high probability state of the special pattern is given, the probability of winning the normal pattern (second pattern) is also high and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is short, that is, the second ball entrance 640 is provided. A state (time-saving state) is also provided in which the electric accessory 640a is opened and the ball is easily entered into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加The high probability state and time saving state of this special pattern continue until the next big hit is won. On the other hand, when the "jackpot A" is reached, only the time-saving state described above is provided after the jackpot ends. In this case, the time-saving state continues from after the end of the jackpot until the variation of the special symbol ends 100 times (until the 101st variation starts).

Here, the "special symbol high probability state" means a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is up, the so-called "special symbol high probability state" (probability change state of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state It is a game state that easily shifts to (jackpot). On the other hand, if it is not a "special symbol high probability state", it is called a "special symbol low probability state", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of a special symbol, that is, the probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, "time saving state of normal design" (high probability state of normal design) means that the winning probability of normal design is increased and the fluctuation time of the second special design is shortened, and the lottery of the second special design is executed. It refers to the easy game state. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal design", it is called "normal state of normal design" (low probability state of normal design), which means that the probability of winning normal design is normal, that is, during time saving Indicates a low probability of winning.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the special symbol definite variable period. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of normal symbols after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as time-shortening of normal symbols.

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is varied according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common (for example, all 8 rounds) for all jackpot types. Further, for example, the period during which the "time-saving state of normal symbols" is changed may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the ``time-saving state of normal symbols'' is reached, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, or the electric accessory is released for one normal symbol. It is also possible to change the number of times. In addition, in this embodiment, the type of the jackpot determines the privilege to be given after the jackpot ends. You may make it give the probability variation state of a special design, or the time-saving state of a normal design. In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability variation state of the special design is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won, but like the time-saving state of the normal design, the number of special design fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is a predetermined number of times ( For example, 100 times), the probability change state of the special design continues only until it becomes, or the lottery that shifts (falls) from the probability change state of the special design to the normal state of the special design every time the fluctuation of the special design is started. The probability variation state of the special symbol may continue during the period until it is executed and the lottery is won. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time saving state of the normal design is given during the probability change state of the special design, but even during the probability change state of the special design, the game state (so-called latent state) that does not give the time saving state of the normal design Probability change state) may be provided.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the special symbol performed with the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or a ball entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters. The number of times is reserved up to four times for each ball entrance, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four. The number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, it may be set so that the total number of balls entered into a plurality of ball entrances is suspended until the number reaches the upper limit (for example, 8).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot, an error display, and the like. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicates the big hit if the big hit is a special symbol corresponding to the big hit A to D. (first pattern) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general ball entrances 63 through which a predetermined number (for example, five) of balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter the game area. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Also, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third pattern display device 81, or the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 8 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 8(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, and helmets that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is attached to the lower right side of the attached symbol in a small green color and displayed in front of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11) to be described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked. Also, when a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big winning moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big winning.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. A situation in which no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 even though the player continuously shoots the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) is rare. In most cases, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new ball entrance. Variation display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image. A third pattern is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with different types of special symbols (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) that are likely to be drawn according to the game state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed in the current gaming state is executed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed when a special symbol lottery that is difficult to be drawn in the current gaming state is executed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a total of three main patterns of the third pattern different from the main pattern displayed in the main display area Dm are displayed in the right small area Ds3. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy wearing a headband in this embodiment) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character performs a specific action. A notice effect is performed by appearing or the like.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display based on the first special symbol lottery is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and , When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is being performed, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is It is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and is also displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Specifically, the pattern displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 (first reserved ball number pattern) indicates the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64, and the pattern displayed in the lower half (second Retained ball number pattern) indicates the number of retained balls for the second ball entrance 640 . FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all second reserved symbols are blank).

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery is being executed as the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67. Or, as a stop pattern after the end of the variation, a normal pattern (second pattern) according to the lottery result of the normal pattern is indicated by the lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through either the left or right through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) of "○" is displayed. A variable display is performed in which the "x" pattern is alternately lit. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (“○” symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an actuated state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second ball inlet 640 is achieved. The number of times the ball passes through the through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed on the second symbol reservation lamp 84. Lights up. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of balls that pass through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times, as in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but is 3 times or less, or , 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 . When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. Also, the first ball entry hole 64 is also one of the winning holes through which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. This first ball entrance 64 is better when the ball is hit to the path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front (when a so-called left-handed game is played), when a right-handed game is played. It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball.

On the other hand, a board unit 700 is arranged below the right side area of the game board area. This board unit includes a through gate (ordinary ball entrance) 67, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a specific general ball entrance 630, and storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) are provided (see FIG. 3). A part of the board unit 700 is provided with a cover member 710 so that a specific channel (a channel through which the balls stored in the storage device flow down) in the board unit 700 is difficult to see from the outside. It is configured.

Here, the board unit 700 arranged in the lower right area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the lower right area of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the board unit 700 includes an inlet 700a that opens upward so that the balls that have flowed down the right game area of the game board 13 can flow in, and the ball that has flowed in from the inlet 700a. Among them, the ball that does not enter each ball entrance provided in the board unit (the specific general ball entrance 630, the second ball entrance 640, and the specific prize winning opening 65a) is discharged out of the board unit 700. It is a box-shaped unit body having an outlet 700b.

Inside the board unit 700, a through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 is provided below the inflow port 700a, and most of the balls that flow into the board unit 700 from the inflow port 700a pass through the through gate (normal ball entrance). mouth) 67. Under the through gate 67, an electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is arranged. A variable winnings device 65 and a base unit 760 are provided where possible. A specific general ball entrance 630 is provided at a position where a ball that has flowed down the storage channel 700e formed on the upper surface of the base unit 760 can enter. It is designed such that when a ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630, 15 prize balls, which are more than the general ball entrance, are paid out.

Next, various devices provided in the board unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, a first flow path 641b and a second flow path 642b are provided as flow paths for guiding balls to the second ball entrance 640. The first opening 641a and the second opening 642a for allowing the ball to flow into the second flow path 642b are in an open state in which the ball can be received, and in a closed state in which it is more difficult to receive the ball than in the open state. An electric accessory 640a is provided so as to be variable to .

In addition, when the electric accessory 640a is closed, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is formed so as to form a flow path through which a ball can flow down. They are configured to cover the second openings 642a on the downstream side. The electric accessory 640a is composed of a single plate-like member driven by drive means (solenoid, etc.) not shown. Both of the openings 642a are in the open state, and when they are changed to the closed state, both the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a are in the closed state. In addition, the upper flow path of the electric accessory 640a has a downward slope so that the lower left direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front is the downstream side. The second opening 642a is located downstream of the first opening 641a provided on the right side).

Next, the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 640a and the flow of the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 will be described by taking the time-saving state of normal symbols in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball inlet 640 as an example. In this pachinko machine 10, in the normal pattern time-saving state, the normal pattern variation time is set to 1 second (see FIG. 38), and the normal pattern (second pattern) win probability is set to 75%. Then, as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the operation of opening for 1 second→closing for 0.5 seconds→opening for 1 second is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640a has a stepped crank at the substantially central portion so that the downstream side covering the second opening 642a is lower than the upstream side covering the first opening 641a. It is configured such that it takes about 0.6 seconds for the ball to reach from the upstream portion covering the first opening 641a to the downstream portion covering the second opening 642a. By configuring in this way, when the ball flows into the board unit 700 and reaches the upstream side of the electric accessory 640a when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball flows directly into the first opening 641a. , the first flow path 641 b and the combined flow path 641 c to enter the second ball entrance 640 . On the other hand, when the ball reaches the upstream side of the electric accessory 640a and the electric accessory 640a is closed, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a flows down toward the downstream side (second opening 642a). Then, when the ball that has flowed down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the downstream side of the electric accessory 640a (the position that covers the second opening 642a) (that is, after flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, 0.0. 6 seconds later), the electric accessory 640a is performing the next opening operation, and the ball flows into the second opening 642a, passes through the second flow path 642b and the combined flow path 641c, and enters the second ball entrance. Enter 640.

In this way, there are a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 641b, second flow path 642b) that guide the ball to the second ball inlet 640, and each opening for allowing the ball to flow into the plurality of flow paths. Variable means (electric accessory 640a ) is provided, and each opening (first opening 641a, second opening 642a) for allowing balls to flow into a plurality of flow paths is arranged on the upstream side and downstream side of the flow path through which the balls can flow down. By disposing the variable means (electric accessory 640a) in the closed state, the ball that could not flow into the upstream opening (first opening 641a) is replaced with the downstream opening (second opening It becomes possible to flow in from the portion 642a).

In addition, the period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down from the upstream position where the electric accessory 640a covers the first opening 641a to the downstream position covering the second opening 642a is the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Since it is designed to be longer than the closing interval period (0.5 seconds) executed during the closing interval period, the first opening is performed at the timing of the closing interval period even though the electric accessory 640a is in the opening operation. Balls that have reached the portion 641a and failed to flow into the first opening 641a can be reliably flowed from the second opening 642a.

In addition, the period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down from the upstream position covering the first opening 641a to the downstream position covering the second opening 642a determines whether the electric accessory 640a is opened. Since it is designed to be longer than the normal pattern fluctuation time (0.5 seconds during time saving) for drawing lots, it reaches the first opening 641a during the normal pattern fluctuation, and the first opening Balls that could not flow into the portion 641a can flow from the second opening 642a when the lottery result of the normal symbol wins. Therefore, in a game state in which the electric accessory 640a is likely to be opened (time-saving state with normal symbols), the player can efficiently enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 simply by always playing the right-handed game. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the balls that flow in from the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 flow down toward the electric role product 640a. It is possible to guide the ball toward the upstream side of. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation where the ball that flows down the game board 13 directly falls to the downstream side of the electric accessory 640a and the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

Further, in the present embodiment, the time required for rolling from the position covering the first opening 641a to the position covering the second opening 642a is the interval period (0.5 seconds) during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. ) or about 0.6 seconds, which is longer than the variation time (0.5 seconds) of the normal symbol (second symbol). A ball fired in a right-handed game while the pattern (second pattern) is fluctuating can also be easily entered into the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the pachinko machine 10, balls entering from the first opening 641a enter the second opening 640 with priority over balls entering from the second opening 642a. is configured as To explain in detail, the spheres flowing in from the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a join together and flow down toward the second ball inlet 640, and flow from the first opening 641a to the confluence channel 641c. The first channel 641b through which the balls flow down is communicated in the vertical direction, and the second channel 642b through which the balls flowing in from the second opening 642a are communicated in the lateral direction. By configuring in this way, when a ball flowing down the first flow path 641b and a ball flowing down the second flow path 642b are generated at the same time, the first flow path 641b having a large kinetic energy (drop energy) is generated. The falling ball is preferentially guided to the second ball entrance 640 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down the first flow path 641b and the balls flowing down the second flow path 642b from clogging the combined flow path 641c. Further, the balls that have flowed in from the first opening 641a, into which more balls than the second opening 642a flow, can be smoothly entered into the second ball entrance 640. FIG.

The second flow path 642b, which is set to have a lower priority under the spherical flow than the first flow path 641b, has a length (35 mm in this embodiment) that can hold a plurality of spheres (three in this embodiment). , and is configured so as not to hinder the flow of the balls into the second opening 642a even if the balls flowing down the first flow path 641b are blocked.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, during the big win, the time-saving state of the normal symbols is reset, and the normal state is set. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball does not reach the variable winning device 65 provided below the electric accessory 640a. In order to prevent the situation described above, the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed, and the variable winning device 65 may be provided above the electric accessory 640a.

The variable prize winning device 65 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a in its substantially central portion. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

Next, the base unit 760 arranged inside the board unit 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the base unit 760 is disposed on the downstream side (outflow port 700b side) of the board unit 700, and the storage channel 700e is formed on the upper side, and the out channel 700f is formed on the lower side. is provided.

The base unit 760 is provided with a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771 as storage devices for storing balls flowing down the storage channel 700e. It is configured so that it can be stored. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 9, the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 are operated based on the second frame button (release button) 22b provided in the pachinko machine 10. It is controlled to change from a storage state in which the balls are stored to a release state in which the storage state of the balls is released with a predetermined time lag, and each time the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b, 1 It is configured to let the balls flow down one by one.

Further, on the storage channel 700e, there are a storage upper limit sensor S1 for detecting that the amount of stored balls has reached the upper limit, and a storage detection sensor S2 for detecting the presence or absence of a stored ball. is provided. Since each of these sensors is formed of a non-contact detection type proximity sensor that converts the existence information of a ball to be detected by electromagnetic induction into an electrical signal, the sensor will not be damaged by the passage of the ball.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and any configuration that can grasp the storage state of the balls on the storage channel 700e can be used. A proximity switch such as a photoelectric type or a magnetic type may be used, or a contact detection type switch such as a limit switch may be provided. Furthermore, in order to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e, a sensor for detecting the balls corresponding to each ball storage position (the position where the balls are stored shown in FIG. 3) is provided. Alternatively, a sensor may be provided so that the number of balls flowing into the storage channel 700e and the number of balls flowing out of the storage channel 700e can be counted. The number of stored balls may be grasped.

Furthermore, the base unit 760 has a guide position (protruding position) that guides the ball flowing out from the storage channel 700e to the specific general ball entrance 630, and a regulation position that restricts guidance to the specific general ball entrance 630. A movable valve 750 that can be changed between (buried position) and (buried position) is provided, and is variably controlled based on a predetermined operation pattern (operation scenario). A detailed description of the movement control of the movable valve 750 will be given later with reference to FIG.

In the portion of the board unit 700 covered with the cover member 710 (see FIG. 2), the cover member 710 is illuminated from the back side (the game board 13 side with respect to the cover member 710). Transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, which are light emitting means for irradiation, are provided. By irradiating the cover member 710 with light from the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the inside covered with the cover member 710 can be brought into a transmission state in which the player can visually recognize. Although the details will be described later, the transmitting lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from releasing the storage device while grasping the operation status of the movable valve 750 during the normal game in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Also, when the release operation of the storage device is performed and the ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is in a transparent state, so that the player can visually recognize the situation where the ball flows down near the movable valve 750. can be done.

In the pachinko machine 10 having the board unit 700 configured in this way, the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 enters the guided state (closed state) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general ball entrance 630. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b for changing the storage state of the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) to the released state, the storage device (first The ball stored in the storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 ) can be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 . Therefore, the player can play the game while timing the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Further, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the movable valve 750 is set to operate in various predetermined patterns. Most of this period is set as a period (0.1 seconds) in which only one ball can be guided. Therefore, since accuracy is required in the timing at which the ball stored in the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) can be guided to the specific general ball entrance 630, the player is more motivated. can be made to play.

In this embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the balls stored in the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) are released one by one. Since it is configured so that it can flow down toward the port 630, the period (0.1 seconds) in which only one ball can be guided continues as the period in which the movable valve 750 is in the guided state (closed state). is set, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at an appropriate timing, the All balls can be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 . Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game in order to obtain more prize balls. Details of the operation (operation pattern) of the movable valve 750 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 23. FIG.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the cover member 710 is provided as a shielding means for making it difficult for the player to grasp the operation status of the movable valve 750, the second frame button can be pressed while the player is aware of the operation status of the movable valve 750. It is possible to prevent the act of operating the (release button) 22b. In addition, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is a half mirror so that it is switched to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized based on a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down). Since it is configured, when the game ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 switches to the transparent state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow condition of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750 .

In this embodiment, the cover member 710, which is the shielding means, is switched to the transmission state by irradiating the light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. Well, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted to the cover member 710 from the light-emitting means (LED) that is always on is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position It may be configured to be in a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized only through the lens.

In addition, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (eg, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color that allows the inside to be seen, and the surface is processed to diffusely reflect the irradiated light (eg, , texturing) may be applied. As a result, while the game is being played in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a makes the inside of the cover member 710 difficult to see, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (i.e., the decorative The inside of the cover member 710 may be visible when the lamp 227a is not lit. As a result, the inside of the cover member 710 can be easily inspected by the store clerk even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall that shields the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a is provided, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielding state and a non-shielding state. should be provided. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 even while the game is being played. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light is provided, and light emission control is performed on the light emitting means, so that the inside of the cover member 710 can be illuminated. may be switched between a state in which it is difficult to see (light is illuminated) and a visible state (light is not illuminated).

Furthermore, by providing a decorative movable member on the cover member 710 whose interior is visible and controlling the movement of the movable member, the interior of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movement of the decorative movable member is small). state) and a state in which it is difficult to see the inside of the cover member 710 (a state in which the decorative movable member moves frequently).

Further, although the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10, in the present embodiment, the timing for releasing the second frame button (release button) 22b is set based on the operation of the movable valve 750, and the second frame button (release button) 22b is released. The three-symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is configured to perform effect display. As a result, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the player receives a privilege (a prize based on entering the specific general ball entrance 630). It is possible to provide a ball), and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Next, the flow of the balls launched into the right game area in the right-handed game in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the board unit 700 is arranged in the right side area of the pachinko machine 10, and by arranging nails provided above the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700, the right game area is hit by a right-handed game. Approximately 95% (95 out of 100 balls) of the balls hit into the board unit 700 flow into the inlet 700 a of the board unit 700 . Of the balls hit by the right-handed game, the balls that did not flow into the inlet 700a of the board unit 700 (about 5 out of 100 balls) are formed between the variable display unit 80 and the board unit 700. It flows down toward the out port 66 through the formed spherical flow path (see FIG. 2).

The flow of balls flowing into the inlet 700a of the board unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. Nails Qa and Qb are provided directly below the inlet 700a so that the balls that have flowed into the inlet are distributed to the left and right at a ratio of about 1:14. Balls distributed to the right side of nails Qa and Qb (approximately 90 balls out of 100 balls hit by a right-handed game) pass through the through gate 67, and then the upstream part of the electric accessory 640a (the first opening 641a covering position) and distributed to the left side of the nails Qa and Qb (about 5 out of 100 balls hit by the right-handed game) pass through the first guideway 700c and the electric accessory 640a. flow down to the downstream portion (second opening 642a). The nails Qa and Qb also serve as adjustable adjusting means, and even if the ratio of distributing the balls to the left and right changes due to collision of the balls or the like, the ratio can be adjusted to a desired ratio. In addition, as described above, the ball that has flowed down to the upstream portion (the position that covers the first opening 641a) of the electric accessory 640a can flow into the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a. Since it flows down above 640a, it is easier to enter the second ball entrance 640 than the ball that has flowed down to the downstream portion (second opening 642a) of the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, by adjusting the nails Qa and Qb, which are adjusting means, it is possible to adjust the rate at which the ball hit by the right-handed game enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁

The ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a flows into the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a and enters the second ball entrance 640 at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened. On the other hand, the balls that have not flowed into the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a flow down from the downstream end of the electric accessory 640a to the sorting channel 700d. In the distribution channel 700d, there are two directions in which the balls flow down toward the variable winning device 65 (lower right direction in the viewpoint of FIG. 3) and in the direction in which the balls flow down toward the base unit 760 (lower left direction in the viewpoint of FIG. 3). Nails Q1 to Q3 and a first adjustment member 701a for sorting are provided, and the balls that flowed into the sorting channel 700d (about 95 out of 100 balls hit by a right-handed game) are distributed at a ratio of 9:1. It is configured to distribute to the lower right direction and the lower left direction.

Then, the balls that flow down the distribution flow path 700d and are distributed in the direction of flowing down toward the base unit 760 (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3) (about 10 balls out of 100 balls hit by the right-handed game) Approximately 1/3 of the balls flow into the storage channel 700e, and the remaining approximately 2/3 of the balls flow into the out flow channel 700f.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that one out of every 30 balls hit by a right-handed game flows into the storage channel 700e. In other words, since the number of prize balls paid out to the player when the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 is 15 balls, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state. In the normal game state, which is not the jackpot game state in which the winning device 65 is opened, even if a game is played in which a ball is entered into the specific general ball entrance 630, the ball is not entered into the specific general ball entrance 630. Since the number of balls (approximately 30 balls) required to make a ball is greater than the number of prize balls (15 balls) paid out when the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630, the number of balls held does not increase. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent games in which a ball is entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 in a state where the contents of the operation of the movable valve 750 are illegally grasped in the normal game state or the movable valve 750 is broken down. .

In addition, in this embodiment, by using the board surface configuration described above, since the frequency of balls flowing into the storage channel 700e is suppressed, the large winning state in which the opening operation of the variable winning device 65 is performed, and the second winning state In the normal game state other than the time-saving state (time-saving state with normal symbols) in which the ball is likely to enter the ball opening 640, even if the right-handed game is played, the number of balls held does not increase, but the storage channel 700e. It is also possible to increase the frequency of balls entering into the specific general ball entrance 630 (the game of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b) in which the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630.

Even in such a case, since the movable valve 750 is covered with the cover member 710 as in the present embodiment, it is difficult to grasp the operation state of the movable valve 750, thereby increasing the number of balls held in the normal game state. can be suppressed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the ball flowing down the electric role product 640a in the closed state can flow into the storage channel 700e. In the time-saving state of the easy normal pattern, the balls are difficult to flow into the storage channel 700e. Therefore, it is possible to change the degree of expectation of the ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630 according to the game state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the balls flowing down the distribution channel 700d are configured to be distributed either in the lower right direction where the variable winning device 65 is arranged or in the lower left direction where the specific general ball entrance 630 is arranged. Therefore, even if the distribution ratio of the balls flowing down the distribution channel 700d varies depending on the individual difference of the pachinko machine 10 or the installation situation, it is possible to prevent the player from playing an extremely disadvantageous game. Furthermore, by varying the specifications (arrangement) of the nails Q1 to Q3 and the first adjustment member 701a provided in the distribution flow path 700d, the balls can be efficiently entered into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10. Game specifications for balls and game specifications that allow balls to easily enter the specific general ball entrance 630 during jackpot games (that is, balls are easily stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771)) can be provided to the player, and the player can select the pachinko machine 10 to play based on his/her own skill.

Next, the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) provided in the base unit 760, the operation of the movable valve 750, and the ball flow will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing a state in which five balls, which are the upper limit number, are stored on the storage channel 700e, and FIG. 4(b) is a first storage device. 770 is a released state and the movable valve 750 is a diagram schematically showing a case in which it is in an induced state (protruding state). FIG. FIG. 5(a) is a diagram schematically showing a case where the first storage device 770 is in the released state and the movable valve 750 is in the restricted state (recessed state). FIG. 5(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the first storage device 770 is in the storage state and the second storage device 771 is in the released state. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the operation mechanism of the first reservoir valve 770a of the first reservoir device 770 and the second reservoir valve 771a of the second reservoir device 771. FIG. It is a diagram showing the operation of the retention valve solenoid 770b when the first retention device 770 is in the released state and the second retention device 771 is in the retention state. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the operation of a reservoir valve solenoid 770b when a reservoir device 771 is in a released state;

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are provided so as to have a space between which one ball can be stored, and the storage device (the first storage device 770 and In the state of FIG. 4A where the upper limit number (five) of balls is stored in the second storage device 771), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) stores one ball, The second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is in a state of storing four balls. In such a state, the new spheres flowing down toward the storage channel 700e change their flowing direction by the spheres stored in the storage channel 700e. It flows down toward the channel 700f and flows out of the board unit 700 from the out channel 700f.

A first ball passage sensor S3 for detecting the passage of the ball is provided in the region where the ball flows down when the first reservoir valve 770a is released, and the first ball passage sensor S3 is provided. A second ball passing sensor S4 for detecting passage of a ball is provided in an area downstream of the area where the first ball passing sensor S3 is provided. In this embodiment, the first storage device 770 is in the released state based on the detection results of the first ball passage sensor S3 and the second ball passage sensor S4 and the command indicating that the ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630. It is configured to be able to measure the period from when the It is configured to be able to correct the content of the effect (the start timing of the effect, the effect period, and the content of the effect) executed after the state (after the first ball passing sensor S3 detects the ball passing).

Here, the ball flowing down the game area of the pachinko machine 10 has a specific section flow period depending on the installation state (inclination) of the pachinko machine 10, the outside air environment (temperature, humidity), and the dirt on the ball. different. Therefore, in the case of executing an effect for the falling ball, if a specific effect is executed based on a predetermined period of time, an error will occur between the result of the effect and the actual result of the falling ball. There was a problem that it would slip. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to correct the content of the presentation for the downward movement of the ball.

As a result, the second frame button (for releasing It is possible to correct the notification timing of the effect to notify the timing of operating the button 22b based on the actual ball flowing period, and to suppress the execution of the effect that gives the player a feeling of discomfort. .

In addition to the effect used in the present embodiment, for example, the ball passing through a predetermined position (for example, the first ball passing sensor S3) may cause the ball to move to a specific position (for example, a specific general entrance). 630) is executed for a predetermined period of time, and after that, in the case of executing a result effect showing the result of passing the ball, the period of the effect effect is changed to the ball passing period that actually requires. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

Specifically, in the case of executing an effect that satisfies the indicators set in multiple stages toward the final stage as the fanning effect, and executing an effect as to whether or not the final stage has been reached as the result effect, By differentiating the timing by satisfying each of the indicators set in stages or by varying the start timing of the fanning effect, the result effect is executed even though the fanning effect is in the middle stage, or the fanning effect is executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as waiting for the execution of the result presentation in the state of reaching the final stage of.

In addition to the above-described first ball passage sensor S3 or second ball passage sensor S4, detection results of the storage upper limit sensor S1 and the storage detection sensor S2 are used to detect It may be configured to determine whether or not a jamming or fraudulent act is being performed by

The first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a, which store balls on the storage channel 700e, press the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 1) provided on the pachinko machine 10. By operating (depressing) to drive the storage valve solenoid 770b (see FIG. 19), the balls stored in the storage channel 700e are controlled to flow down one by one. The details of the mechanism for operating the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a by driving the reservoir valve solenoid 770b (see FIG. 19) will be described later with reference to FIG. Details of the drive control contents of 770a and second storage valve 771a will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, when the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 1) is operated in the state shown in FIG. The ball stored between itself and the second storage valve 771a passes over the released first storage valve 770a and flows downstream (see FIG. 4(b)). Since the balls stored in the storage channel 700e are restricted from flowing downstream by the second storage valve 771a in the storage state, only one ball is released from the storage channel 700e. It will flow downstream.

Then, when the ball flows down from the storage channel 700e while the movable valve 750 is protruding (induction state), as shown in FIG. It flows down on 701b and enters the specific general ball entrance 630 (see FIG. 4(b)). On the other hand, when the ball flows down from the storage channel 700e while the movable valve 750 is buried (restricted state), as shown in FIG. It flows out of the board unit 700 from the outflow port 700b without balling.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player operates (presses) the operation means (the second frame button (release button) 22b) so that the storage of balls by the storage device can be released. , the player can determine the timing to release the storage of balls by the storage device. In addition, the movable valve 750 is configured to variably operate between a protruded state (allowed state) and a retracted state (restricted state) in a predetermined operation pattern. Therefore, whether or not the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 is determined based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means (the second frame button (release button) 22b). It is possible to operate the operation means willingly against the game, and it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

When the player operates (depresses) the second frame button (release button) 22b and the period in which the first reservoir valve 770a is in the released state passes a predetermined time (one second in this embodiment), the second The first reservoir valve 770a is closed, and the second reservoir valve 771a is released (see FIG. 5(b)). In this state, the ball stored in the storage channel 700e by the second storage valve 771a flows down to a position where it contacts the first storage valve 770a. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed (in this embodiment, 0.5 seconds after the second storage valve 771a is released), the second storage valve 771a is closed, and the state shown in FIG. 4(a) is reached. to move to.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 5B, the balls (four balls) stored in the storage channel 700e by the second storage valve 771a have flowed down to the state where they are stored by the first storage valve 770a. The second storage valve 771a is changed from the released state (buried state) to the closed state (projected state). Here, in the present embodiment, since the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are provided with an interval of one ball (about 11 mm), the second reservoir valve 771a It protrudes to a position between the most downstream ball and the second most downstream ball among the four balls stored (blocked) by the valve 770a. Therefore, the projecting operation of the second storage valve 771a can be executed smoothly.

In addition, the area where the balls are stored in the state where the second storage valve 771a protrudes in the storage channel 700e (that is, the position from the position where the second storage valve 771a projects to the upstream end of the storage channel 700e) ) is longer than the distance (approximately 47 mm) obtained by adding the thickness of the second reservoir valve 771a (in the horizontal direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 5(b)) (approximately 3 mm) to the four balls (approximately 44 mm). It is configured to be a distance shorter than five (about 55 mm) (50 mm in this embodiment).

With this configuration, when the second reservoir valve 771a protrudes, even if the ball retreats on the reservoir channel 700e by the thickness of the second reservoir valve 771a, it is stored in the reservoir channel 700e. It is possible to prevent the balls from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage channel 700e due to the projecting operation of the second storage valve 771a. In addition, it is possible to prevent the sixth ball from being stored in the storage channel 700e when the second storage valve 771a is released (the buried state). In order to prevent the balls stored in the storage channel 700e from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage channel 700e due to the operation of each storage valve, A step with a lower side may be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls stored in the storage channel 700e from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage channel 700e due to the operation of each storage valve.

Next, a reservoir valve solenoid 770b for electrically driving the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the positive direction, and FIG. 6(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown. In this embodiment, one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b) is used to variably operate a plurality of variable members (first reservoir valve 770a and second reservoir valve 771a). Specifically, reservoir valve solenoid 770b is a two-way holding self-holding solenoid.

This two-way hold type self-holding solenoid combines an open frame solenoid with a permanent magnet. By instantaneously energizing the coil, the plunger is attracted, and the position after attraction is held by the permanent magnet. A self-holding solenoid that does not require energization to maintain the state after attraction. Coils are provided in positive and negative directions around a permanent magnet, and each coil is energized to move the plunger in the positive or negative direction is attracted and the state after the attraction can be held using a permanent magnet. Thus, one solenoid can be used to hold three states: a state in which the plunger is attracted in the positive direction, a state in which the plunger is attracted in the negative direction, and an initial state in which the plunger is not attracted in either the positive or negative direction. can be done.

In the state in which the plunger is attracted in the positive direction by the reservoir valve solenoid 770b (the state in which the reservoir valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the positive direction), the first reservoir valve 770a is opened ( released), and the plunger is attracted in the negative direction (the reservoir valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction), the second reservoir valve 771a is opened ( released) state. In addition, when the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on neither positive nor negative (off state), both the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are varied to the closed (unreleased) state. It is configured as follows.

That is, as shown in FIG. 6(a), the first storage valve 770a and the storage valve solenoid 770b are combined by a first transmission means for transmitting the operation of the storage valve solenoid 770b to the first storage valve 770a. there is This first transmission means has three gears and is attached to the forward end of the plunger of the reservoir valve solenoid 770b. In addition, the second storage valve 771a has its distal end attached to the tip of the plunger on the negative direction side.

Here, when the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the forward direction, the gear provided in the first transmission means rotates according to the action of the plunger that is attracted in the forward direction, and the rotation result of the gear rotates. Accordingly, the first reservoir valve 770a provided on the terminal side of the first transmission means (the side connected to the first reservoir valve 770a) is variably operated to the released (open) state, and the second reservoir valve 771a is opened in the normal direction. According to the action of the plunger sucked to the side, the tip protrudes above the storage channel 700e and is variably operated to the closed (unreleased) state (see FIG. 6(a)).

On the other hand, when the reservoir valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction, the first reservoir valve 770a is closed (not released) based on the action of the plunger projecting in the negative direction, as shown in FIG. 6(b). state, and the second storage valve 771a is variably operated to the released (open) state. Although illustration is omitted, when the plunger of the reservoir valve solenoid 770b is not attracted in either the positive direction or the negative direction (normal state), both the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are closed ( It is variably operated so as to be in a non-released state.

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of variable members (the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a) are variably operated by only one electric drive source (the reservoir valve solenoid 770b). Therefore, the space for installing the electric driving source can be reduced, and the space saving of the device can be achieved. In addition, by making the device space-saving, it is possible to use the empty space to install decorative members and devices related to games, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the state of the reservoir valve solenoid 770b, both the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are not in the open (released) state. Even if it breaks down and malfunctions, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from continuing to pass through the storage channel 700e. In addition, since it is configured to variably operate only with one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b), when the balls stored in the storage channel 700e are made to flow down toward the specific general ball inlet 630 one by one Since the variable operation control is only executed for the reservoir valve solenoid 770b, compared with the case where variable operation control is executed for a plurality of electric drive sources (solenoids, etc.) load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, a plurality of variable members (the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a) are driven by a single electric drive source (the reservoir valve solenoid 770b) depending on the moving direction of a moving body (plunger). Although a configuration for variable operation is used, other configurations may be used as long as a plurality of variable members are variably operated using one electric drive source. A motor may be used, and a plurality of variable members may be variably operated at predetermined timings corresponding to the number of rotations (number of steps) of the motor.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is used in which a plurality of variable members (the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a) are variably operated by only one electric drive source (the reservoir valve solenoid 770b). An electric drive source may be provided for each variable member. In addition, in this embodiment, the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a have different configurations for variable operation, but the same variable operation configuration may be used as a matter of course. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball stored in the storage channel 700e is configured to flow down toward the specific general ball entrance 630 one by one. configuration may be used. For example, by continuously pressing the second frame button (release button) 22b for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are released (opened) at the same time. Motion control may be performed. As a result, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is normally operated, variable operation control is performed on each storage valve so that balls flow out one by one from the storage channel 700e. When the second frame button (release button) 22b is pressed for a long time, variable operation control is executed so that at least two balls stored in the storage channel 700e flow out. Therefore, it is possible to change the number or timing of the balls flowing out from the storage channel 700e depending on the player's operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, thereby motivating the player to play the game. can let

Next, referring to FIG. 9, the flow of the operation control of the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 and the opening/closing operation of the movable valve 750 when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. explain. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b and various devices.

As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated, first, the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 is variably controlled for one second to the release (open) state. and the state shown in FIG. 4B is obtained. In this state, the balls stored between the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a flow down from the storage channel 700e. Here, since it takes about 0.5 seconds for the ball flowing down to reach the movable valve 750 when the first storage valve 770a is released (opened), the first storage valve 770a is Whether or not the ball is guided to the specific general ball entrance 630 is determined by the operating state of the movable valve approximately 0.5 seconds after the release (open) state. In the operation example shown in FIG. 9, first, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to change the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state. After 5 seconds, the movable valve 750 is in an open state (restricted state) as shown in FIG. 9(d). 700 flows out of the board unit 700 from the outflow port 700b.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), once the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated, as shown in FIGS. 9(b) and (c), variable control is executed for a total of 2 seconds, Since the next operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b is not accepted while the variable control is being executed, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. When the variable control of each storage device is executed, an operation invalid period is set for about two seconds after which operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b is not accepted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the next variable control from being started while the variable control of each storage device is being executed.

When one second has passed since the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) was released (opened), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) is placed in a non-released (closed) state. 9 (b)), and after 0.5 seconds from that point, variable control is executed to change the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) to the release (open) state (FIG. 9(b)). 9(c)). Then, the release (open) state of the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is continued for 0.5 seconds from that point, and as shown in FIG. 5B described above, the second storage device 771 ( A period is provided to allow the ball stored by the second storage valve 771a) to flow down to a position where it contacts the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 (FIG. 9(c)).

In other words, in this embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, one ball is made to flow down toward the movable valve 750. button) 22b is configured so as to execute the release operation of the storage device only once every two seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, unless the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (depressed) with good timing, the ball cannot enter the specific general ball entrance 630, and the second frame button ( Operation accuracy of the release button 22b is required. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a timing effect (operation effect) suggesting the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the timing effect (operation effect), the ball can be easily entered into the specific general ball entrance 630. there is As a result, the player can be motivated to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b.

In FIG. 9, at the timing when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to change the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) again to the release (open) state, the operation timing of 0 After 5 seconds, the movable valve 750e is closed (induction), and the ball flowing down toward the movable valve 750 by this operation is guided to the specific general ball entrance 630 by the closed (induction) state of the movable valve 750. be done.

The movable valve 750 is constantly variably controlled according to a predetermined rule based on the pachinko machine 10 being powered on. As will be described later, the contents of this variable control are specified by combining a plurality of operation scenarios (see FIG. 23(a)) having different operation (variable) patterns. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b so that the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750, which is variably controlled based on the operation scenario, is in the closed (induced) state, , the ball is guided to a specific general entrance 630 .

Next, timing effects (operation effects) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 17. FIG. In this embodiment, the ball stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is directed toward the movable valve 750 based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. configured to flow down. Then, when the ball reaches the movable valve 750, when the movable valve 750 is in the open (restricted) state, the ball is restricted from entering the specific general ball entrance 630, and when it is in the closed (induction) state, , to guide the ball to enter the specific general ball entrance 630 .

A short period (for example, 0.1 second) is set for the period in which the movable valve 750 is in the closed (induced) state, and the player randomly operates the second frame button (release button) 22b. Even so, it is configured to make it difficult for the balls stored in the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 ) to enter the specific general ball entrance 630 . Here, in the present embodiment, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed as an effect for notifying the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. The player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) so that the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 efficiently. Become.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a method of setting the timing for the player to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b in the timing effect (operation effect) described above will be described. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing points for setting the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in the timing effect (operation effect). As described above, the movable valve 750 is configured to be constantly variably controlled according to a predetermined rule, and the storage channel is opened based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. A ball flowing down from 700e (see FIG. 3) toward movable valve 750 is configured to reach movable valve 750 after a period of about 0.5 seconds.

In this embodiment, the contents of the variable control of the movable valve 750 are read in advance, the point at which the movable valve 750 is closed (induction) is specified (FIG. 10(a)), and the downward flow period (0.5 seconds) from that point is determined. ) can be set as a possible ball entry timing at which the ball can be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 (FIG. 10(b)). By setting the timing at which a ball can be entered in this way and executing an effect for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the timing, the player can follow the effect being executed and execute the second frame button ( A ball can be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 simply by operating the release button) 22b. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect capable of awarding advantageous benefits (prize balls) to the player, and to motivate the player to participate in the game.

Also, the ball-enterable timing set as the ball-enterable timing for the specific general ball-entering port is 0.5 seconds before the timing at which the movable valve 750 is positioned in the induced state, as described above. Here, since the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state is mostly 0.1 seconds, the period during which the ball entry possible timing is set is longer than the time when the corresponding movable valve 750 starts operating. the previous period. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the timing effect executed based on the possible ball entry timing is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750 .

Further, in this embodiment, since the movable valve 750 is operated based on a plurality of operation scenarios, the interval at which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state varies. Therefore, even if the operation of the movable valve 750 executed before the operation of the movable valve 750 referred to when setting the possible entry timing coincides with the possible entry timing, The operation status of the movable valve 750 cannot be grasped based on this. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the timing effect executed based on the possible ball entry timing is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750 .

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to release (open) the first storage device 770, specifically, the first The transmission lamp 227b is turned on when the storage device 770 is released (opened) and the first ball passage sensor S3 detects a ball flowing out of the storage channel 700e. In other words, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the timing when a ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630, the ball flowing out from the storage channel 700e is the first ball. The inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible at the timing of passing the passage sensor S3 (timing 0.1 seconds after the second frame button 22b is operated). Here, since the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state is mostly 0.1 seconds, the timing at which the inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible is the movable valve 750 that is the target for setting the ball entry possible timing. This is the period before the operation of the valve 750 is started. Accordingly, the operation status of the movable valve 750 is not grasped based on the timing when the inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 17, which will be described later, as a timing effect (operation effect), the third pattern display device 81 displays a pointer that prompts the user to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b. is moved and displayed, and the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the timing when the display pointer reaches a specific position. An effect that matches the operation timing of is executed. Next, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) used in this embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 11(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during the advance notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed. b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during the timing effect (operation effect). In addition, in each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 and the operating conditions for the operation means (first frame button (production button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b) are shown. The display contents of the third pattern display device 81 that change based on the operation of the operating means will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams shown.

As shown in FIG. 11, the third symbol display device 81 displays a round number display section 714 for displaying the current number of rounds at the upper left of the screen, and the secondary display area Ds2 indicates the number of balls acquired during the big win. Acquisition display is executed, and in the sub-display area Ds3, a display of "Aim right" is displayed on the guidance display section for guiding the game method. Then, the winning number display mode 718 for suggesting the number of balls won based on the winning of balls in the specific winning hole 65a is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls in the specific winning hole 65a. This winning number display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball into the specific winning hole 65a, then moves toward the sub-display area Ds2, and finally, is displayed in the sub-display area. It is added as the winning indication of Ds2.

In the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) will start from the next round and a guide display for notifying the game nature of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. . At the bottom of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed. In this effect area, a left button display mode 715 with "left" corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b and "middle" corresponding to the first frame button (detail button) 22a are displayed. , and sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 in which display pointers 719 (see FIG. 11B) are displayed are provided corresponding to the respective button display modes. .

The secondary display areas Ds4 and Ds5 are areas in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled and displayed from right to left, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 11(b). By operating the operating means (the first frame button (effect button) 22a or the second frame button (release button) 22b) at a timing that matches the bar display portion 717, a success effect (described later in FIG. 11B )) is executed. Further, when the operation means is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display portion 717, a failure effect (see FIG. 12B, which will be described later) is executed.

The timing at which the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717 in the sub-display area Ds4 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b is the timing at which the ball can be entered as described above with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11(a), while the advance notice effect is being executed, the characters "waiting" are scrolled and displayed in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5 from right to left.

As described above, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the present embodiment, an effect is executed in which the player operates the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b. be. By constructing in this way, the number of times the player is made to operate the buttons can be increased, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced, compared with the case of executing the performance of operating only the second frame button (release button) 22b. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11(b), the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5. When the button 22b is operated, the characters "good" are displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b changes the display mode of the left button display mode 715. It is displayed by making it variable. In this case, as a timing effect (operation effect), since the second frame button 22b for releasing the storage device is operated at the timing when the ball can be entered, the ball flowing down from the storage device based on the operation is the specific general ball entrance. It will enter the ball at 630.

In the state shown in FIG. 12A, the display pointer 719c displayed in the sub-display area Ds5 corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a coincides with the bar display portion 717 and the first frame button (effect button) 22a is displayed. button) 22a is operated, and by operating the first frame button (button for presentation) 22a at this timing, a prize ball obtained by entering the specific general ball entrance 630 A specific acquisition number display mode 721 indicating the number is displayed, and the fact that the first frame button (button for effect) 22a has been operated is displayed by changing the display mode of the right button display mode 716 .

The state shown in FIG. 12B is a state in which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719h does not match the bar display portion 717 in the timing effect (operation effect). , the characters "bad" are displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b is displayed by changing the display mode of the left button display mode 715. be. In this case, as a timing effect (operation effect), the second frame button 22b for releasing the storage device is operated at a timing different from the timing at which the ball can be entered. The ball does not enter the general ball entrance 630.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the variable display of the special symbols will be described. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in FIG. 8B described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbols, the effect display similar to that during the big win is executed. In addition, regarding the display of the timing effect (operation effect), the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as during the big win, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 13(a), the display mode of "START" is scrolled and displayed in order to inform the player of the timing at which the timing effect (operation effect) is started. Then, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbols, as shown in FIG. Acquisition display ("15") indicating a privilege (prize ball) given to the player is executed, and a display pointer 719 (719k to 719p) is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4 or Ds5.

In the present embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect) executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is fluctuating, the display pointer scrolling in the sub-display area Ds4 (in the case of FIG. 14, the display pointer 719q 719t) coincides with the bar display portion 717, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, as shown in FIG. is configured as By configuring in this way, the second frame button (release button) 22b for releasing the storage state of the storage device can be used to notify the lottery result of the special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the display contents of the big win determination display screen for notifying that the third symbol display device 81 has won the big win as a special symbol lottery result will be described. FIG. 15(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination display screen displayed when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and FIG. C" is a schematic diagram showing an example of a big win determination display screen displayed when the big win is won.

Here, in this embodiment, as the operation patterns of the movable valve 750, an advantageous period during which an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous period. scenarios) are set (see FIG. 23(a), which will be described later), and the movable valve 750 is configured to execute a plurality of operation patterns (operation scenarios) in a predetermined order. (see FIG. 23(b), which will be described later). Furthermore, based on the operation status of the movable valve 750, the operation pattern (operation scenario) of the movable valve 750 to be executed in the future can be determined.

In this embodiment configured as described above, a period in which a jackpot game based on the jackpot is executed on the jackpot determination display screen that notifies the third pattern display device 81 that the lottery result of the special symbols has won the jackpot. Inside, it is possible to determine whether the movable valve 750 is variably operated in an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player, and to notify the result of the determination by the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the player can grasp that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game before the jackpot game is executed. A game can be made to be performed willingly.

In an example of the jackpot determination display screen shown in FIG. 15(a), the jackpot type "jackpot A" is won, that is, after the jackpot game, the 16-round jackpot that is not given a variable state after the jackpot game is won. is displayed, and the characters "chance" are displayed as a movable valve advantageous period notification mode 721 for notifying that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game. .

In addition, in an example of the jackpot determination display screen shown in FIG. 15(b), the jackpot type "jackpot C" is won, that is, the jackpot is won in 16 rounds in which the probability variable state is given after the jackpot game ends, and , the character "super" is displayed to indicate that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game.

In this way, in addition to the aspect of notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, the aspect of notifying the operation status of the movable valve 750 during the big win is notified on the big win confirmation display screen, thereby various patterns. It is possible to display the jackpot confirmation display mode.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, a method of setting an effect mode in the timing effect (operation effect) executed in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 16 schematically shows the content of setting the display position of the display pointer based on the timing at which the specific general ball entrance 630 can be entered and the music information executed in the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the present embodiment, information indicating the timing at which a ball can be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 described above with reference to FIG. The display position of the display pointer 719 (see FIG. 11B) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) is determined based on the difficulty level setting information for setting the difficulty level of the (operation effect).

In the present embodiment, a plurality of songs are configured to be usable in the timing effect (operation effect), and locations where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) are determined in advance for each song. This is for the purpose of operating the operation means at the timing that matches the rhythm of each song in the timing effect (operation effect). 719 is set, the operation means can be operated in accordance with the rhythm of the music being executed in the timing production (operation production), and the timing production (operation production) can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. can be executed.

16A and B shown in FIG. 16B differ in the number and spacing of locations where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (can be set). The place to be set is also different. Further, in the present embodiment, the difficulty level of the timing effect can be set, and when a high difficulty level is selected, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated in the timing effect (operation effect). Instead of setting the display position of the display pointer 719 to increase the number of times that the display position of the display pointer 719 that causes it to match the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630, the display pointer that causes the second frame button (release button) 22b to be operated The effect mode is set so that it is difficult to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b when the bar display portion 719 (see FIG. 11(b)) is aligned. On the other hand, when a low difficulty level is selected, the display position of the display pointer 719 for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is at the specific general entrance 630 compared to when a high difficulty level is selected. A state in which the display pointer 719 for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b matches the bar display portion 717 (see FIG. 11(b)) instead of setting the number of times matching with the possible timing to enter the ball to be small. , the presentation mode is set so that the second frame button (release button) 22b can be easily operated.

Specifically, when a low difficulty level is selected for song A, as shown in FIG. The number of times the ball can be entered into the mouth 630 is set to 2, and five display pointers 719 corresponding to the first frame buttons (effect buttons) 22a are set to be displayed.

On the other hand, when a high difficulty level is selected for song B, as shown in FIG. The number of times the ball can be entered is set to five times, and eight display pointers 719 corresponding to the first frame buttons (effect buttons) 22a are set to be displayed.

Furthermore, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, when a high difficulty level is selected, the display mode of the display pointer 719 displayed as a timing effect (operation effect) is higher than when a low difficulty level is selected. , a display mode is set in which timing is difficult to obtain.

In this way, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his or her own skill, and by varying the benefits to be given according to the difficulty level, various players can Therefore, the timing effect (operation effect) can be executed willingly.

In addition, the above-described content indicates both selection of music and selection of difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) executed in the present embodiment. is selected, the interval between the locations where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) differs between song A and song B. A player who selects A and wants to enjoy the timing performance (operation performance) at short intervals can select music B. As a result, it is possible to execute the timing performance (operation performance) desired by the player without changing the degree of difficulty, and to have various players willingly execute the timing performance (operation performance). can be done.

Furthermore, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed at short intervals, the balls stored in the storage channel 700e can be digested (outflow) in a short period of time, so the timing effect (operation effect) is executed at long intervals. than when the operation effect) is executed, the new ball can be stored in the storage channel 700e more easily (that is, the ball collides with the ball stored in the storage channel 700e, and the new ball It is possible to suppress the situation where the liquid does not flow into the storage channel 700e). As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630 through the timing effect (operation effect).

In the present embodiment, among the display pointers 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b set during the timing effect (operation effect), the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630 is displayed. Although the upper limit of the number of matching times is set to 5 times, a higher number of times (for example, 8 times) may be set. By configuring in this way, in addition to the balls (up to 5 balls) stored in the storage channel 700e when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, new balls are stored during the timing effect (operation effect). It is also possible to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b at the timing at which the ball that has flowed into the use channel 700e can enter the specific general ball entrance 630. Therefore, the player can actively play the game so that more balls flow into the storage channel 700e.

In the present embodiment, the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) at different intervals depending on the song, and the player selects a song so that the display pointer is displayed in a timing effect (operation effect). A configuration for narrowing or widening the display interval is used, but as a configuration other than that, selection means for selecting the display interval of the display pointer 719 executed by the timing effect (operation effect) for the player. A setting unit may be provided for setting the display position of the display pointer 719 based on the display interval of the display pointer 719 selected by the selection unit. A setting means for setting the display interval of the display pointer 719 may be provided. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to execute the timing performance (operation performance) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and to provide various players with motivation. A timing effect (operation effect) can be executed.

In this embodiment, a plurality of songs (song information) with different positions (intervals) where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) are stored. 719 may be configured to correspond to the movable valve closing timing of each scenario type of the movable valve 750 . As a result, the operation state of the movable valve 750 (that is, the scenario type to be executed) during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is determined, the scenario type is specified based on the determination result, and the specified scenario is determined. By executing the music corresponding to the type as a timing effect (operation effect), the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 can be easily matched with the position where the display pointer 719 of the music can be displayed. be able to. In this case, by setting the timing at which the scenario type of the movable valve 750 switches as the start timing of the timing effect (operation effect), the display location of the display pointer 719 displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) can be set more easily. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the content of the difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) will be described. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents of a difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level to be executed in the first round of the jackpot game. Among the elements displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the elements that are the same as those in FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, "ROUND 1" is displayed on the round display section 714, and a notification display for notifying that the difficulty level selection effect is being executed is displayed in the center of the screen. Then, a guidance display is executed to guide the method of selecting the difficulty level. In this guidance display, a button display 721 is displayed to indicate selection using the first frame button (effect button) 22a.

At the bottom of the screen, an arrow 722 indicating the currently selected difficulty level is displayed moving to positions indicating low difficulty and high difficulty every two seconds, and corresponding difficulty levels are displayed in the secondary display areas Ds4 and Ds5. A demonstration pointer 723 indicating the display mode of the display pointer 719 displayed when the degree is selected is scrolled and displayed.

Here, the demonstration pointers 723a to 723d when the high difficulty level displayed in the sub-display area Ds5 is selected with respect to the demonstration pointer 723 when the low difficulty level displayed in the sub-display area Ds4 is selected are displayed in the game. A display mode is set that makes it difficult for a person to operate at a specific timing. Specifically, the demonstration pointer 723a is displayed with an obstruction indicated by a star around the display pointer 719, the demonstration pointer 723b is displayed with the display pointer 719 reduced, and the demonstration pointer 723c is displayed with the display pointer 719 is displayed in an asymmetric display mode, and the demonstration pointer 723d is displayed at a position overlapping the display pointer 719 with an obstruction display for making the display pointer 719 difficult to see.

In this way, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his or her own skill, and by varying the benefits to be given according to the difficulty level, various players can Therefore, the timing effect (operation effect) can be executed willingly. The number of times (success times) that the player has operated the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) at appropriate timing in the timing effect (operation effect) is accumulated, and the number of successes increases. Based on this, the display mode of the display pointer 719 that is executed when the difficulty level is high may be changed to the display mode of the display pointer 719 that is executed when the difficulty level is low. In addition, when a low-difficulty timing effect (operation effect) is executed, a display pointer 719 matching the ball entry timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 is displayed according to the number of successes. may be configured to increase the frequency with which is displayed. As a result, the player can participate in the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the timing effect (operation effect), if the number of successful operations of the operating means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) at appropriate timing exceeds a predetermined number, A timing effect (operation effect) with a higher degree of difficulty and a greater benefit to be obtained may be selectable. As a result, it is possible to provide a selectable effect (super-difficulty effect) only when a predetermined effect condition (the number of successes reaches a predetermined number) is satisfied for the player. This allows the player to play the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is varied in the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the operation content (success count) of the player who executes the timing effect (operation effect). For example, an operation history of the player operating the first frame button 22a in an operation effect (for example, a mini game effect during a jackpot game or a ready-to-win effect during special symbol fluctuations) executed other than the timing effect (operation effect) Based on (the number of times of operation, the content of operation, and the result of operation), the timing effect (operation effect) may be made different. As a result, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in response to various operation effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, and to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. In addition, it is not limited to the operation result of the operation means (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b) by the player. It may be configured to switch the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the game period.

Next, referring to FIG. 18, regarding the contents of the transmission effect that changes the cover member 710 provided in the board unit 700 (see FIG. 2) from the shielding state in which the inside is difficult to see, to the transparent state in which the inside can be seen. explain. FIG. 18(a) is a schematic diagram showing a shielding state, and FIG. 18(b) is a schematic diagram showing a transmitting state. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in FIG. 4 described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 18( a ), the cover member 710 is attached so as to cover the entire downstream side (downstream side from the first storage valve 770 a ) area of the board unit 700 . It is attached so that the inside of the member 710 cannot be looked into. Even if an attempt is made to look into the inside of the cover member 710 from the side of the storage channel 700e, since the movable valve 750 is provided below the extending direction of the storage channel 700e, the movable state of the movable valve 750 can be visually recognized. It is configured in such a way that it cannot Furthermore, since the first storage valve 770a is positioned at the projecting position, it becomes more difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 from the storage channel 700e side. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the movable state of the movable valve 750 from being grasped when the cover member 710 is in a closed state in which the inside is difficult to see.

In the cover member 710 configured in this manner, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are lit when a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down) is established, and the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on. ), it is composed of a half-mirror so that it can be switched to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow condition of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750 .

In this embodiment, the cover member 710, which is the shielding means, is switched to the transmission state by irradiating the light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. Well, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted to the cover member 710 from the light-emitting means (LED) that is always on is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position It may be configured to be in a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized only through the lens.

In addition, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (eg, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color that allows the inside to be seen, and the surface is processed to diffusely reflect the irradiated light (eg, , texturing) may be applied. As a result, while the game is being played in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a makes the inside of the cover member 710 difficult to see, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (i.e., the decorative The inside of the cover member 710 may be visible when the lamp 227a is not lit. As a result, the inside of the cover member 710 can be easily inspected by the store clerk even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall that shields the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a is provided, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielding state and a non-shielding state. should be provided. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 even while the game is being played. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light is provided, and light emission control is performed on the light emitting means, so that the inside of the cover member 710 can be illuminated. may be switched between a state in which it is difficult to see (light is illuminated) and a visible state (light is not illuminated).

Furthermore, by providing a decorative movable member to the cover member 710 whose interior is visible and controlling the operation of the movable member, the interior of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the decorative movable member is the movable valve 750). and a state in which it is difficult to see the inside of the cover member 710 (a state in which the decorative movable member moves in an overlapping position so as to cover the movable valve 750). .

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18A, the cover member 710 covers the entire downstream side of the board unit 700, so that when the cover member 710 is in the closed state, the movable valve 750 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration that has the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the movable valve 750 in a normal game posture may be used. Just do it. For example, the cover member 710 may be configured with a size that covers only the movable valve 750 . As a result, a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the movable valve 750 can be constructed at low cost.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description continues. Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not win any winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out opening 66. - 特許庁The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 7, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 19). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 7, 122). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIG. 7, 122) is operated when the power is turned on to restore the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery of the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 24, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used in

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the selection of the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small win) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot pattern). 1st winning type counter C2 used for , stop type counter C3 used for selecting stop type, variation type counter CS1 used for selecting variation pattern, and initial value setting of 1st random number counter C1 A first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. A second winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In addition, a small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 42). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the winning to the first ball entrance 64 and each counter value for the winning to the second ball entrance 640. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage 203b is provided. In this embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each provided with a maximum of four reserved balls, so that a total of maximum eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a special symbol lottery period, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value changes to the special symbol. It is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and when the game ball wins the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are executed for this purpose. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. Various settings and control processing are executed.

On the other hand, during a period in which the special symbol lottery is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64. Alternatively, when the second ball entrance 640 is won, if the number of pending balls for the winning ball entrance (starting hole) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value acquisition is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning ball entrance. Also, if the number of pending balls for the winning ball entrance is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value etc. is not acquired and prize balls (5 in this embodiment) Prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of held balls is set to four for each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, but is not limited to this, and is less than four (for example, 3), or more than 4 (eg, 8). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not provide an upper limit.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 299. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 42).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and is the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is the first winning random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes a big hit defined in 202a, it is determined as a special symbol big win.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the game state is a low probability game state, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0" in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If the result is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of "1 to 4". If it is within the range of "1 to 4", it is determined to be a big hit.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big win is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. FIG. As described above, in the low-probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first winning random number counter C1 that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol. 202a. In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 300, the total number of random number numbers that result in a big win is 1, so the probability of a big win in the special symbol is "1/300". On the other hand, in the high-probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first winning random number counter C1 for the special symbol jackpot. 202a. In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 300, the total number of random number numbers that become a big hit is 4, so the probability of a special symbol big win is "1/75".

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 20(b)). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol is different from the symbol on which the ready-to-win is applied. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected, namely, "reach out" (for example, the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops and "complete loss" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) in which the reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment). It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203.

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in the variable probability state of special symbols, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, and "completely out of reach" is likely to be selected, and "out of reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, making it difficult to select "out of reach". In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. A low-probability table is selected, making it difficult to select "completely out of reach", and the range of random numbers corresponding to the "out of reach" stop type is widened to 80-99. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). One variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern selection table set by the variation type counter CS1. A variation time (dynamic display period) is set for this variation pattern, and the variation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the variation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 42), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 21 and 22) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is It is provided in the ROM 202 .

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 21(b) and 22). In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and for each variation pattern selection table for each success/failure determination result is set. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22 .

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal start opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired when it is detected, and stored in the normal pattern execution area of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning symbol is defined in the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 20) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is 2. If it matches the value of the random number that will be a win defined in the random number table 202c, it is determined that the win is a normal symbol (second symbol). For example, in the second winning random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal design is low (during the normal state of the normal design), there are 5 random numbers that become the normal design winning, and the range is "5 to 9". ing. Among the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, the total number of winning random numbers is 5, so the probability of winning a normal pattern when the probability of a normal pattern is low is "5". /240”.

On the other hand, when the probability of normal symbols is high (during the time-saving state of normal symbols), there are 200 random numbers that are normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 204". The total number of random numbers that can be obtained by the second winning random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random numbers that will be a win is 200. Therefore, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2". . As described above, in the present embodiment, the random number value for winning the normal symbols is greatly different between the low probability state of the normal symbols and the high probability state of the normal symbols, so that the winning probabilities are greatly different. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 in the case of winning the normal pattern are different between when the probability of the normal pattern is low and when the probability is high. . For this reason, the ease of entering the second ball entrance 640 is greatly different between the low probability state of normal symbols and the high probability state of normal symbols, so in the low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, A player can be made to play a game aiming at the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加

In the normal pattern low probability state, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal pattern variable display is displayed on the second pattern display device 83. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), and the second ball entrance 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance) 67 in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the second symbol display device 83 performs the variable display of the normal symbol for one second, and the acquired second random number. If the value of the counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is won, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). Along with being displayed, the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "1 second x 2 times". Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal electric accessory opening time, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

Normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially added by 1 in the range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a normal symbol variation pattern is selected based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the value of the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of 0 to 99 (that is, the entire range), and the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is selected.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 42).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 42) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. FIG. FIG. 20(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above-described first winning random number table 202a and second winning random number table 202c, a first winning type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, a movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e, At least a movable valve operation scenario table 202f is provided.

First, with reference to FIG.20(b), the detail of the 1st hit classification selection table 202b is demonstrated. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 20(b)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the first hit type counter C2 is determined. A value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 per one is selected.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), with respect to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", "jackpot A" is associated. are stipulated. This jackpot A has 16 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot A". ratio is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot A" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, and after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state of normal symbols is provided 100 times.

In addition, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 89" in association with "jackpot B". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot with 8 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 40 counter values are "jackpot B". ratio is 40% (40/100). This "jackpot B" is set to 8 rounds, which is a smaller number of rounds than the "jackpot A". It is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "jackpot A", but since the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won, the player wins from the start of one jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state. This is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "jackpot A" in terms of possible balls (expected balls).

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "90 to 99" in association with "jackpot C". This "jackpot C" is a jackpot with 16 rounds, like the "jackpot A". Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the first winning type counter C2, 10 counter values are the "jackpot C", so when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the "jackpot C" is determined. ratio is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot C" has a larger number of rounds than the "jackpot B", and is given a probability variable state after the jackpot is finished. Therefore, it becomes a jackpot type more advantageous than "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 49" in association with "jackpot A", and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in association with the "jackpot B" in the range of "50 to 59", and the "jackpot C" is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "60 to 99". are stipulated. In other words, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same ratio of benefits (time saving state or probability variable state of normal symbols) given after the end of the jackpot (1:1 ratio), but the number of rounds is 16 The ratio of giving the round jackpot is defined so that the second special symbol is larger.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the "jackpot C" is most advantageous to the player when the second special symbol lottery results in a big win as opposed to the case where the first special symbol lottery results in a big win. ” is configured to be more likely to be selected. Therefore, once the continuous mode (probability variable state of special symbols and time saving state of normal symbols) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is made by entering the ball into the second ball opening 640 by striking to the right. is likely to be executed and a big win is likely to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game with one purpose of shifting to the continuous mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202d defines random values for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 for determining the variation pattern (variation time) in the normal mode, a probability variation state, and a normal symbol time saving state (hereinafter referred to as Time saving table 202d2 for determining the variation pattern in the time saving state), and after the jackpot type "jackpot A" which is the jackpot type in which the time saving state is given 100 times after the jackpot ends, the special symbol fluctuation At least a chance table 202d3 for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the 90th to 110th times is included.

First, the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 21(b). FIG. 21(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table 202d1. As shown in FIG. 21(b), the normal table 202d1 is a random number (variation type counter value CS1 counter value) is defined.

In this embodiment, it is defined that a common variation pattern (variation time) is selected regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), specifically, complete as a stop type When a deviation is determined, a fluctuation pattern of short deviation (5 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 98" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and a long deviation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of "99 to 198". second) is associated with the variation pattern. In addition, when the special symbol lottery is lost and the stop reach is determined as the stop type, normal reach various types (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 159" as the value of the variation type counter CS1. 160 to 198” are associated with various types of super reach (60 seconds). In addition, when a special pattern lottery results in a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and super reach is associated with the range of "51 to 179". Various types (60 seconds) are associated, and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with various types of special reach (90 seconds).

Next, with reference to Fig.22 (a), the detail of table 202d2 for probability variation / time reduction contained in variation pattern selection table 202d is demonstrated. This table 202d2 for probability variation and time saving is a table used in order to determine a variation pattern in a probability variation state and a time saving state as above-mentioned.

In this probability variation/time reduction table 202d2, the same variation pattern (variation time) is determined when the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same stop type and the same value of the variation type counter CS1. configured to be Specifically, when the special symbol lottery is lost and complete loss is determined as the stop type, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190" Short loss (5 seconds) is associated. , "191 to 198" is associated with a long deviation (10 seconds). In this way, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, it is out by lottery of special symbols, and when complete outage is determined as the stop type, the ratio of short out is higher than in normal mode (normal state). . Thereby, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the variable probability state and the time saving state which are more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode (normal state).

In addition, if the special symbol lottery is lost and the reach out is determined as the stop type, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the whole range) Normal reach various (30 seconds) are associated. Also, in the lottery of the first special symbol, if it becomes a small hit, which is a kind of outlier, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the whole range) Super reach various (60 seconds ) are associated.

On the other hand, when a special pattern lottery results in a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and super reach is associated with the range of "51 to 179". Various types (60 seconds) are associated, and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with various types of special reach (90 seconds).

In this way, in the variable probability state and the time reduction state in which the variable probability / time reduction table 202d2 is set, unlike the normal mode (normal state), a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected as the selected variation pattern. Further, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to win a big win (for example, a big win C) more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol, is easily executed. As a result, by hitting the ball aiming at the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed efficiently. That is, it becomes an advantageous state in which the variable probability state is likely to be given when the jackpot is won. Therefore, the game can be played with a stronger expectation of a big win.

Next, details of the chance table 202d3 included in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 22(b). This table for chance 202d3, as described above, after the end of the jackpot executed when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the period in which the number of times the special symbol changes is a predetermined number (90 to 110 times after the end of the jackpot) It is a table in which fluctuation patterns (variation times) are defined. In other words, at the end of the time-saving state (90 to 100 times after the end of the jackpot), and from the time-saving state to the normal state It is a table used in the early stage (101 to 110 times after the end of the jackpot) after the game state shifts.

Specifically, when complete deviation is determined as the stop type, a short deviation (5 seconds) variation pattern is associated with the range of "0 to 98" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and "99 to The range of "150" is associated with the variation pattern of long-missing (10 seconds), and the range of "151-198" is associated with the variation pattern of chance-missing (50 seconds). Also, if the special symbol lottery is lost and the stop reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 150" as the value of the variation type counter CS1. 151 to 198” are associated with various types of chance reach (50 seconds). In addition, when a special pattern lottery results in a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 10" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and chance reach is associated with the range of "11 to 179". Various types (50 seconds) are associated, and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". That is, during the period in which the chance table 202d3 is referred to, it is set so that the rate of selecting the chance variation is the highest in the case of winning the jackpot. As a result, the variation display based on the chance variation is executed, so that the player can have an expectation of a big win and an expectation of entering the ball into the specific general ball entrance 630 .

As described above, the chance table 202d3 is configured so that a special variation type (chance variation type) with a variation time of 50 seconds can be selected regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery and the selection result of the stop type. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60, but when the ball is stored in the storage channel 700e with this chance variation type selected, the second frame button (release 22b is executed. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b in accordance with the operation timing suggested in this operation effect, the ball stored in the storage channel 700e is entered into the specific general ball entrance 630. It becomes possible to

By configuring in this way, the balls stored in the storage channel 700e (storage device) during the game state (probability variable state or time saving state) that can provide an advantageous right-handed game to the player are normally The release operation can be efficiently performed in the state. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected using the chance table 202d3 even during the period in which the right-handed game is executed (the final stage of the time-saving game). As a result, it is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the specific general ball entrance 630 even in a state where the remaining number of times of time saving is low and the expectation of winning a jackpot during a right-handed game is low. , the player can be motivated to play the game until the end of the time-saving state.

Furthermore, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the result of this lottery is notified by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b as an operation effect. By configuring in this way, the operation means (second frame button (release button) 22b) for canceling the storage state of the storage device is used to execute an effect that suggests (notifies) the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the period in which the chance table 202d3 is referenced is set to extend from the end of the time saving state to the beginning of the normal state. , time-saving remaining number of times 20 to 10 times), or when the number of lotteries of special symbols exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 600 times) without winning a big hit, etc. A variation pattern is set using the chance table 202d3. Alternatively, without providing the chance table 202d3 as in the present embodiment, in each variation pattern selection table used according to the game state, the predetermined value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the chance variation type. may be specified as follows.

Next, detailed contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e. This movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which an operation scenario used for operation control of the movable valve 750 is stored for each scenario type. are used, the movable valve 750 is operated in the scenario setting order set at the time of power-on processing.

Specifically, operation scenarios 1 to 5 are defined as scenario types in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e. The operation scenario 1 is set as the scenario content of "open 2 seconds→close 0.1 seconds (1 set)×15 times", and is an operation scenario for 31.5 seconds. In other words, the movable valve 750 is movable so that the period during which the falling ball can be guided to the specific general ball entrance 630 (the period during which the movable valve 750 is closed) is 0.1 second out of 2.1 seconds. This is the scenario that works. This "closed 0.1 second" is the period during which the ball reaches the movable valve 750 with good timing and is guided to the specific general ball entrance 630, and the variable operation for closing the movable valve 750 is performed. It is set as a period in which the ball reaches the movable valve 750 even if the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated after the player visually recognizes it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from operating the second frame button (release button) 22b while viewing the operating state of the movable valve 750. FIG.

The operation scenario 2 is set as the scenario content of "open 5 seconds -> close 0.1 seconds (1 set) x 6 times", and is an operation scenario for 30.6 seconds. In operation scenario 2, the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the open state (open) is set longer than in operation scenario 1 described above, and is an operation scenario that is more disadvantageous to the player than in operation scenario 1. Further, since the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the closed state (closed) is the same in the action scenario 1 and the action scenario 2, even if the player grasps the period during which the movable valve 750 is closed, the following It is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the movable valve 750 closes.

In operation scenario 3, "4 seconds open → ((0.1 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds opened) x 3) (1 set) x 6 times" is set as the scenario content, and the operation takes 29.4 seconds. It's a scenario. In this operation scenario 3, unlike the above-described operation scenarios 1 and 2, the period (0.1 seconds) in which the movable valve 750 is in the closed state (closed) is a short period (0.9 seconds) and is repeated several times ( 3 times) This is an operation scenario that is set, and is an operation scenario that makes it easy to guide the ball to the specific general ball entrance 630 .

The operation scenario 4 is set as the scenario content of "open 3 seconds→close 0.5 seconds (1 set)×9 times", and is an operation scenario for 31.5 seconds. In this operation scenario 4, the period during which the movable valve 750 is kept closed (closed) is set longer (0.5 seconds) than in the operation scenarios 1 to 3 described above. As a result, it is possible to widely set the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b for guiding the ball to the specific general ball entrance 630. FIG.

In this way, the operation contents of the movable valve 750, which are predetermined, are divided into operation periods that are advantageous to the player and operation periods that are disadvantageous to the player, and are stored. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the operation of the movable valve 750 that will be executed in the future is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario table 202f. In this movable valve operation scenario table 202f, setting order information for operating the movable valve 750 is added to each scenario type defined in a predetermined order. When the MPU of the main controller 110 executes the operation control of the movable valve 750, the information corresponding to the contents defined in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f is read out from the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e, and the movable valve 750 is moved. The valve 750 is actuated.

In this movable valve operation scenario table 202f, loop processing is executed so that the operation scenario corresponding to the setting order "1" is executed when the operation based on the operation scenario corresponding to the setting order "END" is completed. . In this embodiment, the set order is stored in advance in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f, but other configurations may be used. is provided as the operation start timing of the movable valve 750, the setting order is set to "1" for the scenario type determined at the operation start timing, and the setting order is given in ascending order thereafter. good too. As a result, it is possible to change the action scenario that is executed first when the action of the movable valve 750 is started, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the action of the movable valve 750 .

In addition, a plurality of operation scenarios defined in a predetermined order in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f can be looped and read, and the operation scenario read first (that is, the setting order "1" is set) By differentiating the position of the action scenario to be executed), it is possible to change the action scenario to be executed first when starting the action of the movable valve 750, making it difficult for the player to grasp the action of the movable valve 750. and, when viewed over a long period of time, provide fair variable motion of the movable valve 750 . In addition, it is possible to prevent the operation processing of the movable valve 750 from becoming complicated.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 25, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, variable probability flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, release flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, other memory area 203z have at least

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area), and each of these areas has a first per random number counter. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reservation area), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas. Each counter value obtained based on the start winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Since the counter value storage method and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Among the areas in which the data is stored, the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. A shift process is performed to move winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. It is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 34).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 34, S405 in FIG. 36 reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended in the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203d is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is affected by noise and the like, and the main control device Even if there is a deviation from the actual variable display of the number of held balls held in 110, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. It is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 34). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (see S1504 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1405 in FIG. 40).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding variable display in normal symbols M) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 39: No ).

The variable probability flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state of the special symbol (during the variable probability of the special symbol). When the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and when it is OFF, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. In this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game whose jackpot type is "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (see S1113 in FIG. 43). Further, the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the start of the big win is set (see S219 in FIG. 34). In addition, in the initialized state (that is, the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed), the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power cut occurs. In this case, the configuration is such that the state immediately before the power cutoff occurs is backed up.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining time period (variation number of special symbols) in the time saving state (time saving state) of normal symbols. The counter 203h during time saving is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is "jackpot A" (see S1112 in FIG. 43). That is, in the present embodiment, if the variable probability state is not set after the jackpot game, the time saving state is given 100 times.

The operation scenario storage area 203i is an area for reading and storing an operation scenario from the movable valve operation scenario table 202f when the operation control of the movable valve 750 (see S1009 in FIG. 46) is started. The operation of the movable valve 750 is controlled based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

The operation counter 203j is a counter used when executing the operation control of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771). Each time the storage valve operation process (see S1206 in FIG. 45) is executed, 1 is added (S1302), and operation control is executed based on the value of the counter.

The release flag 203k is a flag for determining that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. If it is ON, it means that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. , and if it is off, it indicates that the second frame button (release button) 22b is not operated. This release flag 203k is set to ON when it is determined that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 44) (S1202 in FIG. 44: Yes), The storage valve operating process (S1206 in FIG. 45) is executed by setting it to ON, and when the storage valve operating process (S1206 in FIG. 45) ends, it is set to OFF (see S1309 in FIG. 45).

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag that is set to ON in the prize winning process (see S1010 in FIG. (see S1504 in FIG. 47) is used to start counting of a remaining ball timer, which will be described later.

The remaining ball timer 203n is counted to identify the normal range in the prize winning process (see S1010 in FIG. 47) executed to determine whether the ball is normally entering the specific general ball entrance 630. timer. If the ball does not enter the specific general ball entrance 630 even when the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (value corresponding to one second), an error command is set.

The movable valve initial setting flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON in order to start controlling the operation of the movable valve 750, and is used to set the operation of the movable valve in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 41). It is set to ON when performing (see S914 in FIG. 41).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Returning to FIG. 19, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric function. The solenoid 209 consisting of a solenoid for driving an object, the storage valve solenoid 770b for driving the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a, and the movable valve 750 are protruded (allowed) or buried (restricted). The MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205 .

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasure switch (FIGS. 7 and 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, and a storage valve of the storage device. is connected to the second frame button (release button) 22b that is operated when releasing the 7, 122) Based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, and turns on and off the lamp display device 227 (a decorative lamp 227a, a transmission lamp 227b, other lamps 227c, etc.), and changes It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display effect (variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the first frame button (the effect button) 22a, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the first frame button (production button) 22a, and when the player operates the first frame button (production button) 22a, the third symbol display device 81 It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed in , or to change the content of the performance during super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. FIG. 26A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 26(a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a movable valve operation scenario 222b, a music information storage area 222c, and a ball entry timing setting table 222d.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 by the sound ramp control device 113. ) to determine more detailed variations. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes. Here, one variation mode out of a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation contents instructed by the main controller 110 .

The movable valve operation scenario 222b is provided so that the operation status of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled by the main controller 110 can also be grasped on the sound lamp controller 113 side, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. This area stores the information stored in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e and the movable valve operation scenario table 202f.

Here, the contents of the movable valve operation scenario 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario 222b. As shown in FIG. 27(a), in the movable valve operation scenario 222b, the same information as the movable valve operation scenario stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is associated with the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t, which will be described later. It is Furthermore, a scenario group is set for a plurality of consecutive scenario types. As a result, based on the movable valve state command output from the main controller 110 side, the sound lamp control device side can grasp the operating status (current operating status and future operating status) of the movable valve. A scenario group set for a plurality of consecutive scenario types is used to determine whether or not the operating state of the movable valve is advantageous to the player.

The music information storage area 222c is an area in which music information used for operation effects is stored, and is referred to when setting the display position of the effect pointer for the music used for the operation effects.

Here, the contents of the music information storage area 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the music information storage area 222c. As shown in FIG. 28, in the music information storage area 222c, there are music data 222c1 and tone range type data (tone range 1 data 222c2, tone range 2 data) set for each tone range type in which the tone range of the music data 222c1 is divided by a predetermined threshold value. 222c3) are stored.

The music data 222c1 is information (scale, tempo, etc.) related to music to be executed (reproduced) in the operation effect, and the range type data (tone range 1 data 222c2, tone range 2 data 222c3) based on this information is set. It is

The range type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data 222c3) is information set by dividing the music data 222c1 into a plurality of ranges (range 1 (high range) and range 2 (low range)). In this information, the position corresponding to the tempo of the music executed in the operation effect (the position where the note is written on the scale of the music data 222c1) is set as the effect pointer displayable area. In this way, by presetting the displayable area of the effect pointer used in the operation effect for the music data, when changing the display position of the effect pointer with respect to the operation effect, it is executed in the operation effect. A performance pointer can be displayed at a timing corresponding to (reproduced) music without a sense of incongruity.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, in the music that is executed (reproduced) in the operation effect, the number of notes written is different between the range 1 and the range 2. In 222c3, many effect pointer displayable areas are set. In other words, the tone range 1 data 222c2 has a wider interval than the tone range 2 data in which the displayable area of the effect pointer can be set. In this way, by making it possible to set the effect pointer displayable area for each sound range for the music to be executed (played) in the operation effect, it is possible to execute different operation effects using the same music. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data necessary for providing various operation effects to the player.

Furthermore, in the operation presentation, when using a configuration in which the player can select the interval at which the operation means (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) are operated, the sound range corresponding to the operation interval selected by the player The operation performance desired by the player can be executed only by executing the operation performance using the type data (sound range 1 data 222c2, sound range 2 data 222c3).

It should be noted that when creating a plurality of range type data from one song data in this way and executing an operation effect corresponding to the range type data selected from each range type data, the selected range type data A corresponding sound may be output when the operating means is operated. This makes it possible to give a sense of unity between the player's operation and the operation presentation when executing the operation presentation with different sound range types for one piece of music. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of range type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data 222c3) are stored for one tune data 222c1 in the tune information storage area 222c. In addition, for example, for one piece of music data 222c1, type data may be set for each of a plurality of musical instruments used, or type data may be set for each of a plurality of different tempos.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b). FIG. 26(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. The RAM 223 has a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223e, and a stop type selection. Flag 223f, production counter 223g, round number accumulation counter 223h, variable probability state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, ball passage flag 223n, release operation flag 223p , a release state flag 223q, an effect temporary storage area 223r, a movable valve state storage area 223s, a movable valve operation counter 223t, a movable valve initial flag 223u, a closing timing storage area 223v, and a timing effect setting flag 223w. , effect execution flag 223x, pressing period information storage area 223y, difficulty level storage area 223aa, difficulty level selection flag 223ab, ball passage information storage area 223ac, ball entry timing storage area 223ad, and other memory area 223z. and are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 50) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are variable effects (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), It is a counter that counts up to 4 times the number of suspended balls (number of standby times) of variable performance suspended in the main controller 110 for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b corresponds to the reserved ball number of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c corresponds to the second special symbol ( It corresponds to the number of pending balls of variable production based on the lottery of special symbol 2).

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 cannot get the value of Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. , the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is added to the number of pending balls in the variable display, or when the main controller 110 When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e Send the command to the audio ramp controller 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S2211 in FIG. 50). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. , while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used to display the reserved ball number symbols in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage, a display reserved ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, the second special symbol The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball patterns corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. while the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

When the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d receives a command set when the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 is increased or decreased, the value is increased or decreased according to the content of the received command. It is a counter used to synchronize the number of reserved balls of normal symbols managed by the main controller 110 side and the number of reserved balls of normal symbols managed by the sound lamp control device 113 side. be. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of normal symbol reserved balls. In addition, regarding the detailed contents of the case where the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the case where the above-mentioned special symbol reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 50), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S2702 in FIG. 55). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 49). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 50), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S2710 in FIG. 55). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated within the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by adding 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 49) is executed. . The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when a pattern of effect is determined by referring to a plurality of counter values in one loop process, different counter values are used. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used in a plurality of places, so that bias in the set effect pattern can be suppressed. It should be noted that the effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing different processing on the value obtained from the same counter. Specifically, among the production patterns, one selection refers to the ones digit of the acquired value, another selection refers to the tens digit of the acquired value, and another selection refers to the one digit of the acquired value. It is also possible to multiply the value obtained by multiplying the digits by 3 by the value obtained by multiplying the tens digits by 5, and refer to the ones digit of the obtained value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress bias in the set effect patterns while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect patterns.

The round number cumulative counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds during the jackpot game, and when a round number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, it is updated to a value corresponding to the command ( S2504 in FIG. 53), the value of the counter is reset to 0 in the jackpot ending effect process (S2513 in FIG. 53). In the sound lamp control device 113, a display round number command is set based on the round number accumulation counter 223h (S2611, S2614 in FIG. 54).

The variable probability state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a variable probability state of special symbols. If this probability variable state flag 223i is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is in a special symbol low probability state. This variable probability state flag 223i is updated according to the content of notification of the state command output from main controller 110. FIG. Depending on the state of the probability variation state flag 223i, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the probability variable state of the special symbol, or whether to display the right-handed warning image when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state. to determine whether

The time saving state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol time saving state. If this time saving state counter 223j is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal pattern time saving state, and if it is OFF, it indicates that it is in a normal state (low probability state) with normal patterns. This time-saving state counter 223j is updated according to the content of notification of the state command output from the main controller 110. FIG. Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current state is the time saving state of normal symbols, and the corresponding performance is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right hitting navigation image displayed in the time saving state of the normal symbol, or whether or not to display the right hitting warning image in the normal state.

The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining whether balls are stored in the storage channel 700e, and is set based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor S2 provided in the storage channel 700e. is done. When this storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that balls are stored in the storage channel 700e, and when it is off, it indicates that no balls are stored in the storage channel 700e. The storage state flag 223k is set to ON (see S2853 in FIG. 57) when it is determined that the storage detection sensor S2 detects a ball in the storage state monitoring process (see S2116 in FIG. 57). When it is determined that the sensor S2 has not detected a ball, it is set to OFF (S2855 in FIG. 57). Then, in the variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 55), when the variation pattern of the chance pattern is acquired (S2704 in FIG. 55: Yes), it is referred to (S2705 in FIG. 55). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to ON (S2705 in FIG. 55: Yes), an effect (see FIG. 13) for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed.

The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e has reached the upper limit number (five in this embodiment). The setting is made based on the detection result of the provided storage upper limit sensor S1. If the storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the upper limit number of balls is stored in the storage channel 700e, and if it is off, the upper limit number of balls is not stored in the storage channel 700e. indicates that The storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (see S2858 in FIG. 57) when it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects a ball in the storage state monitoring process (see S2116 in FIG. 57). When it is determined that the sensor S1 has not detected the ball, it is set to OFF (S2862 in FIG. 57). Then, during the jackpot production process (see S2504 in FIG. 54), when a predetermined round (7 or 15 rounds in this embodiment) is entered (S2605 in FIG. 54: yes), it is referred to (S2606 in FIG. 54). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (S2606 in FIG. 54: Yes), an effect (see FIG. 11) for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed.

The ball passing flag 223n is a flag for determining that the ball has passed through a predetermined area (the area where the first ball passing sensor S3 is provided) in the board unit 700. FIG. If the ball passing flag 223n is on, it indicates that the ball has passed through the predetermined area. 1 second) has elapsed). This ball passing flag 223n is set to ON when the first ball passing sensor S3 (see FIG. 3) detects the passing of a ball in the ball passing monitoring process (see S1815 in FIG. 56) (S2804 in FIG. 56). Similarly, in the ball passing monitoring process (see S1815 in FIG. 56), if a ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 within a predetermined period of time after the ball passing flag 223n is set to ON (SS2806 in FIG. 56: Yes), if the second ball passing sensor S4 has detected a ball (S2807 in FIG. 56: Yes), or if a predetermined period of time has passed (S2808 in FIG. 56: Yes), it is set to OFF ( S2813).

The release operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. If this release operation flag 223p is ON, it indicates that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the second frame button (release button) 22b has not been operated. indicate. This release operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S2219 in FIG. 50) when a release operation command is received (see S2218 in FIG. 50) in the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 50), and is set to ON (see S2219 in FIG. 50). In (see S2217 of FIG. 52), if a command indicating the closed (non-released) state is received (S2404 of FIG. 52: Yes), it is set to OFF (see S2406 of FIG. 52).

The release state flag 223q is a flag for determining whether or not the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is in an open (released) state. If this release state flag 223q is on, it indicates that the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is in the open (released) state. 770, indicating that the second storage device 771) is closed (unreleased). This release status flag 223q is stored in storage device related processing (see S2217 in FIG. 52) that is executed when a storage device related command is received (S2216 in FIG. 50: Yes) in the command determination processing (see S2113 in FIG. 50). is set to ON (see S2402 in FIG. 52) when an open state command (retention state command corresponding to the released state) is received (S2401 in FIG. 52: Yes), and the closed state command (retention state command status command) is received (S2404 in FIG. 52: Yes), it is set to OFF (see S2405 in FIG. 52). When the release state flag 223q is set to ON, the ball passing monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56) is executed, and the ball stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) flows downward. The situation is monitored.

The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the contents of the set effect until the effect is executed. During the period from the set timing (7th or 15th round) to the timing (8th or 16th round) of executing the timing performance (operation performance) during the jackpot, the contents of the timing performance (operation performance) are temporarily stored. . This effect temporary storage area 223r is stored in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62) when it is determined that the effect set this time is a timing effect (operation effect) to be executed during the jackpot (see FIG. 62). S3210: Yes), the set production mode is stored (see S3214 in FIG. 62), and in the jackpot medium production process (see S2504 in FIG. 54), the timing production (operation production) is executed in a round (8 or 16 rounds) ) is executed (S2609 in FIG. 54: Yes), it is read out (S2611 in FIG. 54).

The movable valve state storage area 223s is an area in which information for grasping the operation state of the movable valve 750 (see FIG. 3) on the sound lamp control device 113 side is stored. , the operation status of the movable valve 750 is updated as needed. This movable valve state storage area 223s stores the movable valve operation scenario 222b when the movable valve state information including the initial information is received (S2302 in FIG. 51: Yes) in the movable valve state command process (see S2215 in FIG. 51). is stored (see S2303 in FIG. 51), and the operation state of the movable valve 750 is updated based on the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t. Each time a movable valve state command is received from the main controller 110, it is determined whether the information stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s matches the contents of the movable valve state command (S2309 in FIG. 51). . Also, based on the information stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s, the movable valve closing timing is stored in the closing timing storage area (see S2306 in FIG. 51).

The movable valve operation counter 223t is a counter used for grasping the operation status of the movable valve 750 (see FIG. 3) on the sound lamp control device 113 side, and the movable valve operation stored in the movable valve status storage area 223s. It is for updating scenario information. This movable valve operation counter 223t is set to "1" when the movable valve operation scenario is set in the movable valve state storage area 223s (see S2303 in FIG. 51) in the movable valve state command process (see S2215 in FIG. 51). A value is set (S2304 in FIG. 51), and each time the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112 in FIG. 64) executed in the main process (see FIG. 49) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the value of the counter is changed. "1" is added (S3403 in FIG. 64). If the counter value has reached the upper limit, the counter value is set to "1" again (S3404 in FIG. 64). In this way, by updating the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t in the process (main process) that is periodically (1 ms) executed, the operating status of the movable valve 750 is appropriately managed on the sound lamp control device 113 side. be able to.

The movable valve initial flag 223u is a flag for determining that the pachinko machine 10 is in a state immediately after the power is turned on, and is a state in which the movable valve operation scenario is initially set in the movable valve state storage area 223s. It is used to determine whether If this movable valve initial flag 223u is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a state immediately after the power is turned on, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not immediately after the power is turned on. This movable valve initial flag 223u is set to ON (see S2013 in FIG. 48) in the start-up process (see FIG. 48) of the sound lamp control device 113, and is referenced in the movable valve state command process (see FIG. 51) (see FIG. 51 S2301), and after the movable valve operation scenario is set in the movable valve state storage area 223s, it is set to OFF (S2305 in FIG. 51). If the movable valve state command received from the main controller 110 does not include the first time information even though the movable valve first time flag 223u is set to ON, an error command is set (see FIG. 51). (see S2307 of ).

The closing timing storage area 223v is an area for storing the closing timing of the movable valve 750. Based on the information set in the movable valve state storage area 223s, the closing timing of the movable valve 750 (that is, the ball The timing of entering the specific general ball entrance 630) is stored. This closing timing storage area 223v receives the movable valve state command including the initial information from the main controller 110 (S2302 in FIG. 51: Yes) in the movable valve state command process (see S2215 in FIG. 51). When the movable valve operation scenario is set in the storage area 223s, the closing timing of the movable valve is calculated based on the movable valve operation scenario, and the calculated closing timing is stored (S2306 in FIG. 51). The closing timing stored in the closing timing storage area 223v is referred to when setting the effect pointer in the timing effect (operation effect).

The timing effect setting flag 223w is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a timing effect (operation effect) for causing the player to operate the operating means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). If it is ON, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing performance (operation performance) is satisfied, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing performance (operation performance) is not satisfied. In the present embodiment, as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), a specific variation pattern (chance variation type) is selected, and the ball is stored in the storage channel 700e, or A state is set in which a predetermined round (8R, 16R) during a jackpot game is started.

This timing effect setting flag 223w indicates that the variation pattern acquired in the variation display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 55) is a chance pattern (variation pattern indicating the type of chance variation) (S2704 in FIG. 55: Yes), and the stored state If it is determined that the flag 223k is on (S2705 in FIG. 55: Yes), it is set to on. Also, in the hit-related process (S2221 in FIG. 53), when an interval command indicating the end of 7 or 15 rounds is received (S2507 in FIG. 53: Yes) and it is determined that the upper limit flag 223m is ON ( S2508: Yes), it is set to ON.

When the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON, the timing effect (operation effect) is set in the timing effect setting process (see S2111 in FIG. 60) (see S3102 to S3105 in FIG. 60). Then, when the timing effect (operation effect) set this time is executed during the special symbol fluctuation, in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62), after setting the display timing effect command (See S3211 in FIG. 62), it is set to OFF (S3213 in FIG. 62), and if the timing effect (operation effect) set this time is to be executed during the jackpot game, the jackpot during effect processing (Fig. 54 S2504 reference), the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started (S2609 of FIG. 54: Yes), and after setting the display effect round command (see S2611 of FIG. 54), it is turned off. It is set (S2613 in FIG. 54).

The effect running flag 223x is a flag for determining whether a timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not being executed. This effect in-execution flag 223x is referred to when it is determined whether the operation to the operating means (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b) is based on the timing effect (operation effect). The effect executing flag 223x is set to ON (see S3212 in FIG. 62) after setting the display timing effect command (see S3211 in FIG. 62) in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62). ). In addition, in the production process during the jackpot (see S2504 in FIG. 54), a round in which the timing production (operation production) is executed is started (S2609 in FIG. 54: Yes), and after setting the display production round command (FIG. 54 (see S2611 of FIG. 54), it is set to ON (S2612612 of FIG. 54). Then, it is set to OFF when the set timing effect (operation effect) is completed.

The pressing period information storage area 223y stores operation means (first frame button 22a or second frame This is an area for storing the operation timing of the button 22b). In this pressing period information storage area 223y, a successful pressing period is set corresponding to the set display pointer (effect pointer, winning pointer) in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62) (see FIG. 62). S3209 reference). The successful pressing period set here is the timing at which the frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is pressed in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 59). (See S3005 and S3006 in FIG. 59).

The difficulty level storage area 223aa is an area for storing difficulty level information of the timing effect (operation effect) selected by the player. This difficulty level storage area 223aa stores the difficulty level information selected in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 59) (see S3012 in FIG. 59). The information stored in the difficulty level storage area 223aa is referred to when setting the effect mode of the corresponding timing effect (S3133 in FIG. 61(a)), and is cleared when the corresponding timing effect (operation effect) ends. be.

The difficulty level selection flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether or not an effect for selecting a difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed (whether the difficulty level can be selected). If it is OFF, it indicates that the timing is not selectable for the difficulty level. The difficulty level selection flag 223ab is referred to when determining whether the operation on the operation means (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b) is based on the effect of selecting the difficulty level. This difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON when it is determined that the first round has started (S2602 in FIG. 54: Yes) in the jackpot middle effect process (see S2504 in FIG. 54), and the first round ends. If it is determined that it is (S2602 in FIG. 54: No), it is set to OFF.

The ball passage information storage area 223ac is an area for storing information indicating the passage period until the ball stored in the storage channel 700e passes through the specific general ball entrance 630 or the outflow port 700b of the board unit 700. is. Based on the information indicating the passing period stored in the ball passing information storage area 223ac, the position where the pointer (effect pointer) is displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) is corrected. This ball passing information storage area 223ac stores information indicating the passing period calculated in the ball passing monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56) (S2812 in FIG. 56), and the timing effect correction process (see S3106 in FIG. 63). (See S3301 in FIG. 63). The ball passage information storage area 223ac is configured to be able to store a plurality of pieces of information (for example, 1000 times) indicating passage periods. Therefore, it is possible to correct the timing effect (operation effect) using the passage period calculated multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate timing effect (operation effect).

In the present embodiment, the ball passing information storage area 223ac is provided in the RAM 223. However, for example, the ball passing information storage area 223ac is provided in a recording medium capable of retaining information even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. You may

The ball entry timing storage area 223ad stores the ball entry timing set in the timing effect correction process (see S3106 in FIG. 63) based on the passage period calculated in the ball passage monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56). It is an area for Based on the ball-entering timing stored in the ball-entering timing storage area 223ad, the setting of the production mode (production pointer) of the timing production (operation production) is performed.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) executed after the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 65) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 32) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 67(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance are displayed. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image that displays the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 65).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a ``special pattern jackpot'', display a ``○'' pattern for a certain period after stopping the fluctuation production, and if it is a ``special pattern omission'', display an ``x'' pattern after the fluctuation production is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Also, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in the power-on varying image area 235b, and the power-on varying image is alternately displayed on the third pattern display device. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as indicated by 81 . As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of a ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 29, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main pattern (third pattern), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. Also, a right-hand navigation image (see FIG. 11(a)) and the like are stored in the back image area 235c as a back image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first pattern display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third pattern display device 81 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible.

In addition, in the third design area 235d, as the main designs to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main design consisting of the rear design such as a wooden box, and the rear design and characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of the accessory pattern imitating the . These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect was stopped. be done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol with no number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols with no numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

It should be noted that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. 233i, a stored image data determination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special game state and that the first specific prize winning port 65a and the second specific prize winning port 650a that are normally closed will be opened. The round effect is a effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is a effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state (big win state).

As described above, the demonstration effect is the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable effect was stopped. , the third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, round effect, ending effect and demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 31). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 31).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 31, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 31, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third pattern display device 81 . This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231 (see S5005 in FIG. 65). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S6605 in FIG. 76(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 67(b)). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 67B) and the simple display setting process (see S5308 in FIG. 67(b) S5309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 68 to 72) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 73 to 75) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 76A), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 76(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) is executed to transfer the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 32) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 67(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S6205 in FIG. 73) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 32), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Design 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Retained ball pattern 1, Retained ball number pattern 2, ..., Error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see (b )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S6207 in FIG. 73). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S5002 in FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6713 in FIG. 77). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S6714 in FIG. 77). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 78).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed (see S6802 in FIG. 78) each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 67B) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 33 to 47. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize-winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (300 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 300, 99, 239, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for performing display on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is opened as the ball passes through. A gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, respectively. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N2 of suspension of variable display in special symbols) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is obtained (S208), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , Set a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if it is determined that the variation time has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbols is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C is given.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot is B, the red LED is turned on. Also, if the jackpot is C, the red LED is lit, and if it is a loss, the green LED is lit. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), an opening scenario for a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). The opening scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a. That is, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have won), and in the 12th round, It indicates that the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened in a pattern (see FIG. 16) corresponding to the jackpot type. When the process of S218 is completed, the variable probability flag 203g is set to OFF (S219). Next, the time saving medium counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if the lottery result of this time is out (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (S222), and the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0 Yes) (S222: No), the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter 203h is 1 or more during time saving (S222: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203h during time saving (S223). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S224), and when it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S224: No), the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S224: Yes), the process proceeds to S221.

In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a "special symbol big hit" or "special symbol omission" lottery (determination of success or failure) is performed, and the first This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 .

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , and each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol jackpot is won is acquired from the first hit random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 10 random numbers defined in the first winning random number table 202a. As described above, 10 random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become the winning match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have a common determination value for a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 Different random values may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of determination values for the big hit, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 , the number of judgment values that result in a big hit may be varied. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player can win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the variable probability flag 203g is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state (low probability game state) with special symbols, Based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is obtained (S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. One of "200" is set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value for the special symbol jackpot. It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S305: Yes). , sets the display mode at the time of the big win indicating the big win (S306). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first winning type selection table 202b, and three types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot It is determined what kind of jackpot is A, jackpot B, and jackpot C).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

Variation patterns defined in this variation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, variation patterns for loss, such as "loss (for long time)", "loss (for short time)", "chance loss", "loss Various types of normal reach, various types of "missing super reach", and various types of "missing chance reach" are defined. In addition, as variation patterns for common use of jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared chance reach", and "shared special reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the processing of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, either reach out or complete out is set.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete out is set, if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear out is set, and "98 , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. to decide.

After the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 42). sent. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. , when there is a starting prize, various random number counters are acquired, and processing for holding the value is executed.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), special symbol 1 reserved The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is changed. , stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In addition, in the processing of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in each process of S407-S412, the same process as each process of S401-S406 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. FIG. Each of the processes of S407 to S412 is different only in that the process of holding the held ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are the same as those of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, when the processes of S407 to S412 are finished, the prefetch process is executed (S413), and this process is finished.

Next, referring to FIG. 37, the prefetching process (S413) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the starting winning process (see FIG. 36).

In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S501), and either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is If there is no new win (S501: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (S501: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of start of fluctuation is the probability variable state of special symbols. If it is determined (S502), and if it is a probability variable state of special symbols (S502: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the probability variable state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first winning random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is S505. to move to. In the processing of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the judgment results of the big hit, are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 38, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is accompanied by the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of normal symbols (S608), and if it is determined that it is in the time saving state of normal symbols (S608: Yes), Based on the value of the winning random number counter C4 and the second winning random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S609). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202c2 in FIG. 20(c)).

In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S608: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, so the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607. And, based on the second winning random number table for low probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 20(c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S609 or S610 is the normal symbol win (S611), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S611: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal pattern (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal pattern (S613: Yes), the electric role associated with the second ball entrance 640 The release period of the object 640a is set to 1 second and the number of times of release is set to 2 (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S613, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of openings is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S611, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S611: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S616). In the processing of S616, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S617, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal design (S617), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal design (S617: Yes), the variable display on the second design display device. is set to 1 second (S618), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S617: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this processing is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 1 second" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 .

In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second pattern display device is fluctuating (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the second pattern display device has passed ( S622). It should be noted that the variable time here is the time set in advance by the processing of S618 or S619 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S616, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. is set as When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S616.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, it is determined whether the result of the normal symbol lottery (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Determine (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process ends. When the start of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) is executed next, the opening and closing of the electric accessory is performed. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or S615 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) to determine whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variation display in normal symbols M) is obtained. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the free reservation area (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the first area (S705), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. to start NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). In this initialization process, for example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S910.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data has been destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1017 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S911, S912).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S911, S912) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the closing of the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a is set (S913). That is, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) is always closed (that is, the storage channel 700e (see FIG. 3) is closed. It is set so that it cannot pass through). As a result, in the state where the RAM 203 is initialized, the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) can always be in a constant state, and the specific general entrance 630 It is possible to create a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball. Therefore, it is possible to optimize the gaming state after the RAM 203 is initialized, and to prevent the act of initializing the RAM 203 and illegally storing balls in the specific general entrance 630 .

After completing the process of S912, next, the operation of the movable valve 750 is set (S914). In the process of S914, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p for starting the operation control of the movable valve 750 is set to ON. By setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON, the operation control of the movable valve 750 is performed in the movable valve control process (see S1009 in FIG. 42) of the main process (see FIG. 42) of the main controller 110, which will be described later. be started. In the present embodiment, the initial movable valve setting flag 203p is set to ON in the process of S914 of the start-up process. It may be configured such that the timing to be performed is different.

By configuring in this way, the timing at which the operation control of the movable valve is started can be varied each time the start-up process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation status of the movable valve 750 from being grasped based on the elapsed time since the pachinko machine 10 was powered on. Further, in the case of using a configuration in which the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON is different, for example, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to ON at the same timing. It is better to

As a method of varying the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON, for example, a delay timer is provided to delay the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON. It suffices to perform processing for executing a timer. The delay period set in the delay timer can be set by using the values of various counters provided in the main controller 110, by using information stored in a storage area updated as needed, or by lottery. A lottery means for determination may be provided. When the process of S914 is completed, the process proceeds to S915.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S915. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S915, a command (state command) for notifying the game state at the time of power return is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S915). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol probability variation state, whether or not the normal symbol time saving state, the number of times of normal symbol time saving, and the like. A state command is generated according to the value of the counter 203 h during time saving and the state of the probability variation flag 203 g and is output to the sound lamp control device 113 . By outputting this status command, the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can recognize the same game status. Therefore, even though the special symbols are in a low probability state, the right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5(a)) is displayed, or conversely, the player is in a definite variable state of the special symbols. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the display of the hitting right warning image (see FIG. 5B) when the player hits right. That is, it is possible to match the game state with the effect to be executed.

When the processing of S915 ends, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (S916). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S917), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the RAM 203 is not initialized, the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained. 770a, the second reservoir valve 771a) and the movable valve 750 are continuously controlled from the state before the power was turned off. Therefore, even if the power supply is temporarily turned off due to noise or the like, the game can be continued without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Note that when the start-up process is executed, the following control different from the present embodiment is performed as the operation control setting for the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) and the movable valve 750. may be executed. First, the start-up process is executed to determine whether the RAM 203 has been initialized or not. determine. This specifies which of the initialization state, the normal power-on state, and the abnormal power-on state is the state when the start-up process is executed.

In the case of an abnormal power-on state, it is a temporary power-off state (instantaneous power-off state) due to noise or the like. Execute control processing. Next, in the case of the normal power-on state, the same processing as the processing that is executed when the RAM 203 is initialized as described above in this embodiment is executed. Finally, in the initialization state, the storage device (the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a) is closed (that is, the ball cannot pass through the storage channel 700e (see FIG. 3). state), and the movable valve 750 is moved at a specific timing (for example, a delay period of 0 seconds) and at a specific position (for example, the position stored at the top) of the movable valve operation scenario table 202f. It is preferable to execute processing so that the motion control is started from .

As a result, in the abnormal power-on state, the game can be continued without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and in the normal power-on state, the movable valve is operated each time the start-up process is executed. The timing at which motion control is started can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation status of the movable valve 750 from being grasped based on the elapsed time since the pachinko machine 10 was powered on. Furthermore, in the case of the initialization state, the movable valve 750 is controlled by a specific operation content, so that it is possible to easily set the movable valve 750 to operate the same content for a plurality of pachinko machines 10. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) and the start winning process (see FIG. 36). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 43) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set according to the opening scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) for each round of the jackpot state. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The open/close control of the electric accessory is continued until the open time and the number of open times set in the process of S614 or S615 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first pattern display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) has ended, the first symbol display device 37 The variation display being executed is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 35). Display (lit display).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 or the process of S619 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 38), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the current variation display, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) ( display).

After executing the process of S1007, the storage control process is executed (S1008). This retention control process (S1008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, but it executes a process for setting opening and closing of the first retention valve 770a and the second retention valve 771a.

After the process of S1008 is finished, the movable valve control process is executed (S1009). This movable valve control process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. Execute processing to control to the released state. Next, when the process of S1009 ends, the winning process is executed (S1010). This winning process (S1010) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1010 ends, it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011). The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1012). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1012: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1012: No), the second main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1013, S1014).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (300 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1011, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S1011: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 40 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1015 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt process (S1015), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1016). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1017), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

The processing of S1011 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1010, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 42). is a process for opening or closing the

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1102), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 42). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1103). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1103: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is in progress by the processing of S1103 (S1103: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new round (S1104). Then, when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1104: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1107). Specifically, when a predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls (eg, 10 ) or more, it is determined that the closing condition is met.

In the process of S1107, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is closed (S1108), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening 65a is not met (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when the special game state (16 rounds or all 8 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1109: Yes), an ending command is set (S1110). The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 42). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

When the processing of S1110 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is jackpot A (S1111), and if jackpot A (S1111: Yes), after the jackpot A ends, the normal pattern time saving state is entered. In order to shift, 100 is set to the value of counter 203h during time saving (S1112), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot A (that is, the jackpot B or C) (S1111: No), after the jackpot B or C ends, the special symbol high probability state In order to make the transition, the variable probability flag 203g is set to ON (S1113), and the process ends.

Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this storage control process (S1008). This retention control process (S1008) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for setting opening and closing of the first retention valve 770a and the second retention valve 771a. As described above with reference to FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, a plurality of balls (upper limit of five) stored in the storage channel 700e are released one by one based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. The operation of the first reservoir valve 770a of the first reservoir device 770 and the second reservoir valve 771a of the second reservoir device 771 is controlled so as to flow down one by one. By configuring in this way, the balls stored in the storage channel 700e can be caused to flow down in accordance with the timing of the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b performed by the player. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 6, by driving one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b), the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are operated differently. It has a configuration to open (release) and close (non-release) at timing (predetermined timing). By configuring in this manner, the number of parts can be reduced compared to the case where each storage valve is provided with an electric drive source, and the cost and space of the device can be reduced.

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the release flag 203k is on (S1201), and if it is determined that the release flag 203s is not on (ie, off) (S1201: No), 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed (a state is set in which balls can be stored in the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771). It is determined whether or not the player is pressing (operating) the button 22b (S1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal has been detected.

In the processing of S1202, if it is determined that the depression (operation) of the second frame button (release button) 22b has not been detected (that is, the depression detection signal has not been detected) (S1202: No), the first In order to maintain the closed state of the storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the depression (operation) of the second frame button (release button) 22b has been detected (that is, the depression detection signal has been detected) (S1202: Yes), a release button operation command is set (S1203). ). Then, in order to indicate that opening of the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a has been set, the release flag 203k is set to ON (S1204), and the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are opened. A storage state command corresponding to the open state (released state) of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set in order to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the state (S1205), End this process.

The stored state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201, the It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the released state, it outputs to the display control device 114 a display back image change command for setting the back face type corresponding to the released state. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the small area Ds2 is set to display the characters "gate open". This allows the player to easily recognize that the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are in the open state.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the release flag 203k is ON (S1201: Yes), the storage valve operation process for setting the operations of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is executed. (S1206). The details of the storage valve operating process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S1206 ends, it is determined whether the release flag 203k is off (S1207), and if it is determined that the release flag 203k is not off (that is, it is on) (S1207: No), this process ends. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1207, when it is determined that the release flag 203k is ON (S1207: Yes), the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a are closed (the first reservoir 770 and the second reservoir valve 771a are closed). ball is stored in the storage device 771), the audio lamp control device 113 is notified that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set (S1208), and this process is terminated.

The stored state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201, the It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When receiving the stored state command corresponding to the closed state, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear face type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63(a), the small area Ds2 is set to display the characters "Press the button to open the gate!". This allows the player to easily recognize that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a can be set to the open state by pressing the second frame button (release button) 22b.

By executing this storage control process, the opening or closing of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a can be set according to the operation status of the second frame button (release button) 22b. As a result, by storing the ball above the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a at any timing of the player, the state where the ball enters the out port, the first storage device 770 and the second storage valve 771a are stored. It is possible to switch between a state in which a ball that has flowed (entered) into the second storage device 771 flows down toward the specific general ball entrance 630 .

Here, the storage valve operating process (S1206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this storage valve operating process (S1206). This storage valve operation process (S1206) is executed in the storage control process (see FIG. 44), and is a process for setting the operations of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a.

In the storage valve operation process, first, the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the forward direction (S1301), and the operation counter 203j is incremented by 1 (S1302). Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 250 (S1303). In the processing of S1303, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 250 (S1303: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to OFF (S1304), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1303 that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 250 (S1303: No), then it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 375 (S1305). In the processing of S1305, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 375 (S1305: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction (S1306), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the process of S1305 that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 375 (S1305: No), then it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 500 (S1307). In the process of S1307, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 500 (S1307: Yes), the reservoir valve solenoid 770b is set to OFF (S1306). Then, the release flag 203k is set to OFF (S1309), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1310), and this processing is terminated. Also, in the processing of S1307, if it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 500 (S1307: No), this processing ends.

Next, the movable valve control process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this movable valve control process (S1009). This movable valve control process (S1009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the movable valve 750. FIG.

In the movable valve control process, first, it is determined whether or not the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is on (S1201). Based on the valve operation scenario table 202f, the operation scenario is stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i (S1402). When the process of S1403 ends, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to OFF (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, if it is determined that the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1201: No), the processing of S1402 and S1403 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1404.

In the process of S1404, motion information is acquired from the motion scenario storage area 203i (S1404), and based on the acquired motion information, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new scenario type (S1405). When it is determined that it is time to start a new scenario type (S1405: Yes), a movable valve state command indicating the start of a new scenario type is set (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1407. This movable valve state command is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 42). Audio ramp controller 113 transmits the movable valve status command to display controller 114 as is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1405, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start a new scenario type (S1405: No), the process proceeds to S1407. In the process of S1407, based on the operation information acquired in the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not it is time to close the movable valve 750 (S1407). In the process of S1407, if it is determined that it is time to close the movable valve 750 (S1407: Yes), the movable valve solenoid 751 is turned on (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409.

On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that it is not the timing to close the movable valve 750 (S1407: No), the process proceeds to S1409. In the process of S1409, based on the operation information acquired in the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the movable valve 750 (S1409). In the process of S1409, when it is determined that it is time to open the movable valve 750 (S1409: Yes), the movable valve solenoid 751 is set to OFF (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411.

On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the movable valve 750 (S1409: No), the process proceeds to S1411. In the process of S1411, 1 is added to the operation counter 203j, and this process ends.

Next, the winning process (S1010) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this winning process (S1010). This winning process (S1010) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for performing control according to winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In the winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1501). If it is determined that the remaining balls timer flag 203m is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the release flag 203k is on (S1502). If it is determined that the release flag 203k is ON (S1502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the first ball passage sensor S3 has detected the passage of the game ball (S1503). When it is determined that the first ball passage sensor S3 has detected the passage of the game ball (S1503: Yes), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if it is determined that the release flag 203k is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1502: No), and in the process of S1503, the first ball passing sensor S3 detects the passage of the game ball. If it is determined that it has not (S1503: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to S1505.

When it is determined in S1501 that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is ON (S1501: Yes), and when the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON in S1504, the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a, the remaining ball timer 203n for timing the release period (open period) of the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a is updated by adding 1 (S1505). Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n after updating is the upper limit value (that is, whether one second has passed since the release of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a was set) (S1506). ), if it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (one second has not passed) (S1506: No), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 (S1507), When it is determined that the game ball has not entered the general ball entrance 630 (S1507: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S1507, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to S1508. On the other hand, in the process of S1506, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit (S1506: Yes), an error command is set (S1510), and the process proceeds to S1508. The error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 42). It is sent towards device 113 . When the error command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is set, and an error signal is set to be output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball from entering the specific general ball entrance 630 illegally.

In the process of S1508, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1508), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1509). After that, this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 63. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 48, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2120 (see FIG. 49) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 49, when the audio lamp controller 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 49), it executes power-off processing in S2120. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2120 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S2120. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to SS2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2120 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2120 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 49). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2120 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2120 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S2009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), an interrupt Permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2010 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010). Next, the variable probability state flag 223i is updated according to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2011), the interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main processing. By updating the variable probability state flag 223i based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main controller 110 and the game state recognized by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect according to the game state.

The reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process of S2008 is reached from S2004 via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2112 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S2113 command determination processing, S2114 variable display setting processing, S2115 ball passage monitoring processing, and S2116 retention state monitoring processing are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay. In addition, by executing the process of S2115 in a short cycle, it is possible to set the passing counter without delay based on the first ball passing sensor S3 and the second ball passing sensor S4, and the process of S2116 can be performed in a short cycle. By being executed, it is possible to set the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m without delay based on the storage state.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2116 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing, input is monitored as to whether or not the first frame button 22a operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and input of the first frame button 22a is confirmed. This is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case. In this process, when the player's operation of the first frame button 22a is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the first frame button 22a is set in the display control device 114. FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2109, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the processing of S2110 ends, timing effect setting processing is performed (S2111). Details of this timing effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the process of S2111 is finished, the movable valve operation counter update process is executed (S2112). This movable valve operation counter update process is a process for updating the movable valve operation counter based on the movable valve operation scenario. The details of this movable valve operation counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the movable valve operation counter update process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S2113). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In the process of S2114, a variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S2115. In the process of S2115, ball passing monitoring process is executed (S2115). In the ball passage monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this ball passage monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S2116. In the process of S2116, a storage state monitoring process is executed (S2116). In the storage state monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the storage state monitoring process is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S2117). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2117 (S2117: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2119), and the power-off processing is executed (S2120). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2121), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2117 (S2117: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2118), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2118: No), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2118: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. This process is for

In the command determination process (FIG. 50, S2113), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is determined. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2201). In addition, the variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and from the main controller 110, the selected variation pattern (variation time) is the first special symbol and the second special It is output corresponding to each of the patterns.

In the process of S2201, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the variation pattern type is determined from the received variation pattern command is extracted (S2203), and the process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so that the variation pattern type of the special symbol can be identified for each type of special symbol (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol). When notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later. (When setting the display variation pattern command of the special design) is used.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). If it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) is received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the type of the received command is set to ON (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to ON. Next, the stop type (completely off, out of reach, small hit, jackpot A to C) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and the process ends. The stop type extracted in the processing of S2206 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. Then, it is referred to when the later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) is executed, and is used to set a stop type command for display that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

In the process of S2204, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2207). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), the display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this processing ends.

Next, it is determined whether or not a pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S2209). If it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command (i.e., the number of holding balls for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is extracted. The counter value is updated (S2210), and this process ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value of is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning). Every time there is, by the processing of S2210, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 are set to special symbol 1 reserved of the main control device 110 It is possible to match the values of the ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Or even if the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e deviates, if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

Also, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2212). In the process of S2212, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2212: Yes), the winning information command reception process is executed (S2213). In this winning information command reception process (S2213), setting of various flags and setting of various counters to be referred to for setting various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 are performed. As a result, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, before the variation of the pending special symbol is started (that is, the special symbol executed before the target special symbol variation) During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect showing the lottery result of the special symbol for which the winning information command is transmitted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. Suggestion notification can be performed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2212 that the winning information command has not been received (S2212: No), it is determined whether or not the movable valve state command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2214). If it is determined that the movable valve state command has been received (S2214: Yes), the movable valve state command process is executed (S2215), and this process ends.

Here, referring to FIG. 51, the movable valve state command processing (S2215) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the movable valve state command process (S2215). This movable valve state command processing (S2215) is executed for the sound lamp controller 113 side to grasp the operating state (open, closed state) of the movable valve 750 controlled by the main controller 110. FIG. In this embodiment, the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores a movable valve operation scenario 222b that includes the same information as the operation information (operation scenario) for the main controller 110 to operate the movable valve 750. By synchronizing the progress of the operation information with the operation control of the main controller 110 , the sound lamp control device 113 side can grasp the future operation status of the movable valve 750 . As a result, the effect based on the opening timing and closing timing of the movable valve can be set and executed on the sound lamp control device 113 side. By executing an effect based on the opening timing and closing timing of the movable valve, it is possible to suggest the timing to operate (press) the second frame button 22b to the player.

When the movable valve state command process (S2215) is executed, first, it is determined whether the movable valve first time flag 223u is ON (S2301). If it is determined that the movable valve first time flag 223u is ON (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether the first time information is included in the movable valve state command received this time (S2302). That is, the movable valve state command received in the state where the movable valve initial flag 223u, which is set to ON when the power is turned ON, is set to ON is executed in the startup processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 41). It is determined whether the command is a movable valve state command including initial information indicating that the operation control of the movable valve 750 set in the operation setting of the movable valve (see S914 in FIG. 41) is started. In the processing of S2302, if it is determined that the first time information is included in the movable valve state command received this time (S2302: Yes), the content of the movable valve operation scenario 222b is set in the movable valve state storage area 223s (S2303 ), the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t is set to 1 (S2304), and the movable valve initial flag 223u is set to OFF (S2305).

Then, based on the movable valve operation scenario set in the movable valve state storage area 223s and the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t, the timing at which the movable valve 750 is closed is acquired. The acquired movable valve closing timing is stored in the closing timing storage area 223v (S2306), and this processing ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 has the same information as the operation scenario information used when the main control device 110 controls the operation of the movable valve 750, and the main control device 110 controls the operation of the movable valve 750. 750, information indicating the start (initial information) is transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113, and when the audio ramp control device 113 receives the initial information, the operation scenario of the movable valve 750 is set. The same information as the information is used to grasp the operation status of the movable valve 750 . The first time information set in the startup process of main controller 110 (see FIG. 41) includes the start timing of movable valve 750 and the type of operation scenario to be used. As other information, for example, when using a configuration in which the operation start timing of the movable valve 750 is different (delayed), the actual movable valve 750 is actually movable after the start-up process (see FIG. 41) of the main controller 110 is executed. Period information indicating a period until the operation of the valve 750 is started (that is, a delay period) may be included in the initial information.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the start point of the operation scenario is changed when the operation of the movable valve 750 is started, it is preferable to include information indicating the start point set this time in the initial information. Further, the initial information may include period scenario information indicating operation scenario information for a predetermined period after the operation of the movable valve 750 is started. As a result, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the initial information, it becomes possible to set the contents of the movable valve operation scenario 222b in the movable valve state storage area 223s based on the period scenario information for a predetermined period. Synchronization with the operation status of the movable valve 750 can be facilitated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2302 that the information received this time does not include the first time information (S2302: No), the main controller 110 start-up processing (see FIG. 41) and the sound lamp control device 113 are started. It is determined that the timing at which the process (see FIG. 48) is executed is different, an error command is set (S2307), and this process ends. When an error command is set here, a notice to the effect that the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again is made to the third symbol display device 81 based on the set error command. Then, by turning on the power again, the start-up processing of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 is executed again, and the normal state can be restored. If the error command is set even after the power is turned on again several times, it is determined that the start-up timing of the main controller 110 and the start-up timing of the sound lamp control device 113 are not normal timings. It may be configured to change the setting contents of the error command.

In the processing of S2301, if it is determined that the movable valve first time flag 223u is not ON (it is OFF) (S2301: No), the current operation status of the movable valve 750 updated by the sound lamp control device 113 as needed is read from the movable valve state storage area 223s (S2308), and compared with the movable valve state command received this time to determine whether the contents match (S2309). Here, if it is determined that the contents match (S2309: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the contents do not match (S2309: No), an error command indicating that the contents do not match is set (S2307), and this processing ends.

Here, if the information indicating the operating status of the movable valve does not match the movable valve status command received from the main controller 110 and the operating status of the movable valve status storage area 223s of the sound lamp controller 113, it means that they do not match. A storage means capable of storing the number of determinations may be provided, and an error command may be set when the number of times stored in the storage means is stored a predetermined number of times, more specifically, when the number of times is stored consecutively a predetermined number of times. As a result, it is possible to suppress the determination as an error of a case in which the content of the determination result does not match due to a sudden noise.

In this embodiment, the operation scenario used when controlling the operation of the movable valve 750 by the main controller 110 is configured by combining a plurality of scenario types for a predetermined period (approximately 30 seconds). is configured to transmit a movable valve state command at the timing of switching to a new scenario type. As a result, the total number of commands output from main controller 110 to sound lamp controller 113 can be reduced. In addition, when the sound lamp control device 113 is in a state where there is a possibility of executing an effect based on the operation status of the movable valve 750, that is, when the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern , when the chance table 202d3 is referred to, when a chance variation type is actually selected from the chance table 202d3, when a big win is started, etc., the movable valve state command is output. As a result, the total number of commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and effects that make the player feel uncomfortable can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 50, the description continues. In the processing of S2214, if it is determined that the movable valve state command has not been received (S2214: No), it is determined whether or not the storage device related command has been received (S2216). If it is determined in S2216 that a storage device-related command has been received (S2216: Yes), storage device-related processing is executed (S2217), and this processing ends.

Here, the storage device related processing (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing storage device related processing (S2217). This storage device related process (S2217) is the operation of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) executed based on the player's operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. This is a process for the audio lamp control device 113 to grasp the content.

When the storage device-related processing (S2217) is executed, first, the storage device-related command received this time indicates that the storage device is in an open (released) state (a state in which a ball can flow down the storage channel 700e (see FIG. 3)). (S2401). In the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the command indicates the open state (S2401: Yes), the release state flag 223q is set to ON (S2402), the release command for display is set (S2403), and this processing is executed. finish. The display release command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114, and when the storage device is released, a dedicated effect is executed. As this exclusive effect, for example, a suggestion mode suggesting a privilege (15 prize balls) given to the player when the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630, the suggested mode is changed to the confirmed mode, and when the ball does not enter the specific general ball entrance 630, the suggested mode is changed. A disappearing effect is executed.

In the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the storage device-related command received this time is not a command indicating an open state (S2401: No), it is determined whether the storage device-related command received this time is a command indicating a closed state. (S2404), if the command indicates the closed state (S2404; Yes), the release state flag 223q is set to OFF (S2405), the release operation flag 223p is set to OFF (S2406), and the non-release for display is set. A command is set (S2407), and this processing ends.

In this embodiment, the non-released state in which the balls are stored in the storage channel 700e and the released state in which the balls can flow down in the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) are divided into the first It is made variable by controlling the operation of the storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a (see FIG. 9). Since this operation control is a control for varying the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a in a preset order, after receiving a command indicating a release (open) state in which the ball can flow down, There is a fixed period (1 second) before receiving a command indicating a non-released (closed) state in which the ball is parked. Therefore, in the storage device-related processing (S2217), a measuring means is provided for measuring the period from the reception of the command indicating the open (released) state, and the measuring means measures the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, one second). It may also be configured to set an error command if no command is received indicating a closed (non-released) state. As a result, it is possible to immediately determine that the status of the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) whose operation is being controlled by the main controller 110 is not normal.

Returning to FIG. 50, the description continues. If it is determined in the processing of S2216 that the storage device related command has not been received (S2216: No), then it is determined whether or not the release operation command has been received (S2218). In the process of S2218, if it is determined that the release operation command has been received (S2218: Yes), the release operation flag 223p is set to ON (S2219), and this process ends. This release operation command is a command output when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the release operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command has been received (S2220).

In the process of S2220, if it is determined that the win-related command has been received (S2220: Yes), the win-related process is executed (S2221), and this process ends. Details of the win-related process (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S2220, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S2220: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S2222), and this processing ends.

In the process of S2222, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is processed. to the display control device 114. For example, a ball entry command set based on the entry of a ball into each ball entry hole provided on the game board 13 is received, a process of accumulating the number of balls entered for each type of entrance into which the ball entered is executed.

Next, the hit-related processing (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the win-related processing (S2221). This hit-related process (S2221) is a process executed during the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 560) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This process is executed when a hit-related command is received from the device 110 .

When the winning related process (S2221) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot opening command is received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then the display opening command is set (S2502), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that the opening command has not been received (S2501: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2503). In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2503: Yes), the round number cumulative counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the jackpot middle effect process is executed ( S2505), the process ends.

Here, the effect processing (S2505) during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the effect processing (S2505) during the big hit. In this jackpot middle effect processing (S2505), as effects to be executed during the big win, in addition to the jackpot game effect for congratulating the big win, an operation effect ( A timing effect) and a difficulty level selection effect for allowing the player to select the difficulty level of the operation effect (timing effect) are set, and each effect is executed.

When the big hit production process (S2505) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the production execution flag 223x is ON. If it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is not on (is off) (S2601: No), then it is determined whether the round number command received this time is the round number command indicating the first round of the jackpot. (S2602). In the process of S2602, if it is determined that the command is the number of rounds command indicating the first round (S2602: Yes), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON (S2603), and this process ends. By setting the difficulty level selection flag 223ab to ON here, based on the operation signal of the frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) operated while the first round of the jackpot is being executed The process of selecting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S2107 in FIG. 59), which will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2602, if it is determined that the command is not the number of rounds indicating the first round (S2602: No), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to OFF (S2604), and then the number of rounds received this time is It is determined whether the command is the 7th round or the 15th round of the jackpot (S2605). In the processing of S2605, if it is determined that the command is the number of rounds indicating the 7th or 15th round (S2605: Yes), it is determined whether the upper limit flag 223m is ON (S2606), and the upper limit flag 223m is determined. is on (S2606: Yes), since the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is established, the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (S2607), and the forewarning round command for display is set (S2608), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2605, if it is determined that the number of rounds command received this time is not the 7th or 15th round of the jackpot (S2605: No), or in the processing of S2606, the storage upper limit flag 223m is not ON If so (S2606: No), the timing effect (operation effect) is not executable, so the process proceeds to S2609 without setting the timing effect setting flag 223w to ON.

In the processing of S2609, it is determined whether the round number command received this time is the 8th or 16th round of the jackpot (S2609), and if it is determined that it is the 8th or 16th round (S2609: Yes) , determines whether the timing effect setting flag 223w is ON (S2610). That is, whether the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON in the round (7th round or 15th round) immediately before the 8th round or 16th round received this time (timing effect (operation effect) can be executed) condition is met). In the processing of S2610, if the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (S2610: Yes), next, the timing effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and the display effect round command is set (S2611). ). Then, the effect executing flag 223x is set to ON (S2612), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to OFF (S2613), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S2611, the read timing effect information is set in the timing effect setting process (see S2111 in FIG. 60), which will be described later, based on the fact that the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON. There is, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S2609, if it is determined that the number of rounds command received this time is not the 8th or 16th round of the jackpot (S2609: No), or in the process of S2610, the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON. If it is determined that it is not (set to OFF), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2614), and this process is terminated.

Various display round number commands set here are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 and are , is transmitted to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives various display round number commands, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Thus, in this embodiment, the current round number is determined by the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. A configuration other than this may be used. For example, by including information indicating the current round number in the round number command, the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h may be eliminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, the first round (first round) is performed to select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) that is executed during the jackpot. (See FIG. 17). Furthermore, the condition (storage channel 700e (see FIG. 3) that the maximum amount of balls is stored) is established, and if the condition is satisfied, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the next round. is executed (see FIG. 11(a)). Then, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 11(b)).

In this way, since the notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the player is made to operate the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). It is possible to inform in advance that the performance will be executed. In addition, in the round in which the notice effect is executed, it is determined that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and the notice effect is executed only when the condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the problem that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the advance notice effect is executed.

Furthermore, since the fact that the upper limit number of balls is stored in the storage channel 700e is set as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the effect used as the timing effect (operation effect) is can be fixed to the effect using five, and the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced. In addition, the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not limited to this, and may be a condition that a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls are stored, or a ball is stored in the storage channel 700e. The timing effect (operation effect) may be executed regardless of whether or not is stored. Also, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e may be discriminated, and the presentation mode of the timing effect (operation effect) may be changed based on the determination result. Specifically, the number of times the second frame button (release button) 22b for changing the storage channel 700e to the released state is operated corresponds to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e. It may be changed, and regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e, a specific timing effect (operation effect), that is, the number of operations of the second frame button (release button) 22b is fixed. It may be configured to execute a timing effect (operation effect).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect), the player can select the timing effect (operation effect) effect mode according to his/her skill. can be set, the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured such that the advance notice effect is executed when the conditions for executing the timing effect (operation effect) are satisfied. That is, the fact that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is established is suggested to the player based on the execution of the advance notice effect, but other configurations may be used. For example, the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of balls stored in the storage channel 700e and the number of stored balls required for executing the timing effect (operation effect), and , an effect prompting to store balls in the storage channel 700e may be executed. As a result, the player can play the game of storing the balls in the storage channel 700e in addition to the game of winning the balls in the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, in order to store the balls in the storage channel 700e, even in the state (interval state) in which the variable prize winning device 65 is closed during the big win, the balls are continuously launched, so the operation of the game is prohibited. can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of rounds provided as a jackpot is 8 rounds and a jackpot (jackpot type is "jackpot B"), and a 16-round jackpot (jackpot types are "jackpot A" and "jackpot C"). are provided. In other words, in the case of the 8-round jackpot, the maximum number of times the timing production (operation production) is executed during the jackpot game is 1, and in the case of the 16-round jackpot, the timing production (operation production) is executed during the jackpot game. The maximum number of times that the As a result, it is possible to give different benefits depending on the type of jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the player.

In this embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, but other configurations may be used. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are stored in the next round, the timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. As a result, the player can more positively play a game in which balls are stored in the storage channel 700e.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description is continued. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not the number-of-rounds command (S2503: No), then it is determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from main controller 110 when each round in the jackpot ends. In the process of S2506, if it is determined that an interval command has been received (S2506: Yes), the number of completed rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the calculated result is the 7th or 15th round. It is determined whether it indicates the end (S2507).

In the processing of S2507, if it is determined that the interval command received this time is the interval command indicating the end of the 7th or 15th round (S2507: Yes), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is ON (S2508). , is determined to be on (S2508: Yes), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to on (S2509), the corresponding display interval command is set (S2509), and this processing ends. That is, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 54, in the round (seventh or fifteenth round) in which the announcement effect is executed, it is determined whether the conditions for executing the timing effect (operation effect) are established. In addition to this, even at the timing when the round (7th or 15th round) before execution of the timing effect (operation effect) ends, It is determined again whether the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is established, and based on the determination result, the timing effect setting flag 223w can be set to ON.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied until immediately before the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started, It is possible to increase opportunities to provide timing effects (operation effects) to the player. In this case, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed without executing the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected timing effect (operation effect) to a player who is disappointed that the advance notice effect has not been executed.

Although details are not shown, for the processing of S2507 to S2509, when the timing effect setting flag 223w is already set to ON in the effect processing during the jackpot (see S2504 in FIG. 54), the process is configured to be skipped. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether the jackpot ending command has been received (S2511). In the process of S2511, when the jackpot ending command is received (S2511: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S2512), the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is cleared (S2513), and this process ends. Moreover, in the process of S2511, also when it determines with not having received the jackpot ending command (S2511:No), this process is complete|finished.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2114). This variable display setting process (S2114) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) is based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, a process of generating a variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (complete failure, reach failure, jackpot), a process of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variable display setting process (FIG. S2114), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S2709. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is ON (S2701: Yes), based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the detailed aspect of the fluctuation display of the special symbol of this time is determined. Each process of S2702 to S2708 for the purpose is executed.

More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S2702), then the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S2703), and it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern extracted this time is a chance pattern (S2704 ). In the processing of S2704, in the special symbol variation start processing of the main controller 110 (see S213 in FIG. 35), when a variation pattern command in which "chance lost" and "chance reach" are determined as the variation type of the variation pattern is received Secondly, it determines that the variation pattern extracted this time is a chance pattern. In the processing of S2704, if it is determined that the acquired variation pattern is a chance pattern (S2704: Yes), then it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2705), and it is determined that it is ON. In this case (S2705: Yes), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON assuming that the conditions for executing the timing effect (operation effect) are satisfied (S2706).

In the present embodiment, when a variation pattern command indicating a variation type of a variation pattern capable of executing a chance effect (operation effect) is received as described above, it is established that balls are stored in the storage channel 700e. As a condition, the chance effect (operation effect) is executed, but the chance effect (operation effect) may be executed without determining whether or not there is a ball on the storage channel 700e. As a result, when a ball flows into the storage channel 700 e during the chance production, the ball can be easily entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 .

Then, a display variation pattern command is set (S2707), and then 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c). Then, based on the subtracted value, the data in the winning information storage area included in the command storage area is shifted (S2709), and the process proceeds to S2709.On the other hand, in the process of S2704, the variation pattern acquired this time is the chance pattern. If it is determined that it is not (S2704: No), or if it is determined in the process of S2705 that the storage state flag 223k is not on (it is off) (S2705: No), that is, the current fluctuation display setting In the process (S2114), if it is determined that the conditions for executing the timing effect (operation effect) are not established, the process of S2706 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2707.

In the process of S2709, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2709). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2709: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2709, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is ON (S2709: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to OFF (S2710), then the command determination process (FIG. 50 ), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2711), and the acquired stop type is set (S2712). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S2713), and this processing ends.

Next, the ball passage monitoring process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing this ball passage monitoring process (S2115). This sphere passage monitoring process (S2115) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113, and (See FIG. 3) is a process for monitoring the passage of the ball that has flowed down.

In the ball passage monitoring process (S2115), first, it is determined whether the release state flag 223q is ON (S2801). Here, if it is determined that the release state flag 223q is not ON (is OFF), the storage channel 700e is not in a release (open) state in which the ball can flow down, so this processing ends. In the process of S2801, if it is determined that the release state flag 223q is ON (S2801: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball passing flag 223n is ON (S2802). In the process of S2802, if it is determined that the ball passing flag 223n is off (S2802: No), then, based on the detection result of the first ball passing sensor S3, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the first ball passing sensor S3. is determined (S2803). In the process of S2803, if it is determined that the ball has passed (S2803: Yes), the ball passing flag 223n is set to ON (S2804), the passing counter 223ae is set to "1" (S2805), and the process of S2806 is performed. Move to

In other words, in the processing of S2801 to S2805 described above, the cancellation state flag 223q is set to ON, and the period is is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S2802, if it is determined that the ball passing flag 223n is ON (S2802: Yes), the measurement of the period has already started, so the processing of S2803 to S2805 is skipped. Move to S2806. In addition, in the processing of S2803, if it is determined that the first ball passage sensor S3 has not detected the passage of the ball (S2803), it is immediately after the storage channel 700e has been changed to the release state, and the ball has not yet passed. Since the ball has not yet reached the first ball passing sensor S3, this process is terminated.

In the processing of S2806, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 (S2806). In the process of S2806, if it is determined that no ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 (S2806: No), then it is determined whether the second ball passage sensor S4 has detected the passage of the ball ( S2807), if the passage of the ball is not detected (S2807: No), it is determined whether the value of the passage counter 223ae has reached the upper limit (value corresponding to 1 second) (S2808). In the processing of S2808, if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached (S2808: No), 1 is added to the value of the passage counter 223ae (S2809), and this processing ends. Thus, in the process of S2805, when the value of the passage counter 223ae is set to "1", the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630, or the passage of the ball is detected by the second ball passage sensor S4, or , the value of the passing counter 223ae is incremented by "1" each time this process is executed (every 1 ms) until the value of the passing counter 223ae reaches the upper limit (adds up to the value indicating 1 second).

On the other hand, in the process of S2806, if it is determined that the ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 (S2806: Yes), the passing period of the ball (the ball is (S2811), and information indicating the calculated passing period is set in the ball passing information storage area 223ac (S2812). ), and the process proceeds to S2813. Also, in the process of S2807, when the second ball passing sensor S4 detects the passing of the ball (S2812: Yes), the passing period of the ball (when the ball passes through the first ball passing sensor) is determined based on the current value of the passing counter 223ae. The period from passing through S3 to passing through the second ball passing sensor S4) is calculated (S2811), the process of S2812 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2813.

In the processing of S2808, if it is determined that the value of the passage counter 223ae is the upper limit value (value indicating 1 second) (S2808: Yes), a predetermined period has passed since the first ball passage sensor S3 detected the passage of the ball. Since the ball does not enter the specific general ball entrance 630 and does not pass the second ball passing sensor S4 during (1 second), there is a possibility of ball jamming, so an error command is issued. is set (S2810), and the process proceeds to S2813.

In the process of S2813, since the process for the ball whose passage was detected by the first ball passing sensor S3 is completed, the ball passing flag 223n is set to OFF (S2813), and the value of the passing counter 223ae is reset (S2814). , the process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the ball passing monitoring process (S2115), a process for correcting the timing effect (operation effect) effect mode is executed based on the period information indicating the ball passing period stored in the ball passing information storage area 223ac. be done. Specifically, based on the period until the ball flowing down the storage channel 700e passes through the specific general ball entrance 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4, the player is given a second Correction processing is executed to change the display timing of the effect pointer indicating the timing for operating the frame button (release button) 22b. Details of this correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. It is possible to more deeply associate the effect mode to be executed and the actual ball flow situation, and it is possible to provide an effect that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

Note that in the present embodiment, the reference period required for the ball that has passed through the first ball passing sensor S3 to enter the specific general ball entrance 630 and the specific general period that the ball passing through the first ball passing sensor S3 The mounting position of the second ball passing sensor S4 is determined so that the reference period required for the ball to enter the ball entrance 630 is the same as the reference period. By using both the passage period calculated when the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 and the passage period calculated when the ball passes through the second ball passage sensor S4, It is possible to determine whether there is a need for correction in the timing performance.

Note that the method for measuring the passage period is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and for example, the passage period based on when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated) , or the passage period may be measured only when the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 . In addition, the position of the second ball passing sensor S4 is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and the second ball passing sensor S4 is located at a point where the passing period differs from the passing period of the ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630. may be placed.

Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2116) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing this storage state monitoring process (S2116). This storage state monitoring process (S2116) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and (See FIG. 3) This is a process for determining whether a ball is stored above.

Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771 are provided as storage devices capable of storing balls on the game board 13, and a maximum of five storage devices are provided. spheres can be stored. Each storage device has a first storage valve 770a and a second storage valve 771a, respectively. The first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are second frame buttons (release buttons) that can be operated by the player. 22b is operated (depressed) to cause the stored balls to flow down one by one. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the storage detection sensor S2 capable of detecting the presence of the first ball stored when the second storage valve 771a is closed, and the upper limit number of balls (5 A storage upper limit sensor S1 capable of detecting that the number of balls is stored is provided, and the state of storage of the balls on the storage channel 700e can be determined.

In this storage state monitoring process (S2116), first, it is determined whether the storage detection sensor S2 is on (S2851). When it is determined that the storage detection sensor S2 is ON in the processing of S2851 (S2851: Yes), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2852), and it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not ON. If so (S2852: No), the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2856. On the other hand, in the process of S2852, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2852: Yes), the process of S2853 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2856.

Further, in the process of S2851, if it is determined that the storage detection sensor S2 is off (S2851: No), then it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2854), and it is determined that it is on. If so, the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF (S2855), and the process proceeds to S2856. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2854 that the storage state flag 223k is off (S2854: No), the process of S2855 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2856. In this manner, the setting of the storage state flag 223k is updated at any time based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor S2.

In the process of S2856, it is determined whether the storage upper limit sensor S1 is ON (S2856). In the process of S2856, if it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is ON, that is, if it is determined that the upper limit amount of balls is stored in the storage channel 700e (S2856: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (S2857), and if the storage upper limit flag 223m is OFF (S2857: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is set to ON (S2858). When it is determined that the state flag 223k is ON (S2858: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (S2859), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2858, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is off (S2858: No), the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects the ball even though the storage detection sensor S2 does not detect the ball. Since it is in the detected state, an error command is set (S2860), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2857, if the storage upper limit flag 223m is ON (S2857: Yes), this process ends.

Also, in the process of S2856, if it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is off (S2856: No), then it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2861), and it is not on (off ) (S2861: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is ON in the process of S2861 (S2861: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to OFF (S2862), and this process ends.

As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2116) in this embodiment, it is determined whether the balls are stored in the storage channel 700e and whether there is an abnormality in the ball storage. Since the upper limit flag 223m) and an error command can be set, the sound ramp control device 113 can perform an effect based on the storage state of the storage channel 700e.

Next, the lamp output processing (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this lamp output process (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and sets a lamp lighting command to be sent to the lamp display device 227. This process is for Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, as the lamp display device 227, a decorative lamp 227a used for effects provided over the entire pachinko machine 10, and a board surface unit 700 (see FIG. 3 ), a transmission lamp 227b for making the inside of the cover member 710 visible to the player, and another lamp 227c. It is

When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is within a predetermined period of time (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, a predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) clocked by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 . In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the time is within 30 seconds (S2901: Yes), a transmissive lamp lighting command is set (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905.

Here, in this embodiment, the cover member 710 is provided in order to prevent the player from visually confirming the operating state of the movable valve 750 in the normal game state. As described above, the cover member 710 is configured to change from a shielding state in which the inside is difficult to see to a transparent state in which the inside can be seen, by irradiating the predetermined light (light of the lamp for transmission) from the back side as described above. there is For a predetermined period after turning on the gaming machine (predetermined period after execution of start-up processing), the transparent lamp is lit regardless of the game state. As a result, the inside of the board unit 700 covered with the cover member 710 can be easily visually recognized immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, that is, at the timing when the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by the clerk.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2901, if it is determined that the present time is not within the predetermined period (30 seconds) after the startup processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed (the predetermined period (30 seconds) has passed), ( S2901: No), next, it is determined whether or not the first ball passing sensor S3 has detected the passage of the ball (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the first ball passing sensor S3 detects the passage of the ball (S2902: Yes), a transmissive lamp lighting command is issued so that the player can visually recognize the ball that has passed the first ball passing sensor S3. set (S2904) and proceed to the processing of S2905. The transmission lamp lighting command in this case is set so that the transmission lamp 227b is turned on for a time sufficient for the ball to pass through the area covered by the cover member 710 (for example, 0.7 seconds). However, for example, the transmission lamp 227b is extinguished on condition that the ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630 or that the second ball passage sensor S4 has detected the passage of the ball. You may As a result, the period during which the cover member 710 is in the transparent state can be minimized, making it difficult for the player to grasp the operating state of the movable valve 750 .

Here, in the present embodiment, in the board unit 700, the area where the balls stored in the storage channel 700e can flow down (the area where the specific general ball entrance 630 and the movable valve 750 are provided) is difficult to see. is covered with a cover member 710 (see FIG. 2). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the operation status of the movable valve 750, but when the ball passes through the area covered by the cover member 710, the player cannot grasp the whereabouts of the ball. However, there is a risk that the player will be dissatisfied. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is determined by detection of the ball by the first ball passing sensor S3 that the ball passes through the area covered by the cover member 710, and the cover member 710 is changed to the transmission state. With this configuration, the player can reliably grasp the passing (flowing down) state of the ball, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, by changing the cover member, which is in a state where the inside cannot be seen in the normal state (the state where the lamp for transmission is not lit), to the transparent state where the inside can be seen, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to make it easy for the player to notice that the ball will pass through the area covered by the cover member 710 by giving a change.

In the process of S2902, if the first ball passing sensor S3 has not detected the passage of the ball (S2902: No), then it is determined whether or not the specific effect is being executed (S2903). In the processing of S2903, when it is determined that the specific effect is being executed (S2903: Yes), a transmissive lamp lighting command is set based on the effect mode of the specific effect (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905. Here, in the process of S2903, the specific effect determined is when the display variation pattern command set in the variable display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 55) of the sound lamp control device 113 is a specific effect. While the effect is being executed, the effect mode using the transmissive lamp lighting command is executed. As a result, the cover member 710 can be changed to the transparent state only when a specific condition is satisfied in the variable performance showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to provide a game feature in which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated by oneself. Also, a player who has played a game in which a special symbol lottery is executed may be given a privilege (a privilege of allowing the cover member 710 to pass through) that is advantageous to the player regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on when it is determined that the specific effect is being executed. ) state, it is determined whether or not a ball is stored in the storage channel 700e, and only when it is determined that a ball is stored, an effect of turning on the transmission lamp 227b is executed, and the ball is not stored. If it is determined that, instead of the transmission lamp 227b, it is preferable to perform an effect of turning on the decorative lamp 227a provided near the cover member 710. FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily viewing the operating state of the movable valve 750 by changing the cover member 710 to the transparent state unnecessarily.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the variable display setting process (S2114 in FIG. 55) of the audio lamp control device 113, if the set display variation pattern command is a specific effect, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on. In addition, for example, after the end of the previous big win, the number of special symbol lotteries (number of fluctuations) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 500 times) without winning the big win. On this condition, the cover member 710 may be set to the transmission state, or the transmission lamp may be set so that the cover member 710 is set to the transmission state while the real-time clock (RTC) is counting a predetermined period. Lighting control may be performed. In addition, when the cover member 710 is configured to be transparent for a long period of time (a period in which the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (eg, 30 times) or a period of time to be clocked for a long period of time (eg, 10 minutes)), Guidance display for guiding a game of hitting a ball toward the storage channel 700e may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the game in which the player is advantageous.

Returning to FIG. 58, the description is continued. In the processing of S2903, if it is determined that the specific effect is not being executed (S2903: No), or after the processing of S2904 is finished, a decorative lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state). (S2905), and the process ends. The decoration lamp lighting command is variously set according to the variation pattern to be executed, the current game state, and the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (2107), an input as to whether or not the frame buttons (the first frame button 22a, the second frame button 22b) operated by the player in order to enhance the effect of the effect is monitored. This is processing for setting to perform a corresponding effect when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when an operation on a frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is detected, a frame button operation command is issued to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. Setting and setting of various flags based on the contents of the operation are performed.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the frame buttons (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b) during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is the depression success period, and the determination result is obtained. frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22a, second frame Based on the operation of the button 22b), processing such as setting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). Then, in the process of S3001, when it is determined that the effect execution flag 223x is ON (S3001: Yes), next it is determined whether the release operation flag 223p is ON (S3002). In the process of S3002, if it is determined that the release operation flag 223p is ON (S3002: Yes), the release operation flag 223p is set to OFF (S3003), and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the release operation flag is off (S3002: No), then it is determined whether the second frame button 22a has been operated (depressed) (S3004).

If it is determined in the process of S3004 that the second frame button 22a has not been operated (depressed) (S3004: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3004 that the second frame button 22a has been operated (pressed down) (S3004: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005.

Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the first frame button (effect button) 22a is configured to output an operation signal based on the operation to the sound lamp control device 113. The second frame button (release button) 22b is configured to output an operation signal to the main controller 110 based on the operation. The timing effect (operation effect) in which the effect mode is set by the sound lamp control device 113 is based on the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b described above. It is configured such that the mode of production (result of production) is variable.

Therefore, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) of FIG. A process (S3002) is executed to determine whether or not the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated (pressed) based on the setting contents of the release operation flag 223p which is set to ON when an operation command is received. be. As a result, operation contents for a plurality of operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) outputting operation signals to different control means (main control device 110, sound lamp control device 113) are aggregated. It is possible to smoothly perform variable setting of the presentation mode corresponding to the operation of each operation means (the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b), thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Further, in this embodiment, prior to the process of determining the operation of the first frame button 22a (S3004), the process of determining the setting of the release operation flag 223p indicating the operation status of the second frame button 22b (S3002). is configured to run. This is because, when both frame buttons (first frame button 22a and second frame button 22b) are operated at the same time, an effect is executed based on the operation of the second frame button 22b. That is, in the present embodiment, the second frame button (release button) 22b changes the state of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) from the closed (unreleased) state to the open (released) state. It is an operation means provided for making the variable, and since it is possible to give a privilege to the player by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the first frame button is provided merely for the effect. The effect on the game is greatly different from that of the (effect button) 22a. Therefore, in the timing effect (operation effect), the presence/absence of the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, which may affect the game result, is more important than the determination of the presence/absence of the first frame button (effect button) 22a. We are raising the priority. By configuring in this way, an effect ( In the timing effect (operation effect), an effect corresponding to the result of the game can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 59, the description continues. In the process of S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the button type whose pressing is detected is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y (S3005). That is, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the release operation flag 223p is ON and the process proceeds to S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the second frame button 22b is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y, and S3004. If it is determined that the pressing of the first frame button 22a has been detected in the processing of 1, and the process proceeds to S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the first frame button 22a is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y.

After the processing of S3005 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the current frame button operation was performed during the successful pressing period based on the pressing period information read out by the processing of S3005 (S3006). If it is determined that it is not during the press success period (S3006: No), a display failure effect command is set (S3007), and the process proceeds to S3011. Here, when the display failure effect command is set, "bad" is displayed as the result display mode 720 as shown in FIG. 11(b).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3006 that it is during the successful pressing period (S3006: Yes), it is determined whether the operation determined in this process is the second frame button (release button) 22b. (S3008). In the process of S3008, if it is determined that the operation is the second frame button (release button) 22b (S3008: Yes), a display release button success effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3011. . Also, in the process of S3008, if it is determined that the operation is not the second frame button (release button) 22b but the first frame button (effect button) 22a (S3008: No), the display effect A button success effect command is set (S3010), and the process proceeds to S3011.

Here, when the display release button success effect command is set, as shown in FIG. The left button display 715 shown is changed to the pressed state mode. Further, when the display effect button success effect command is set, as shown in FIG. 11A, "good" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the first frame button 22a is schematically shown. The middle button display 716 is changed to the pressed state mode. Furthermore, in this timing effect (operation effect), when the ball is entering the specific general ball entrance 630, the specific ball entry display mode 721 indicating that is displayed as the ball to the specific general ball entrance 630. is displayed in a mode ("15" indicating the number of prize balls) indicating the privilege given to the player by the entry of the ball.

Returning to FIG. 59, the description continues. In the process of S3011, it is determined whether the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON (S3011). In the process of S3011, if the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is off (S3011: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3011, if the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is on (S3011: Yes), it is determined whether the first frame button 22a has been pressed (S3012), and if it has been pressed (S3012: Yes). Next, the difficulty level information indicating the selected difficulty level is set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa (S3013), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to OFF (S3014), and the present process ends. If it is determined in the process of S3012 that the first frame button 22a has not been pressed (S3012: No), this process ends.

Next, the timing effect setting process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the contents of the timing effect setting process (S2111). This timing effect setting process (S2111) is a process for setting the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) to be executed.

When the timing effect setting process (S2111) is executed, first, it is determined whether the timing effect setting flag 223w is ON (S3101). In the process of S3101, if it is determined that the timing effect setting flag 223w is ON (S3101: Yes), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is in progress (S3102), and if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S3102: Yes), a big hit timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) for setting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the big win is executed, and the process proceeds to S3105. A detailed description of the jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) will be given later with reference to FIG. 61(a).

On the other hand, in the processing of S3102, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S3102: No), normal timing performance presetting processing for setting the performance mode of the timing performance (operation performance) based on the variable display of the special symbol (S3104) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3105. This normal timing effect pre-setting process (S3104) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 61(b).

In the process of S3105, the timing effect common setting process executed in common regardless of the timing effect (operation effect) executed at any timing (during the jackpot, normal) is executed (S3105), and then this process exit. This timing effect common setting process (S3105) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Also, in the processing of S3101, when it is determined that the timing effect setting flag 223w is off (S3101: No), the timing effect correction process (S3106) for correcting the ball entry timing in the timing effect (operation effect) is performed. Execute, and then terminate this process. This timing effect correction processing (S3106) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Here, with reference to FIG. 61(a), the big hit timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) will be described. FIG. 61(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (S3103). This jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) is executed based on the difficulty level set during the jackpot. It sets the sound (sound effect) to be output at the time of operation.

When the jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (S3103) is executed, first, the difficulty level information set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa is read out (S3131), and pointer setting conditions corresponding to the read out difficulty level are acquired. (S3132). Specifically, from the difficulty level information set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa, the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b and the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 are determined. , the number of operations of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the display mode information of the effect pointer corresponding to the difficulty level.

After completing the process of S3132, next, it is determined whether the read difficulty level information is low difficulty level (S3133). In the processing of S3133, if it is determined that the difficulty level information is low difficulty (S3133: No), the tone range 1 data 222c2 indicating the low difficulty level is read out from the music information storage area 222c (S3134), and corresponding to tone range 1. A voice command is set (S3135), and this processing ends. As the voice command set here, since the sound range 1 indicates the high sound range in the music information, a high-pitched voice (sound effect) is set so as to correspond to it.

On the other hand, in the process of S3133, if it is determined that the difficulty level information is high difficulty (S3133: No), the tone range 2 data 222c3 indicating the high difficulty level is read from the music information storage area 222c (S3136), A corresponding voice command is set (S3137), and this processing ends. As the voice command set here, since the sound range 2 indicates the low range of the music information, a low-pitched voice (sound effect) is set so as to correspond to it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61(b), the normal timing effect pre-setting process (S3104) will be described. FIG. 61(b) is a flowchart showing the details of the normal timing effect pre-setting process (S3104). In this normal timing effect presetting process (S3104), when the target special symbol lottery result is a hit, the second frame button (release button) 22b is pressed during the successful period. Settings are made so that the results of the lottery will be notified.

When the normal timing effect pre-setting process (S3104) is executed, first, a low difficulty pointer setting condition is acquired (S3151), and then it is determined whether or not the current special symbol variation is a winning variation ( S3152). In the process of S3152, if it is determined that the hit is fluctuating (S3152: Yes), the win pointer setting flag 223af is set to ON (S3153), and the number of displayed pointers is determined from the pointer setting conditions acquired in the process of S3151. is decremented by 1 (S3154), and the process ends.

Next, the timing effect common setting process (S3105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the contents of the timing effect common setting process (S3105). This timing effect common setting process (S3105) is the above-described jackpot timing effect pre-setting process (see S3103 in FIG. 61(a)) or normal timing effect pre-setting process (see S3104 in FIG. 61(b). ) and based on the operation state of the movable valve 750 and the pointer setting condition of the timing effect (operation effect) set by ), the process of determining the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed.

When the timing effect common setting process (S3105) is executed, first. Based on the current movable state (operable state) of the movable valve 750 stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s, closing timing information up to 30 seconds later is read from the closing timing storage area 223v (S3201). Then, the ball entry timing information stored in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad is read out, and entry possible timing information is calculated by subtracting the ball entry timing information from the closing timing (S3202).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a timing at which the pointer setting condition of the current timing effect (operation effect) and the possible ball entry timing information calculated in the process of S3202 match (S3203). Specifically, a location where the effect pointer displayable area (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the musical range data of the music set as the pointer setting condition and the possible entry timing information match is set as the pointer setting condition. Determines whether there are matching locations for the number of matches that exist. In this case, the ball-enterable timing information is calculated based on the closing timing of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled according to a predetermined rule. is shifted within a predetermined period (up to 10 seconds), it is determined whether there is a matching timing (see FIG. 16).

In the process of S3203, if it is determined that there is a matching timing (S3203: Yes), the start timing of the timing effect (operation effect) is set based on the matching timing (S3204). If it is determined that there is no matching timing (S3203: No), a special pointer display position is set outside the effect pointer displayable area (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the range data of the music set as the pointer setting condition, Match timing is created (S3205). After that, based on the created matching timing, the production start timing is set (S3204).

After the process of S3204 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the winning pointer setting flag 223af is set to ON (S3206). In the processing of S3206, if it is determined that the win pointer setting flag 223af is ON (S3206: Yes), that is, the timing effect (operation effect) of this time is executed based on the variation effect of the special symbol that wins. If so, the second frame button (release button) is placed at the non-matching point where the pointer setting condition of the current timing effect (operation effect) does not match the entry possible timing information calculated in the processing of S3202. 22b is set (S3207), the winning pointer setting flag 223af is set to OFF (S3208), and the process proceeds to S3209. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3206 that the win pointer setting flag 223af is off (S3206: No), the processes of S3207 and S3208 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3209.

By configuring in this way, in the timing performance (operation performance) executed during the variation of the special symbol, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the non-matching point that does not match the entry possible timing information. It is possible to set a display pointer for As a result, even if the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing with respect to the display pointer for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the specific general entrance 630 When the ball does not enter, the player can expect that the lottery result of the changing special symbols will be a big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

When using such a configuration, when it is determined that the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing with respect to the display pointer set to the non-coincidence point, the second The 3-symbol display device 81 may be configured to notify the lottery result of the special symbol. Thereby, the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b can be used as a means for informing the lottery result of the special symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the display pointer is set to the above-mentioned non-matching point only when the special symbol lottery result is a win, but in other cases, that is, the special symbol lottery result is a win. It may be configured to set a non-matching point even if it is not.

In the process of S3209, the display pointers for the number of matches set in the pointer setting condition are set (S3209), and the set display pointers (the display pointer set in the process of S3207 and the display pointer set in the process of S3209 The successful pressing period is determined in correspondence with the display pointer) and set in the pressing period information storage area 223y (S3210). After the processing of S3210 is finished, it is next determined whether the current jackpot is in progress (S3211). The data is stored in the storage area 223r (S3215), and the processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3211, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (S3211: No), the display timing effect command is set based on the various contents set in this process (S3212), and the effect is being executed. The flag 223x is set to ON (S3213), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to OFF (S3214), and this process is terminated.

Next, the timing effect correction process (S3106) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the contents of the timing effect correction process (S3106). This timing effect correction process (S3106) is a process for correcting the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 set in the timing effect (operation effect) based on the actual ball passing period. . Here, in this embodiment, as the ball entry timing, the ball entry timing (normal) in which the ball passage period is set to 0.5 seconds and the ball entry timing (early) in which the ball passage period is set to 0.4 seconds are used. , and ball entry timing (late) in which the ball passage period is set to 0.6 seconds can be selected and set in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad. Then, based on the ball entry timing information set in this process, the ball passing period corresponding to the ball entry timing information set in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad is subtracted from the closing timing information of the movable valve 750. , the timing at which a ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 is set.

When the timing effect correction process (S3106) is executed, first, the passing period set in the ball passing information storage area 223ac is read (S3301), the read passing period is analyzed, and the passing period (short) and the passing period are determined. The number of pieces of information for the period (normal) and transit period (long) are calculated (S3302). After that, it is determined whether or not the calculated transit period information number is greater than or equal to the transit period (short) information number (S3303). In the process of S3303, if it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the transit period (long) is smaller than the number of pieces of information in the transit period (short) (S3303: No), then the calculated number of transit period information is the transit period (normal). is greater than or equal to the number of information in the transit period (short) (S3304). In the process of S3304, if it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the transit period (normal) is greater than or equal to the number of pieces of information in the transit period (short) (S3304: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3304, if it is determined that the number of pieces of information on the passage period (short) is larger (S3304: No), it is determined whether the currently set ball entry timing information is the ball entry timing (late). It is determined (S3305). In the processing of S3305, if it is determined that the ball entry timing (late) is not reached (S3305: No), the timing (early) is selected as the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630, and the ball entry timing is stored. The area is set (S3306), and then this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3305, if it is determined that it is the ball entry timing (late) (S3305: Yes), the timing (normal) is selected as the timing at which the ball can be entered into the specific general entrance 630, and the ball is entered. It is set in the timing storage area (S3310), and then this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S3303 that the number of pieces of information in the transit period (long) is greater than or equal to the number of pieces of information in the transit period (short) (S3303: Yes), then the calculated number of transit period information is It is determined whether or not the number of (normal) information is greater than or equal to the number of information of the transit period (long) (S3307). In the process of S3307, if it is determined that the number of pieces of information in the passage period (normal) is greater than or equal to the number of pieces of information in the passage period (long) (S3307: Yes), this process ends.

In the process of S3307, if it is determined that the number of pieces of information for the passage period (normal) is smaller than the number of pieces of information for the passage period (long) (S3307: No), then the currently set ball entry timing information is used. It is determined whether it is the timing (early) (S3308). In the process of S3308, if it is determined that the ball entry timing (early) is not reached (S3308: No), the timing (late) is selected as the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630, and the ball entry timing is stored. The area is set (S3309). On the other hand, in the process of S3308, if it is determined that it is time to enter the ball (early) (S3305: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3310 described above, and then the process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball passes through a predetermined section (the section from the first ball passing sensor S3 to the specific general ball entrance 630 or the second ball passing sensor S4). By varying the ball entry timing period subtracted from the closing timing of the movable valve 750 based on the passage period information that measures the period required for the ball to correct the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 However, other configurations may be used. For example, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing in the release of the storage device or in the timing effect (operation effect). may be set as the start condition, and the period from when the start condition is set until the ball passes through the specific general ball entrance 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4 may be measured. Even with this configuration, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be obtained.

Also, instead of varying the ball-entering timing period, by varying the degree of progress of the effect executed based on the passing period information, correction processing may be performed so that the display pointer is displayed at an appropriate timing. good.

Next, referring to FIG. 64, the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112) will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the contents of the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112). In this movable valve operation counter update process (S2112), a process for updating the movable valve operation counter 223t for updating the operation scenario of the movable valve 750 is executed.

When the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is a movable valve operation scenario setting (S3401). If it is determined in the process of S3401 that there is no setting (S3401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a setting (S3401: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the movable valve operation counter is the upper limit value (S3402). Here, the value of the movable valve operation counter is a value necessary to execute the 24 operation scenarios set in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f, and the value of the counter corresponding to 732 seconds is set as the upper limit value. It is

In the process of S3402, if it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S3402: No), 1 is added to the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t (S3403), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3402 that it is the upper limit value (S3402: Yes), the value of the movable valve operation counter is set to 1 (S3404), and this process ends. As a result, the operation status of the movable valve 750 can be grasped at any time on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 78. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S5001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, the boot processing (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S5001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S5102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored therein are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S5103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S5104), the command pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after completion of this boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 65). By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) (S5105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S5001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 66, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S5101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a at step S5101. and the processing of S5102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S5103 to S5105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S5103 to S5105 without performing the processes of S5101 and S5102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S5003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S5004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S5005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 76(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S6502 in FIG. 76A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 67(b)) performs the simple command determination processing (see FIG. 67(b) S5308) and simple display setting processing (see S5309 in FIG. 67(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is issued. When received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and simple variation is performed. can perform. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S5005, interrupt permission is set (S5006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S5006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 67(a). FIG. 67(a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 67(b) is a flow chart showing this V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 32) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 67(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301). If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S5302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S5303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S5302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is transferred. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72. FIG.

In the display setting process (S5303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S5304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S5303) or the simple display setting processing (S5309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S5306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S5304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S5305). 32, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S5307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, front-back off reach, front-back off reach, complete The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to (loss, chance) are compared with each other, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S5301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S5309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S5304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72, the details of the command determination process (S5302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 68, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S5403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S5402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S5403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S5404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S5405) and returns to the processing of S5401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S5405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 69(a). FIG. 69(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S5501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a distance of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. It could be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S5501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S5501 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S5503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S5503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5506), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S5505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S5504 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation defined in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S5404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S5406), If there is a display variation type command (S5406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S5407), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the stop type command process (S5407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 69(b). FIG. 69(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear loss reach, reach other than front-rear loss, complete loss, or chance number) is determined (S5601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S5602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S5603), and the process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S5602. In the above-described task processing (S5304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S5602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by the processing of S5603, and the specification The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S5601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S5602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 68, the description is continued. In the processing of S5406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S5406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S5408). If there is an opening command (S5408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S5409), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the opening command process (S5409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 70(a). FIG. 70(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S5701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5702).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5705), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S5704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5701, At the same time as extracting the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and specifying the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored by the processing of S5702. From the set transfer data table, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Also, when this opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 . As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced. It takes a long time to transfer the image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The number-of-rounds command for display indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third pattern display device 81 ends, so it indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a risk that this will take time and cause the player to feel uneasy about whether or not the action has stopped.

In addition, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 15 rounds) in the third pattern display device 81 are completed. If the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the ending command for display, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the motion has stopped or to have a sense of incompatibility.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device 81 ends the variation display of the jackpot. , the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, and the round effect is completed in the third pattern display device 81 (for 15 rounds). ) When the game ends, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third pattern display device 81, so that the player does not feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Returning to FIG. 68, the description is continued. In the process of S5408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S5408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S5410), and the If there is a round number command for use (S5410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S5411), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the round number command process (S5411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 70(b). FIG. 70(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S5702).

Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5705), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S5410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S5410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S5412). If there is an ending command (S5412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S5413), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the ending command process (S5413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the ending command for display is determined, the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S5901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S5902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S5904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S5905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S5412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S5412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S5414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S5414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S5415), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the back image change command process (S5415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 72(a). FIG. 72(a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6503) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S6001). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back image corresponding to the other back image type is turned on. The determination flag is set to OFF (S6002), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S6001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S6002. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set by the processing in S6002 is used. , specifying the back image type to be displayed at that time, further specifying the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S5414, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S5414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S5416). Otherwise (S5416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S5417), and the process returns to S5401.

Details of the error command processing (S5417) will now be described with reference to FIG. 72(b). FIG. 72(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S6101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S6102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S6101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S6102, and the error type corresponding to the error type is determined. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S6102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S5416 that there is no error command (S5416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S5418), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

In the process of S5401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes ), and the processing of S5402 to S5418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S5401 to S5418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. It extracts and executes fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 69(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 69(b)), which are processing corresponding to each command, and for other commands, A process to discard the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 69(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S5501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S5303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. FIG. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 73, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S6202 to S6204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S6205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S6201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S6202), S6203-S6204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the process of S6203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S6203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S6204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S6301).

Based on this expanded warning image data, task processing identifies the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle necessary for drawing. determine various parameters.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6204), or if it is determined in the process of S6203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S6203: No), then the process proceeds to S6205.

In S6205, pointer update processing is executed (S6205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S6401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S6403). If it is a demonstration display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S6405), the present process is terminated, and the display is displayed. Return to setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S6406). ), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. Since the drawing contents are always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S6402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 73, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) forming the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S6206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S6208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S6209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is ON (S6209: Yes), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. setting (S6210), and then, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S6211). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S6214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), returns to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S5304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last time stop design determination flag set by the processing of S6215, specify the stop design of the fluctuation effect performed one before , the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S6209: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is ON (S6216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the timer counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. 233d (S6217), and then by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6221), this processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the third pattern display device 81 automatically displays the demonstration effect. You can set the drawing content so that is displayed.

In the process of S6216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S6216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the simple display setting process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image has ended. A process of setting a display data table that defines to be displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, the details of the transfer setting process (S5305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S6502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S6501, that is, if it is turned off (S6501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been transferred to In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 76(b). FIG. 76B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S6601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6602). In the process of S6602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S6602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S6602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to S6603. Also, as a result of the process of S6601, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the process proceeds to S6603.

In the process of S6603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S6603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S6603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 68 to 72) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 73 to 77) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 77) (see S6601: No in FIG. 76A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6205) of the previously executed display setting process (S5303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S6701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S6702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6705.

Also, in the processing of S6702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S6702: No), the processing of S6703 and S6704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S6705. In the processing of S6705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S6706).

In the process of S6706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S6706 that the transfer process has not ended (S6706: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6706: Yes), the process proceeds to S6707. Also, as a result of the process of S6705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S6705: No), the process proceeds to S6707.

In the processing of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707). is turned off (S6708), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S6713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6707: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S6709). If the back image change flag is not on, but off (S6709: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S6711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image indicated by the back image determination flag is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) The start address is obtained (S6712), and the process proceeds to S6713.

In the process of S6713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6713). The determination in the process of S6713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6713 (S6713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S6713 (S6713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S6714). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the process of S6714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6715), and this normal transfer setting process ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, details of the drawing process (S5306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 32 is generated (S6801). That is, in the processing of S6801, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S5304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S6802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S6803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 67(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 enters the guided state (closed state) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general ball entrance 630. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b for changing the storage state of the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) to the released state, the storage device (first storage device 770 and A ball stored in the second storage device 771 ) can be entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 . Therefore, the player can play the game while timing the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the movable valve 750 is set to operate in various predetermined patterns, and most of the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state (closed state) is is set as a period (0.1 seconds) during which only one ball can be guided. Therefore, since accuracy is required in the timing at which the ball stored in the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) can be guided to the specific general ball entrance 630, the player is more motivated. can be made to play.

In this embodiment, by operating the operation means (the second frame button (release button) 22b), the balls stored in the storage devices (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) are released one by one. Since it is configured so that it can flow down toward the specific general ball entrance 630, the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state (closed state) is the period during which only one ball can be guided (0.1 second ) are continuously set, the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) can be set by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at an appropriate timing. It becomes possible to enter all the stored balls into the specific general ball entrance 630 . Therefore, the player can be motivated to participate in the game in order to obtain more prize balls.

A plurality of balls may be discharged from the storage device in response to the operation of the operation means, and the number of balls to be discharged from the storage device may be varied based on the details of the player's operation of the operation means. You may do so. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of games, and to improve the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the portion of the board surface unit 700 covered with the cover member 710 (see FIG. 2) is covered with the cover member 710 from the back side (the game board 13 side with respect to the cover member 710). Transmissive lamps 227ba to 227be, which are light emitting means for irradiating light onto the substrate, are provided. By irradiating the cover member 710 with light from the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the inside covered with the cover member 710 can be brought into a transmission state in which the player can visually recognize. Although the details will be described later, the transmitting lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from releasing the storage device while grasping the operation status of the movable valve 750 during the normal game in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Also, when the release operation of the storage device is performed and the ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is in a transparent state, so that the player can visually recognize the situation where the ball flows down near the movable valve 750. can be done.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the cover member 710 is provided as a shielding means for making it difficult for the player to grasp the operation status of the movable valve 750, the second frame button can be pressed while the player is aware of the operation status of the movable valve 750. It is possible to prevent the act of operating the (release button) 22b. In addition, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is a half mirror so that it is switched to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized based on a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down). Since it is configured, when the game ball flows down near the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 switches to the transparent state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow condition of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750 .

In this embodiment, the cover member 710, which is the shielding means, is switched to the transmission state by irradiating the light (transmission lamp), but other configurations may be used. Well, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted to the cover member 710 from the light-emitting means (LED) that is always on is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position It may be configured to be in a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized only through the lens.

In addition, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (eg, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color that allows the inside to be seen, and the surface is processed to diffusely reflect the irradiated light (eg, , texturing) may be applied. As a result, while the game is being played in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a makes the inside of the cover member 710 difficult to see, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (i.e., the decorative The inside of the cover member 710 may be visible when the lamp 227a is not lit. As a result, the inside of the cover member 710 can be easily inspected by the store clerk even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall that shields the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a is provided, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielding state and a non-shielding state. should be provided. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 even while the game is being played. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light is provided, and light emission control is performed on the light emitting means, so that the inside of the cover member 710 can be illuminated. may be switched between a state in which it is difficult to see (light is illuminated) and a visible state (light is not illuminated).

Furthermore, by providing a decorative movable member on the cover member 710 whose interior is visible and controlling the movement of the movable member, the interior of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movement of the decorative movable member is small). state) and a state in which it is difficult to see the inside of the cover member 710 (a state in which the decorative movable member moves frequently).

Further, in this embodiment, the timing for operating the operating means (the second frame button (release button) 22b) is set based on the operation of the movable valve 750, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is displayed. It is configured so as to produce a performance display. As a result, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the player receives a privilege (a prize based on entering the specific general ball entrance 630). It is possible to provide a ball), and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In the present embodiment, the above-described effect (timing effect) is configured to be executed during the jackpot game or when a specific variation pattern is selected. An effect (timing effect) may be executed, for example, when it is determined that the upper limit amount of balls has been stored in the storage channel 700e, or when it is determined by a timing means (RTC, etc.) When the time is clocked, or in the effect (so-called mini game, etc.) for operating the effect button (first frame button) 22a that is executed during the special symbol fluctuation or during the jackpot game, a specific condition (for example, mission It may be configured such that a predetermined condition is established when a condition such as clearing is established. As a result, it is possible to execute timing effects (operation effects) at various timings, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Also, when a predetermined winning command (a command output when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is received from the main controller 110, the command corresponding to the winning command is received. A timing effect (operation effect) may be executed using a period of effect (so-called look-ahead effect) executed before the start of the variation of the special symbols.

In this embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, one ball is made to flow down toward the movable valve 750. ) 22b is configured to perform the release operation of the storage device at least once every two seconds. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, unless the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (depressed) with good timing, the ball cannot enter the specific general ball entrance 630, and the second frame button ( Operation accuracy of the release button 22b is required. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 executes a timing effect (operation effect) suggesting the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the timing effect (operation effect), the ball can be easily entered into the specific general ball entrance 630. there is As a result, the player can be motivated to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b.

In the timing effect (operation effect) in this embodiment, an effect is executed in which the player operates the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b. By constructing in this manner, the number of times the player is made to operate the buttons can be increased, and the effect of the performance can be enhanced as compared with the case of executing the performance of operating only the second frame button (release button) 22b. can be done.

In this embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect) that is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is winning and fluctuating, at the timing when the display pointer scrolling in the sub-display area Ds4 matches the bar display portion 717. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, as shown in FIG. 14, the special symbol lottery result is displayed in the sub-display area Ds2. By configuring in this way, the second frame button (release button) 22b for releasing the storage state of the storage device can be used to notify the lottery result of the special symbol.

Also, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to notify the lottery result of the special symbol, the ball flowing out from the storage device based on the operation enters the specific general ball entrance 630. Difficult timing is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily given a privilege (a prize for a ball entering the specific general ball entrance 630). In the case of setting such timing, it is preferable to issue a notification suggesting that a big win has occurred if the ball does not enter the specific general ball entrance 630 . As a result, the player is given a privilege regardless of whether or not the outflow ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630, so that the player can be provided with a sense of security.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of songs are configured to be usable in the timing effect (operation effect), and locations where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) are determined in advance for each song. This is for the purpose of operating the operation means at the timing that matches the rhythm of each song in the timing effect (operation effect). 719 is set, the operation means can be operated in accordance with the rhythm of the music being executed in the timing production (operation production), and the timing production (operation production) can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. can be executed.

In the present embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect), the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is determined from a position where a display pointer preset for each song can be displayed (set). Although it is configured to select, the above-described configuration may be used in the operation effect in which only the first frame button (effect button) 22a is operated. As a result, various effects can be executed as operation effects for operating the first frame button (production button) 22a.

In this embodiment, the movable valve 750 is operated during the period in which the jackpot game based on the jackpot is executed on the jackpot decision display screen that informs the third pattern display device 81 that the lottery result of the special symbol has won the jackpot. It is possible to discriminate whether or not the variable motion is performed in the motion pattern (motion scenario) that is advantageous to the player, and inform the result of the determination by the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the player can grasp that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game before the jackpot game is executed. A game can be made to be performed willingly.

In this embodiment, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his or her own skill, and by varying the benefits to be given according to the difficulty level, various players can On the other hand, it is possible to voluntarily execute a timing effect (operation effect).

In addition, the above-described content indicates both selection of music and selection of difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) executed in the present embodiment. is selected, the interval between the locations where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) differs between song A and song B. A player who selects A and wants to enjoy the timing performance (operation performance) at short intervals can select music B. As a result, it is possible to execute the timing performance (operation performance) desired by the player without changing the degree of difficulty, and to have various players willingly execute the timing performance (operation performance). can be done.

In the present embodiment, the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) at different intervals depending on the song, and the player selects a song so that the display pointer is displayed in a timing effect (operation effect). A configuration for narrowing or widening the display interval is used, but as a configuration other than that, selection means for selecting the display interval of the display pointer 719 executed by the timing effect (operation effect) for the player. A setting unit may be provided for setting the display position of the display pointer 719 based on the display interval of the display pointer 719 selected by the selection unit. A setting means for setting the display interval of the display pointer 719 may be provided. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to execute the timing performance (operation performance) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and to provide various players with motivation. A timing effect (operation effect) can be executed.

In this embodiment, the ROM 222 of the audible lamp control device 113 stores the movable valve operation scenario 222b so that the audible lamp control device 113 can grasp the operation status of the movable valve 750, and the information of the movable valve operation scenario 222b is is updated from time to time, the current operation status and future operation details of the movable valve 750 are grasped, and the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 is set. Based on the information of the movable valve operation scenario 222b, an execution scenario for executing the movable operation of the decorative movable member, decorative lamp, sound (sound effect), etc. is generated, and based on the generated execution scenario , the timing at which a ball can enter the specific general ball entrance 630 may be indirectly set. Also, in this case, it is preferable that the movable operation of the decorative movable member executed based on the execution scenario, the decorative lamp, the output of the sound (sound effect), etc. are executed in a place where the player has difficulty in grasping them.

In the first embodiment, two storage devices (a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771) are provided in the storage channel 700e, a maximum of five balls are stored, and the second frame button 22b is operated. 79, the storage device is changed to the released (opened) state and the ball is discharged from the storage channel 700e, but other configurations may be used, for example, as shown in FIG. A plurality of storage channels 700e and 700g may be provided as shown. Here, with reference to FIG. 79, a modification of the configuration for storing balls on the game board 13 will be described. In addition, in this modification, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected about the element same as 1st Embodiment mentioned above, and the detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 79 is a partial front view of the game board 13 showing a modification of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 79, this modification differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a second storage channel 700g is provided above the storage channel 700e, and The second storage valve 771a, which had been previously installed, is provided in the storage channel 700g, and the second storage upper limit sensor S5 and the second storage detection sensor S6 for detecting the balls stored in the storage channel 700g are provided. They are different in one respect. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the above-described first embodiment, the operation of the first reservoir valve 770a and the second reservoir valve 771a is controlled using one reservoir valve solenoid 770b, but this modification example The difference is that each storage valve has an individual storage valve solenoid and that a release button is provided corresponding to each storage device (storage valve) (for example, see FIG. 87 to be described later).

The second storage channel 700g, which is newly provided in this modified example, is formed to make it more difficult for balls to flow in than the storage channel 700e. Inflow is possible. Specifically, among the balls that flow down the distribution channel 700d, of the balls distributed in the lower right direction (the direction of the storage channel 700e), about 1 ball flows into 30 balls. there is By adjusting the angle and position of the adjustment member 701a, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the balls flowing into the second storage channel 700g.

As shown in FIG. 79, in this modification, five balls can be stored in the storage channel 700e, and five balls can be stored in the second storage channel 700g, for a total of ten balls. there is Furthermore, the ball that has flowed into the second storage channel 700g, which is more difficult to flow in than the storage channel 700e, flows down toward the specific general ball inlet 630 without being affected by the variable operation of the movable valve 750. Therefore, the exit is provided so as to face the specific general entrance 630 . As a result, when the ball is stored in the flow path (second storage flow path 700g) in which it is difficult to store the ball, the player can be assured of receiving a special benefit (that the ball has entered the specific general ball entrance 630). Based on the prize ball) can be given. Therefore, the player always expects the balls to flow into the second storage channel 700g while playing the game.

Here, the game flow when the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 87 is used in this modified example will be described. First, the pachinko machine 10 of FIG. 87 will be described. FIG. 87 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of release buttons for releasing the storage device. Unlike the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) of the first embodiment described above, this pachinko machine is provided with a third frame button (second release button) 22c and release (opening) of the first storage device 770. ) Control is performed based on the operation of the second frame button 22b, and the release (opening) control of the second storage device 771 is performed based on the operation of the third frame button 22c. differ in Other elements are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 87, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a second frame button (release button) 22b on the left side of the lower tray unit 15, and a third frame button (second release button) on the right side of the lower tray unit 15. button) 22c is provided. Since the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are arranged in the lower tray unit 15 with an interval of about 20 cm, the player can However, it is difficult to operate with one hand at the same time. Between the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c, the first frame button (effect button) 22a is positioned between the second frame button (release button) 22c. button) 22b and a third frame button (second release button) 22c so as to block a straight line connecting the button surfaces of the third frame button (second release button) 22c. button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c.

Further, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (pressed down), control is performed to change the storage state of the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state. Executed, and when the third frame button (second release button) 22c is operated (pressed down), the storage state of the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is changed to the release (open) state. configured to be controlled.

As a result, the player can operate the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c at a desired timing, thereby accumulating according to the details of the player's operation. The release control of the device can be executed, and the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since it is difficult for the player to simultaneously operate the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c with one hand, (that is, while operating the operation handle 51 with one hand), the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are simultaneously operated, resulting in a plurality of Processing load due to simultaneous execution of storage device release control (e.g., movable valve movement control using an electric drive source), or simultaneous driving of an electric drive source (e.g., solenoid, motor, etc.) Temporary increases in power consumption can be suppressed. When the player simultaneously operates the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c with both hands, the operation handle 51 is not operated. Since it is in the state, even if the release control of a plurality of storage devices is executed at the same time, the game control for the operation to the operation handle 51 (for example, the firing control using the electric drive source) is not executed. It is possible to suppress the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 as a whole, or the temporary increase in power consumption due to the driving of the electric drive source (for example, solenoid, motor, etc.) at the same time.

In other words, by using this configuration, release control for the two storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) and game control (for example, launch control) for the operation of the operation handle 51 are performed at the same time. The processing load (control processing using the electric drive source) and power consumption (power consumption for driving the electric drive source) in the pachinko machine 10 temporarily increases. It can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 79, the description continues. 87 (the second frame button (release button) 22b and a third frame button (second release button) 22c), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) is operated based on the operation of the second frame button 22b. ) is opened (released), the ball flows out from the storage channel 700e, and the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is opened (released) based on the operation of the third frame button 22c. , the ball flows out from the storage channel 700g.

As shown in FIG. 79, the sphere flow path is formed so that the spheres flowing out from the storage channel 700e and the second storage channel 700g can all enter the specific general ball entrance 630. A sphere flow path is formed above the ball inlet 630 so that the spheres flowing out of the storage flow path 700e and the spheres flowing out of the second storage flow path 700g join together. As a result, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 depending on the flow condition of the ball flowing out from each storage channel (storage channel 700e, second storage channel 700g). Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement of the ball and enjoy the game.

87, the second frame button 22b and the third frame button 22c are arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate with one hand at the same time. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the balls collide with each other and the ball cannot enter the specific general ball entrance 630. - 特許庁

A second storage upper limit sensor S5 and a second storage detection sensor S6 are provided in the second storage channel 700g, and when the second storage upper limit sensor S5 detects a ball, that is, the second storage channel When it is detected that the upper limit amount of balls is stored in 700g, even if a game (right-handed game) is executed in this state, the balls cannot be stored in the second storage channel 700g any more. , a notification prompting the player to operate the third frame button 22c (for example, a display prompting the player to press the third frame button 22c on the third symbol display device 81; 22c, and by lighting the third frame button 22c (or its surroundings), a voice output prompting the user to press the third frame button 22c) are executed. As a result, the game is continued in a state in which the amount of balls stored in the second storage passage 700g, in which the outflow balls are likely to enter the specific general ball entrance 630, is at its upper limit, and the game is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

Also in the configuration of this modified example, the contents described in the description of the first embodiment may be appropriately combined. , the operation of the first reservoir valve 770a or the second reservoir valve 771a may be controlled so that only one ball flows out, or one operation of the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c may Based on this, it may be controlled to flow out all the stored spheres. Also, the number of balls to be discharged and the timing of the discharge of balls may be changed based on the operation content (for example, normal press or long press) of the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c. As a result, the operation means (second frame button 22b, third frame button 22b, third frame button) operated by the player in order to flow out the balls stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) from the storage device It is possible to diversify the operation timing and operation contents of 22c), and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In this modification, the second storage channel 700g is configured so that the stored balls flow out to a location facing the specific general ball entrance 630, which is advantageous for the player. A channel (second storage channel 700g) and a more disadvantageous storage channel (first storage channel 700e) are provided. Advantages and disadvantages are set for both of them, and it is sufficient that the advantageous storage channel is configured so that the balls are less likely to flow into the disadvantageous storage channel.

For example, a second movable valve is provided between the ball outlet of the second storage channel 700 g and the specific general ball inlet 630 , and the second movable valve moves the ball more than the movable valve 750 to the specific general ball inlet 630 . It may be configured such that the rate of being in an induced state that can be induced to is high. Also, the upper limit of the number of balls stored in each storage channel may be different for each storage channel.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. FIG. In the above-described first embodiment, the first frame button (production button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b are separately configured as operation means that can be operated by the player. In addition, as a timing effect (operation effect) for allowing the player to operate the operation means, a display pointer is displayed for each operation means (first frame button (effect button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b). It was configured to execute the effect display for scrolling movement.

In contrast, in the second embodiment, instead of the operating means (the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b) in the first embodiment, the first frame button (Production button) 1122a and a second frame button (release button) 1122b are provided. Interlocking means for pressing the second frame button (release button) 1122b in conjunction with the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 1122a is provided. A linked state in which the second frame button (release button) 1122b is operated based on the operation of the production button) 1122a, and a second frame button (release button) based on the operation of the first frame button (production button) 1122a. ) 1122b is provided with a variable control means for varying between a released state in which 1122b is not operated.

As a result, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed for the player to operate the first frame button (effect button) 1122a, and the action of the player operating the first frame button (effect button) 1122a is executed. Only by executing it, the second frame button (release button) 1122b can be operated. Therefore, the storage device can be released without making the player feel uncomfortable.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that instead of the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b, the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122a The difference is that a frame button 1122b is provided. Other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 80, a first frame button 1122a and a second frame button 1122b are provided in the central portion of the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. Next, with reference to FIG. 81, configurations of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 81(a) is a schematic plan view of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b, and FIG. 81(b) is an interlocking operation configuration of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b. It is a schematic diagram showing.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are configured to be connectable via interlocking means 1125. As shown in FIG. In addition, the second frame button 1122b is formed in a shape that is one size smaller than the first frame button 1122a, and a regulation wall 1123 is provided around it. This prevents the player from touching the second frame button 1122b and erroneously pressing it when the player tries to operate the first frame button 1122a at an unintended timing, for example.

Next, detailed configurations of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b will be described with reference to FIG. 81(b). Note that the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are provided with return means (for example, an elastic member using a spring member or a rubber member) for returning the pressed button to its normal position, or a button operable button. Light-emitting means and the like are provided for informing that the period of time has passed. detailed description is omitted.

A detection switch S22a is provided below the first frame button 1122a for detecting that it has been pressed, and a detection switch S22b is provided below the second frame button 1122b for detecting that it has been pressed. It is This detects that each frame button has been operated (depressed). Between the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b, interlocking means 1125 that can be engaged with both frame buttons is provided. , the second frame button 1122b is depressed in conjunction with the depression of the first frame button 1122a. Since the interlocking means 1125 is configured not to be pressed when the second frame button 1122b is pressed, the first frame button 1122a is not pressed in conjunction with the second frame button 1122b. do not have.

Next, referring to FIG. 82, the operation of pressing the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b will be described. FIG. 82(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the first frame button 1122a is pressed in the released state in which the interlocking means 1125 is buried, and FIG. 1122a is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the first frame button 1122a is pressed. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), while the interlocking means 1125 is in the released state, the first frame button 1122a and the interlocking means 1125 are not engaged. The interlocking means 1125 does not move in conjunction. Therefore, the second frame button 1122b is not pressed. On the other hand, while the interlocking means 1125 is in the interlocking state, the first frame button 1122a is engaged with the interlocking means 1125 as shown in FIG. , the interlocking means 1125 moves downward. Then, the second frame button 1122b engaged with the interlocking means 1125 also moves downward, and the pressing operation is detected by the detection switch S22b.

Also, the restriction wall 1123 provided around the second frame button 1122b is positioned around the second frame button 1122b even when the second frame button 1122b is pressed as shown in FIG. 82(b). , are provided so as to protrude toward the inside of the lower tray unit 15 . This makes it possible to smoothly restore the second frame button 1122b from the pressed position (the position shown in FIG. 82(b)) to the normal position (the position shown in FIG. 82(a)). In addition, when the pressing operation is performed in conjunction with the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a, the pressing operation in the one-sided holding state can be made smooth.

It should be noted that in this embodiment, each frame button (first frame button 1122a, second frame button 1122b) is operated by the player from the initial position (see FIG. 81(b)) where the player has not operated it. The movement distance to the detected detection position (see FIG. 82(b)) is configured to be the same, which will be explained in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 59) of the first embodiment. As described above, since the process based on the operation of the second frame button 1122b is preferentially executed (see S3002 in FIG. 59), the interlocking means 1125 enters the interlocking state, and the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are pressed at the same time, an effect based on the pressing motion of the second frame button 1122b is executed. Therefore, since an effect is executed based on the operation of the operation means (second frame button 1122b) different from the operation means (first frame button 1122a) operated by the player, an unexpected effect is provided to the player. can do.

Note that, in this embodiment, when the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are simultaneously pressed by the control processing, an effect based on the second frame button 1122b is executed. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the distance to move the first frame button 1122a from the initial position (see FIG. 81(b)) to the detection position (see FIG. 82(b)) is shorter than the It is preferable that the distance to move the two-frame button 1122b from the initial position (see FIG. 81(b)) to the detection position (see FIG. 82(b)) is shorter. As a result, when the interlocking means 1125 is in the interlocked state and the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are pressed simultaneously, the second frame button 1122b is detected first. An effect based on the 2-frame button 1122b can be preferentially executed.

Next, the contents of control for variably controlling the interlocking means 1125 in the second embodiment will be described. The interlocking means 1125 is variably operated between an interlocking state (protruding state) in which it engages with each frame button (first frame button 1122a and second frame button 1122b) and a released state (recessed state) in which the engagement is released. It is set to be in an interlocking state corresponding to the successful pressing period of the second frame button (release button) 22b set in the pressing period information storage area 223y of the first embodiment described above. be. As a result, in the timing effect (operation effect) of the first embodiment described above, the second frame button (release button) 1122b is pressed at the same timing as the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. can be made

The interlocking means may be changed to the interlocking state at a timing other than the timing described above. For example, the state of the interlocking means may be set by the player. As a result, the period during which the player sets the interlocking means to the interlocked state can be matched with the display period of the display pointer indicating the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 1122b in the timing effect (operation effect). Since the result of the game is affected depending on whether or not it is selected, the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) using the first frame button (effect button) 1122a in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect). In addition, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the above-described first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the second embodiment, the middle button display mode 716 for prompting the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 1122a and the timing for operating the first frame button (effect button) 1122a are set to A sub-display area Ds5 for displaying a suggestive display pointer is displayed. That is, in the first embodiment, the display pointer 719 is displayed for each of the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b, and each frame button is displayed to the player. Although it was designed to be operated, in reality, only by operating only the display pointer corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b at the timing that matches the bar display section 717, a privilege advantageous to the player is given. Therefore, there is a problem that a player who understands the mechanism does not participate in the game willingly.

On the other hand, according to the timing effect (operation effect) of the second embodiment, only the effect for the player to operate the first frame button 1122a is executed, and the plurality of display pointers 719 displayed in the effect are executed. The timing at which one of the display pointers 719 matches the bar display portion 717 is matched with the ball entry possible timing, and when the display pointer 719 passes near the bar display portion 717, the interlocking means 1125 is brought into the interlocking state. , and by operating the first frame button 1122a at the timing when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717, the second frame button 1122b is pressed at the timing when the ball can enter the specific general entrance 630. can be operated by pressing As a result, it is possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) without letting the player know which of the display pointers 719 that are scrolled and displayed indicates the timing at which the ball can be entered. Therefore, it is possible to operate the first frame button (button for effect) 1122a in a state in which all of the display pointers 719 scroll-displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) match the bar display portion 717, A player can be motivated to participate in a game.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the interlocking means 1125 for engaging the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b, and the interlocking means 1125 are connected to the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b. A variable control means is provided that can change between an interlocking state in which the second frame button 1122b is engaged and a disengaged state in which the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are disengaged. When the player operates the first frame button 1122a while being changed to the state, the second frame button 1122b is pressed in conjunction with the operation (pressing motion). Although it is possible to operate the second frame button 1122b without making the person feel uncomfortable, another configuration that achieves the same effect as the second embodiment may be used.

For example, by configuring the interlocking means 1125 with a magnetic material and energizing the interlocking means 1125, a plurality of operating means (the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b) are interlocked to operate, A plurality of operation means (the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b) may be configured to be in a released state in which they do not operate in conjunction by demagnetizing the interlocking means 1125. Means capable of switching between the interlocked state and the released state may be used using a structure different from that of the second embodiment. Furthermore, in the above-described second embodiment, a configuration in which two operating means can be interlocked is used, but it may be configured to interlock three or more operating means, or It may be configured to be controllable so that a combination of a plurality of operation means that are in an interlocked state is different. As a result, various combinations of operation effects can be executed based on the operation performed by the player on the operating means, so that a game (effect) with unexpectedness can be provided to the player.

Also, for example, a frame button unit 1022 as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 may be provided as a modification of the second embodiment. This frame button unit 1022 is a unit structure having a second frame button 1022b as a release button so as to surround a first frame button 1022a as a production button.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, a frame button unit 1022 is provided in the central portion of the lower tray unit 15 . In this way, a plurality of frame buttons (the first frame button 1022a and the second frame button 1022b) are configured as a unit and arranged collectively in one place, so that the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively used. can be done.

Next, the configuration of the frame button unit 1022 in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the frame button unit 1022 is operated by the player, and FIG. 85(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the frame button unit 1022. FIG. FIG. 86(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the frame button unit 1022 is operated (depressed) in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button 10222b of the frame button unit 1022 is restricted. ) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the frame button unit 1022 is operated (depressed) in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b of the frame button unit 1022 is released.

First, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the frame button unit 1022 of the second embodiment is configured so that when the player presses the first frame button 1022a and the second frame button 1022b, the player's hand presses the first frame button 1022a and the second frame button 1022b. The first frame button 1022a is configured in a circular shape with a diameter of 5 cm so as to abut on both of the two, and the second frame button 1022b is configured in an annular shape with a diameter of 7 cm with the first frame button 1022a inside. there is In other words, the frame button unit 1022 has a circular unit structure with a diameter of 7 cm as a whole.

Next, the configuration of the frame button unit 1022 will be described with reference to FIG. 85(b). As shown in FIG. 85(b), the frame button unit 1022 is provided so as to protrude from the lower plate unit 15 toward the surface side of the pachinko machine 10 (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85(b)). Further, of the frame button unit 1022, the first frame button 1022a is configured to protrude toward the surface side of the pachinko machine 10 (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85(b)) rather than the second frame button 1022b. . By configuring in this manner, the first frame button 1022a can be operated (depressed) even in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b is restricted.

A detection switch S22a for detecting that the first frame button 1022a is pressed is provided in the pressing direction of the first frame button 1022a (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85(b)). A detection switch S22b for detecting that the second frame button 1022b has been pressed is provided in the pressing direction of the button 1022b (downward from the viewpoint in FIG. 85(b)). Furthermore, a regulating member 1023a is provided as a regulating means for regulating the pressing action of moving the second frame button 1022b, which is in a non-pressed state (normal state), to a pressed state (pressed state). By the operation of the solenoid 1023, which is a physical drive source, the second frame button 1022b can be changed between a regulating position for regulating the pressing motion of the second frame button 1022b and a release position for not regulating the pressing motion of the second frame button 1022b.

FIG. 85(b) shows a state in which the regulating member 1023a is positioned at the regulating position, and the regulating member 1023a regulates the movement of the second frame button 1022b from the normal state to the depressed state. . The regulating member 1023a is made of an elastically variable material (for example, rubber). The detection switch S22b cannot detect the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b unless the pressing operation is performed with a strong force. With this configuration, the second frame button 1022b can always be pressed, but the pressing force required for the pressing operation can be changed depending on the state (according to the state of the regulating member 1023a). becomes possible. In addition, regarding the pressing force required to press each frame button, the second frame button 1022b, the first frame button 1022a, and the regulating member 1023a in the state where the regulating member 1023a is located at the release position are at the regulating position. The pressing force required for the pressing operation increases in the order of the second frame button 1022b in the positioned state. As a result, when the second frame button 1022b is in the restricted state, only the first frame button 1022a is made easier to be pressed, and when the second frame button 1022b is in the released state, the pressing operation on the first frame button 1022a is made easier. can be made easier to press the second frame button 1022b.

In this modified example, a configuration is used in which the second frame button 1022b can always be pressed, but other configurations may be used. The second frame button 1022b may not be pressed when the restricting member 1023a is positioned at the restricting position.

Further, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 85(b), the distance from when the first frame button 1022a is pressed until it is detected by the detection switch S22a (first frame button pressing stroke) 1022b to be detected by the detection switch S22b (second frame button depression stroke). As a result, even in a state where the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b is restricted, it is possible to perform the pressing operation on the first frame button 1022a without discomfort.

In each of the embodiments described above, the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) and the second storage device (second storage valve 771a) are used as storage means for storing balls in the storage channel 700e. was provided, and the variable operation of the storage means was controlled so that one ball flowed out (flowed down) each time the second frame button 22b was operated. Alternatively, only the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) may be provided.

In this case, when the second frame button 22b is normally operated (normally depressed), the storage device is opened (released) for a period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds) during which one ball flows out. It may be configured such that when the second frame button 22b is pressed for a long time, the open (released) state is continued until all the balls stored in the storage means flow out. Here, as a method for determining whether the second frame button 22b is being pressed for a long time, the first pressing operation performs the same processing as the normal pressing, and the opening period of the first storage device 770 based on the normal pressing is It is preferable to determine the operation status of the second frame button 22b again at the timing of the end, and to determine that the long press operation is performed when the second frame button 22b is continuously pressed at that time. As a result, when it is determined that the continuous pressing for a predetermined period is being executed, the first storage device 770 can respond quickly to the operation of the second frame button 22b compared to the case where the operation of opening the first storage device 770 is executed. Device 770 can be opened.

Further, by using such a configuration, in order to enter all the balls stored in the first storage device 770 into the specific general ball entrance in the timing effect (operation effect), the second frame button 22b is pressed. , and wants to have at least one of the balls stored in the first storage device 770 enter the specific general ball entrance, can select a long press operation. It becomes possible, and it is possible to execute a performance game that matches the skill of the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the operation pattern of the movable valve 750, an operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 23(a)) is provided in which the induction state is changed a plurality of times in a short period of time. Therefore, when the long press operation is selected at the timing when the movable valve 750 executes the action scenario 3, many balls can enter the specific general ball entrance.

In addition, when the frame button 22b capable of executing the long-pressing operation is provided in this manner, a notification effect indicating the timing at which the action scenario 3 is executed may be executed. As a result, the player can select the normal operation or the long-pressing operation while guessing based on the content of the notification effect, and can prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Further, when the frame button 22b is pressed for a long time, the first storage device 770 is not kept open (released), but controlled to open and close the first storage device 770 at specific intervals. good too. In this case, the specific interval should be set based on the operation scenario (operation pattern) of the movable valve 750 . As a result, when the first ball flowed out based on the long-pressing operation enters the specific general ball entering means, the remaining balls can also flow out at a timing that facilitates entry.

In each of the embodiments described above, as a configuration for storing balls in the storage channel 700e or the storage channel 700g, a storage valve that is variably operated between a storage state and a release state by an electric drive source is used for storage. Although a device is provided, other configurations may be used, for example, a configuration in which balls are retained by magnetic force may be used. In this case, a variable member is used to change the magnetic body having a magnetic force between a storage position where it approaches the sphere and a release position where it moves away from the sphere. The state and the released state may be variably controlled.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the ball flowing out from the storage means (storage device) can be varied between a guided state in which the ball is guided to a specific ball entrance means (specific general ball entrance 630) and a difficult state in which guidance is difficult. As such, a movable valve 750 is provided that is variably operated between a protruded position and a retracted (retracted) position in a predetermined variable pattern (operation scenario). Any other configuration may be used as long as it can be changed between a guided state in which the sphere can be guided and a difficult state in which guidance is difficult. If the ball enters a predetermined opening among the plurality of openings, the ball is guided to the specific general ball entrance 630, and if the ball enters the other openings, the specific general A rotating body configured so that the ball is not guided to the ball entrance 630 may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, a frame button is used to determine that the operating means has been operated when the player presses it. A lever-shaped operation means that can determine whether the player has been operated by tilting left or right or forward or backward, or can determine whether the player has touched or approached the operation means. A touch sensor type operation means, or a wireless operation means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each of the above-described embodiments, among the balls fired by the right-handed game, the balls that flow into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 and do not enter the variable winning device 65 and the second ball entrance 640 are stored. It is configured to flow into the flow path 700e, and one ball is configured to flow into the storage flow path 700e for about 30 balls hit by a right-handed game. The rate at which the balls flow into the storage channel 700e may be determined as appropriate, and the configuration of the right side area of the game board may also be changed as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement of components in the board unit 700 may be different from those in the above-described embodiments so that the rate of flow into the storage channel 700e is increased.

Next, another example of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in another example. The game board 13 in this example and the game board 13 used in each of the above-described embodiments are different in the layout relationship of each configuration in the board unit 700 provided in the right side area of the game board. are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the game board 13 of this example, similar to the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. About 95% of the balls (about 95 out of 100 balls) launched into the right game area by the game flow into the inlet 700a of the board unit 700, and about 93% of the balls that flowed into the inlet (launched by the right-handed game). About 90% of the collected balls) flow down toward the variable winning device 65 after passing through the through gate 67 .

When the variable winning device 65 is in an open state (open state), the ball flowing down toward the variable winning device 65 enters the variable winning device 65, and the variable winning device 65 is in a closed state (closed state). In the case of , it passes through the variable winning device 65 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

A ball that reaches the electric accessory 640a at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is closed flows down on the closed electric accessory 640a and into the distribution channel 700d (see FIG. 3). An adjustment member (such as a nail) is provided so that one out of about nine balls flowing into the sorting flow path 700d flows into the storage flow path 700e. That is, in the configuration of the game board 13 in this example, one out of about ten balls launched into the right game area by the right-handed game flows into the storage channel 700e (that is, in the board unit 700 The number of balls (10 balls) less than the number of prize balls (15 balls) of the specific general ball entrance 630 (see FIG. 3)) provided in the ball flow into the storage channel 700e) It is configured.

According to the game board 13 configured in this manner, the ball hit to the right during the jackpot game can be efficiently entered into the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable prize winning device 65 is closed during the jackpot game. Since the balls that have passed through the variable prize winning device 65 without entering the variable prize winning device 65 at the timing (during the interval between rounds) can be efficiently flowed into the storage channel 700e, the player can execute the jackpot game in an advantageous manner. be able to.

However, when the game board 13 configured in this way is used, by hitting the ball toward the right side area of the game board during the normal game, it is possible to use the game board 13 as compared with the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. Since it becomes easy for the ball to flow into the flow path 700e, there is a risk that the player may enter the ball into the specific general ball entrance 630 during the normal game.

On the other hand, in this example, as described above with reference to FIG. Even if the ball is made to flow into the storage channel 700e during the game, the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second 2 storage device 771) can be made difficult to grasp the release timing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of executing a game in which a ball is entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 during a normal game and acquiring a large amount of balls.

Furthermore, as described above in each of the above embodiments, the movable valve 750 is configured to move in various operation patterns, so that a game in which a ball is entered into the specific general ball entrance 630 during a normal game is performed. The act of executing and acquiring a large number of balls can be suppressed more.

In the case of using the game board 13 configured as in this example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied even during a normal game, the balls stored in the storage channel 700e The timing of releasing the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) so that the ball enters the mouth 630 (the timing of operating the frame button 22) may be notified. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out for a predetermined number of times (eg, 500 times) consecutively, or when a predetermined time (eg, 3 hours) has passed since the game was started, When a specific variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern to be executed by the 3-symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with means (for example, a real-time clock) capable of determining the current time, and the current time is specified. Triggered by the time (for example, noon), it is preferable to execute the timing notification for notifying the player of the timing described above.

As a result, the player who has not won the special symbol jackpot can be provided with a game that can be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period of time. You can prevent yourself from getting bored. Also, the duration of the timing notification from the execution of the timing notification to the end thereof may be set to always be a constant time, or may be set to a different time each time. In addition, the condition for ending the timing notification is not only the passage of time, but also the fact that a predetermined number (for example, two) of balls enter the specific general ball entrance 630 during the period in which the timing notification is being executed. It can be used as a condition. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the specific general ball entrance 630 during the period in which the timing notification is executed.

It should be noted that, when such timing notification is executed, the game that is advantageous to the player is the right-handed game. "Aim right" is displayed as a guidance display. This guidance display is set to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 from a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) before the timing notification is actually executed. This is a preparatory notification for the purpose of storing balls in the storage channel 700e before the timing notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which no balls are stored in the storage channel 700e when the timing notification is performed.

Furthermore, whether or not to execute the above-described preparation notification is determined based on the determination results of the determination means (storage upper limit sensor S1, storage detection sensor S2) that determines the presence or absence of balls stored on the storage channel 700e. should be determined by Specifically, when the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects a ball, it is preferable to set so that the notification for preparation is not executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from wastefully executing a right-handed game by executing the preparation notification in a state in which a new ball cannot flow into the storage channel 700e. can. In addition, the period during which this preparation notification is executed may be set as appropriate. ), the length of the notification period for preparation may be variable based on the number of balls. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls are not stored in the storage channel 700e in the state where the timing notification is executed, and to wastefully execute the right-handed game for the player. You can prevent it from happening.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration of this example shown in FIG. By hitting the number of balls (for example, 10 balls) smaller than the number of balls (for example, 15 balls) that are paid out when the balls enter the specific general ball entrance 630, the balls are placed in the storage channel 700e. Even if a configuration that allows inflow is used, since the cover member 710 is provided to make it difficult to visually recognize the operating state of the movable valve 750 from the outside, the balls stored in the storage channel 700e are not allowed to enter the specific general ball entrance 630. It is possible to make it difficult to release the storage device (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) at the timing of entering the ball.

In addition, in this another example, the number of balls (10 balls) that is less than the number of prize balls (15 balls) paid out when the ball enters the specific general ball entrance 630 is hit to the storage channel 700e. Since it can be made to flow in, the ball is stored in the storage channel 700e during the normal game (that is, the game state in which the variable winning device 65 is not opened and the electric accessory 640a is difficult to be opened). Even if there is no state, even if the above-described timing notification is executed, and the ball is stored in the storage channel 700e and then entered into the specific general ball entrance 630, the game that is advantageous to the player ( It is possible to provide a game in which the number of balls paid out is greater than the number of balls hit.

As a result, the player who has not won the special symbol jackpot can be provided with a game that can be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period of time. You can prevent yourself from getting bored.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Characteristic group A> (Suggestion of release timing of storage device by production)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. A1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the game machine A1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball enters the specific ball entry means. It is structured so that it is easy to Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing at which the ball is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is reduced.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

In the gaming machine A1, storage means storing a plurality of variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means, and one variable pattern selected from the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means. and variable pattern setting means for setting.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, one variable pattern is set and varied by the variable means from a plurality of variable patterns. By easily aiming at the timing, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is excessively advantageous.

Here, the storage means storing a plurality of variable patterns is stored with a plurality of types of variable patterns in which a first period in which the variable means is in the first state and a second period in which the variable means is in the second state are defined. It is a means of In addition, this variable pattern may be one variable pattern in which the minimum unit for varying the variable means may be set. The motion may be one variable pattern. In the former case described above, one variable pattern is set for one operation of the variable means. can be made difficult to grasp. Further, in the latter case described above, the execution period of one variable pattern can be lengthened, so the frequency of setting variable patterns can be suppressed.

In the game machine A2, the variable pattern setting means repeatedly sets the variable pattern in a predetermined order after the power is turned on.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, since the variable patterns after the power is turned on are repeatedly set in a predetermined order, one variable pattern is biasedly selected, which is advantageous. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the disadvantage is biased.

Here, after the power is turned on means after the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the variable operation of the variable means is executed, and the variable patterns of the variable means are set in a predetermined order. By doing so, the above-described effects can be obtained.

In addition, in the game machine A3, a process is added to change the period from when the game machine is turned on until the execution of the variable operation of the variable means is started, and the variable pattern of 1 is biasedly selected. It is also possible to change the variable operation to be executed after a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on while suppressing problems. That is, by changing (delaying) the period from when the power is turned on to when the execution of the variable operation is started by, for example, 3 seconds, the variable operation is executed after a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on, and the variable operation is performed for 3 seconds. It can be delayed (delayed). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the time elapsed from power-on being measured and the timing at which the variable means is brought into the first state from being grasped based on the measurement result. In this case, as a method for differentiating the variable operation to be executed a predetermined time after the power is turned on, in the process executed after the power is turned on, the timing to start controlling the variable operation is determined by lottery, or is determined in advance. A method of sequentially executing the set start timings is conceivable.

In addition, when a setting order storage means is provided in which the order of setting the variable patterns of the variable means is predetermined, and the variable patterns are set such that the order stored in the setting order storage means is repeatedly executed. may be provided with variable pattern determination means for determining which variable pattern stored in the setting order storage means is to be set as the first variable pattern to be executed when starting the variable operation of the variable means. As a result, it is possible to change the variable operation to be executed after a predetermined period of time from the power-on, while suppressing the problem of biased selection of one variable pattern.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A3, a suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player, and a mode of the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means. and suggestive effect mode setting means for setting based on the variable pattern executed by the variable control means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the mode of the suggestive effect is set based on the variable pattern in which the variable means is variable, so that the variable is easily executed. There is an effect that it is possible to set the execution of suggestive effects in accordance with the pattern.

When using the configuration of the gaming machine A4, it is preferable to prevent the player from predicting the timing at which the variable means is positioned in the first state. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a shielding member (blindfold member) for making it difficult to visually recognize the variable operation of the variable means. As a result, the player can grasp the timing when the variable means changes to the first state based on the suggested performance to be executed, instead of directly looking at the variable means, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, when the configuration of the gaming machine A2 is provided, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the variable means will be in the first state. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine A4, the suggestive effect mode set by the suggestive effect mode setting means is set corresponding to each of the plurality of variable patterns.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the mode of suggestive performance is set corresponding to each of the plurality of variable patterns, so even if the variable pattern is switched, the suggestive performance is beneficial to the player. can be easily executed.

Incidentally, as a suggestive effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means, a moving object is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device, and the timing when the moving object is positioned at a specific position coincides with the operation timing. It is conceivable that the timing at which the sound executed as the command becomes a predetermined sound coincides with the operation timing. In this case, it is preferable to use a preliminary effect that allows the player to recognize that the operation timing is approaching. Specifically, it is preferable to use an effect in which a moving object is displayed moving in a straight line at a constant speed toward a specific position, or an effect using voice to count down a number toward a specific number (for example, 0). As a result, the timing of operating the operating means can be grasped to some extent in advance, so even if the operating timing is set only for a short period, the operating means can be appropriately operated.

On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for the player to operate the operation means at an operation timing that is advantageous to the player, it is preferable to execute an inhibition effect different from the preliminary effect described above. As this hindrance effect, it is conceivable to execute the preliminary effect with different timings. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to operate the operation means at an operation timing that is advantageous to the player.

The game machine A4 or A5 has a determination means for determining the contents of the variable pattern executed by the variable control means, and the suggestive effect execution means performs a start timing based on the contents determined by the determination means. A game machine A6, characterized in that it starts the suggestive effect.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the suggestive effect is started at the start timing based on the variable content of the variable pattern that is actually performed. There is an effect that a suggestion production can be executed.

Here, as the content of the variable pattern, content information indicating whether or not the variable pattern is advantageous to the player, content information indicating the period in which the variable means is actually in the first state, variable Content information or the like indicating the remaining period until the pattern is switched can be considered.

In the gaming machine A6, the variable means has period determination means for determining a period during which the variable means is in the first state, and the suggestive effect execution means executes the suggestive effect at a timing based on the determination result of the period determiner. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that it is to start.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of the game machine A6, the suggestive effect is started at the timing based on the result of determining the period of the first state. There is an effect that the suggestion performance can be easily executed at the timing when the ball flowing out from the ball is changed to the first state and can be moved to the variable means.

In any one of the game machines A3 to A7, the operation timing of the operation means suggested by the suggestive effect is that at least one ball flowed out from the storage means when the operation means is operated based on the operation timing. is set movably to said variable means which is changed to said first state.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A3 to A7, by operating the operation means at the timing based on the suggestive effect, the game ball can be easily entered into the specific ball entry means. , there is an effect that the interest in operating the operating means can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines A2 to A8, timing specifying means for specifying timing at which the variable means changes to the first state based on the variable pattern stored in the storage means, and outflow from the storage means. period setting means for setting a period for the ball to reach the variable means; A game machine A9 characterized by having an operation timing setting means for setting the operation timing of and a suggestive performance execution means for executing a performance suggestive of the operation timing set by the operation timing setting means.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A2 to A8, the timing of changing to the first state is specified, and the balls flowing out from the storage means reach the variable means from the specified timing. A value obtained by subtracting the period until the operation is set as the operation timing, and the performance suggesting the operation timing is executed, so that the precision of the performance suggesting the operation timing can be improved, and the player participates in the performance enthusiastically. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine A9, a measuring means for measuring a period until the ball flowing out from the storage means reaches the variable means, a measuring period measured by the measuring means, and a period set by the period setting means. and period correcting means for correcting the setting contents of the period setting means based on the result of the judgment by the period judging means.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the period until the ball actually reaches can be measured, and the set period can be corrected based on the measurement result. There is an effect that it is possible to further enhance the performance, and that the player can be motivated to participate in the presentation.

In any one of the game machines A4 to A10, a ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determination means for performing determination when a ball enters the ball entrance means, and A performance executing means for executing an effect for suggesting a determination result by the determining means, and a privilege game executing means for performing a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result. , the game machine A11, wherein the suggestive effect is executed by the suggestive effect executing means based on the determination result of the determining means.

According to the gaming machine A11, the suggestive effect is executed based on the determination result of the determination means for determining whether or not the privilege game is to be executed, so that the player can identify the game aiming at the privilege game. The ball-entering means can be associated with a game in which a ball is entered, and there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

Here, as conditions for executing the suggestive effect, for example, the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result that the privilege game is executed, or the determination result that the privilege game is not executed (so-called failure) is predetermined. A case where the number of times is consecutive can be considered.

Further, the timing at which the suggestive effect is executed may be a period before the determination result of the determination means is notified to the player, or may be the timing at which the determination result is notified, or when the determination result is a specific determination result. In the case of , it may be during a privilege game that is executed after the determination result is notified. If the suggestion performance is executed during the privilege game, it is possible for the player to simultaneously play the privilege game and the game of entering the ball into the specific ball-entering means, which is more advantageous to the player. A game state can be provided.

<Feature B group> (execution of production using release operation)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. B1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine B1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball enters the specific ball entering means. It is structured so that it is easy to Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing at which the ball is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is lowered.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

In the gaming machine B1, a ball entering means that is provided in the game area and that allows a ball to enter, a determining means that performs determination when a ball enters the ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the effect execution means is a gaming machine B2, characterized in that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a specific effect indicating that it is time to operate the operating means is executed.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, an operation is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied as an effect for suggesting the determination result of the determination means for determining whether or not the privilege game is executed. Since the specific effect suggesting the operation timing of the means is executed, it is possible to provide the player with the privilege game or the specific effect based on the determination result of the determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the game machine B1 or B2 has a storage determination means for determining that the storage means stores balls, and the storage determination means determines that the storage means stores the balls. A game machine B3, characterized in that it is at least one condition for establishing a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the specific performance is executed when at least the storage determination means determines that the balls are stored in the storage means. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball does not flow out from the storage means even though the operation means is operated at the operation timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the effect executing means, when executing the effect for suggesting the specific determination result, produces a effect for suggesting a determination result different from the specific determination result. A game machine B4 characterized in that it is easier to execute the specific performance than when it is executed.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result that the privilege game is executed, the determination result other than the specific determination result Since the specific performance is more likely to be executed than in a certain case, both the privilege game and the specific performance can be easily given to the player at once. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B4, the operation timing suggested by the specific effect executed by the effect execution means is at least one ball flowed out from the storage means when the operation is executed at the operation timing. is set movably to said variable means which is changed to said second state.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines B2 to B4, the operation timing at which at least one ball discharged from the storage means reaches the variable means changed to the second state is controlled by the specific effect. Therefore, when the ball stored in the storage means is caused to flow out from the storage means while the performance that suggests the determination result of the determination means is being executed, the ball enters the specific ball entrance means. It can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines B2 to B5, the effect executing means notifies information based on the determination result by the determining means based on the operation of the operation means during the execution of the specific effect. A game machine B6 characterized by executing a notification effect.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines B2 to B5, information based on the determination result of the determination means is obtained based on the fact that the operation means is operated during the period during which the specific effect is being executed. Since the notification effect to notify is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the action of causing the balls stored in the storage means to flow out from the storage means.

In the gaming machines B2 to B6, an advantage suggesting effect execution means for executing an advantage suggesting effect suggesting the operation timing of the operating means that is advantageous to the player during the period when the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game. A gaming machine B7 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B2 to B6, during the period when the privilege game is executed, the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player is suggested by the advantage suggesting effect, so the privilege The game value during execution of the game can be increased, and the player's desire to play can be increased.

<Characteristic group C> (makes the operation of the movable valve difficult to see)
A ball entering means that allows a ball to enter, a first state in which a ball is likely to enter the ball entering means, and a second state in which a ball is less likely to enter the ball entering means than in the first state. and a switching means capable of switching between a difficult state in which at least a part of the variable means is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside and an easy state in which it is easier to visually recognize than the difficult state, and a predetermined condition is established. and switching control means for switching from the difficult state to the easy state by the switching means when the game is in a state of difficulty.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable means is provided that is variable between an allowable position that allows a game ball hit on a game board to enter a specific area and a regulation position that regulates it. By passing the ball through the variable means in a state in which is at the allowable position, the ball passes through the specific area, giving a privilege to the player. (For example, JP-A-2015-083161).

In such a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the specific area depending on the timing at which the game ball hit on the game board reaches the movable means. It was possible to entertain whether or not the timing reached the variable means. However, since it is configured so that the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, there is a problem that the action of causing the game ball to reach the variable means is performed in accordance with the timing when the movable means reaches the allowable position. there were. In addition, since the player can grasp the operating state of the movable means, the player will quickly perceive that the game ball that is hit will not enter the specific ball entrance, thereby reducing the player's desire to play. I had a problem with it.

According to the gaming machine C1, a variable state that can be changed between a first state in which a ball is likely to enter the ball entering means and a second state in which a ball is less likely to enter the ball entering means than in the first state. Since at least part of the variable state of the means can be switched between a difficult state that is difficult to visually recognize from the outside and an easy state that is easier to visually recognize than the difficult state, the player does not have to grasp the state of the variable means. The state and the state to be grasped can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the player's early detection that the launched game ball does not enter the specific ball entrance. .

In the game machine C1, the switching means has a shielding member arranged on the front side of the variable means, and irradiation means capable of irradiating the shielding member with light of a specific color from the rear side. and the shielding means is configured to be in the difficult state when not irradiated by the irradiation means, and to be changed to the easy state by being irradiated by the irradiation means. Characteristic gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the difficulty state and the easy state can be switched by irradiating light from the irradiating means, so there is an effect that the switching means can be easily designed. .

In the game machine C1, the switching means has a movable member movable between a position on the front side of the variable means and a retracted position retracted from the front side of the variable means, and the switching control means moves the movable member. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that switching to the difficult state is performed by moving the movable member to the front side position, and switching to the easy state is performed by moving the movable member to the retracted position.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, by moving the movable member, it is possible to switch between the difficult state and the easy state, so there is an effect that the switching means can be easily designed. be.

In the game machine C1, the switching means includes a shielding member arranged on the front side of the variable means, an irradiation means capable of irradiating the shielding member with light, and and variable means for varying the incident angle of the light irradiated to the light, wherein the shielding means varies the incident angle of the light to the easy state by setting the incident angle of the light to a first angle by the variable means. A game machine C4 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the shielding member can be changed to the easy state only by varying the incidence of light on the shielding member, so that the switching means can be easily designed. has the effect of being able to

In the game machine C4, the variable means is movable means for moving the shielding member, and by moving the shielding member by the movable means, the incident angle of the light is set to the first angle. A gaming machine C5 characterized by:

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, by moving the shielding member, each incident light is set to the first angle, so that the shielding member can be put into the easy state without moving the irradiation means. Since it can be varied, there is an effect that the switching means can be easily designed.

Any one of the game machines C1 to C5 has ball detection means capable of detecting a ball flowing down toward the variable means, and the predetermined condition is established when the ball detection means detects a ball. A gaming machine C6 characterized by:

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C5, when it is detected that the ball flows down toward the variable means, the predetermined condition is satisfied, so the ball is blocked by the shielding member. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the flow cannot be visually recognized.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C6, a ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determination means for performing determination when a ball enters the ball entrance means, and Effect execution means for executing an effect for suggesting a determination result by the determination means; privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result; and the determination means. and measuring means for measuring the number of determinations, and when the measurement means measures the number of determinations in which the determination result of the determination means continuously becomes a determination result other than the specific determination result for a predetermined number of times, A gaming machine C7 characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C6, when the determination result of the determination means is other than the specific determination result continuously for a predetermined number of times, the shielding member can be set to the easy state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming extremely disadvantageous.

In any one of the game machines C2 to C7, a second irradiation means for irradiating light different from the irradiation means, and based on the establishment of a first condition, for either the irradiation means or the second irradiation means irradiation control means for executing irradiation control; and second condition satisfaction determination means for determining whether a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the first condition; The irradiation control means executes the irradiation control on the irradiation means when the second condition is satisfied, and controls the second irradiation means when the second condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine C8 characterized in that it executes the above-described irradiation control.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C2 to C7, when the first condition for executing the irradiation control is satisfied, based on the determination result of whether or not the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, even if the shielding member is not set to the easy state, the irradiation control is executed by the second irradiation means, so that the effect of light irradiation is reduced. has the effect of being able to suppress

By arranging the irradiating means and the second irradiating means close to each other, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity with respect to the effect of the light irradiation. Further, when the configuration of the game machine C8 is used, the contents of the irradiation control by the irradiation control means are made the same, and switching control for switching only the output destination for executing the control between the irradiation means and the second irradiation means can be executed. do it. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control load of the irradiation control means, and to suppress the deterioration of the rendering effect.

<Characteristic group D> (Rhythm game is set so that the operation means is operated at a specific timing)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. D1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine D1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball is entered into the specific ball entering means. easily configured. Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing at which the ball is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is lowered.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine D1, an effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed in accordance with an operation to the operation means; effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode to a specific effect mode when the means is operated; and specific timing setting means for setting a specific timing based on the state of the variable means varied by the variable control means. and operation effect setting means for setting the specific period in the operation effect based on the specific timing set by the specific timing setting means when a specific condition is established. D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the effect execution means executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed in accordance with the operation corresponding to the operation means, and the operation means is operated during the operation effect. Since the specific period in which the effect mode is changed to the specific effect mode based on the operation can be set by the specific timing set based on the state of the variable means, the operation effect and the state of the variable means can be set. can be associated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

In the game machine D2, the specific timing is the timing at which at least one ball flowing out from the storage means can be moved to the variable means changed to the first state when the operation means is operated. A gaming machine D3 characterized by being set by.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D2, when the operation means is operated, at least one ball flowing out from the storage means can be moved to the variable means changed to the first state as the specific timing. Therefore, by operating the operation means so as to change the effect mode to the specific effect mode in the operation effect, the ball stored in the storage means can be easily entered into the specific ball entering means. can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the operation performance, and the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine D2 or D3, operation determining means for determining whether the operating means is operated within the specific period, storage means for storing information updated based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and and frequency varying means for varying the frequency of establishment of a specific condition based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2 or D3, the establishment frequency of the specific condition is varied depending on whether or not the operation means is operated within the specific period in the operation performance. can be made to participate in the operation performance willingly. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the operation production can be enhanced.

In this case, it is desirable to increase the frequency of establishment of the specific condition as the number of times the operation means is operated within the specific period set during the operation presentation increases. By configuring in this manner, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means within the specific period, and there is an effect that the effect of the operation presentation can be further enhanced.

In any one of the game machines D2 to D4, a second operation means different from the operation means is provided, and the operation effect executed by the effect execution means is executed according to an operation on the operation means or the second operation means. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the performance mode is variable.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, it is possible to increase the number of operating means that can be operated by the operation presentation, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In any one of the game machines D2 to D5, the operation effect executed by the effect executing means is set for the specific period based on a predetermined music, and corresponds to the progress of the predetermined music. specific period settable area storage means for storing a plurality of specific period settable areas in which the specific period can be set; and the plurality of specific period settable areas stored in the specific period settable area storage means; Matching point determination means for determining a point where the specific timing matches the specific timing, and specific period setting means for setting the specific period of the operation effect to the point determined to match by the matching point determining means. A gaming machine D6 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D6, in the operation effect in which the specific period is set based on the music, the specific period of the operation effect is set at the place where the specific period settable region corresponding to the progress of the music matches the specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to operate the operation means at a specific timing by using a specific period corresponding to the music used for the operation presentation, and there is an effect that the production effect of the operation presentation can be further enhanced.

<Feature group E> (correction of operation effect based on ball flow situation)
a ball path through which the ball can pass; ball passage detection means for detecting that the ball has passed through a specific position in the ball path; and ball passage detection means for detecting the ball after a predetermined condition is established. period setting means for setting a first period as a period until the time period is set; notification timing setting means for setting notification timing for notifying a specific effect mode based on the first period set in the period setting means; and effect notification means for notifying the specific effect mode at the notification timing set by the notification timing setting means; and period specification for specifying a passage period from when the predetermined condition is established until the ball passage detection means detects the ball. means, period determining means for determining the passage period specified by the period specifying means and the first period set by the period setting means, and determining the period based on the result of determination by the period determining means and period correcting means for correcting the first period set by the setting means.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines execute an effect corresponding to the period during which the game balls are flowing, in order to notify the player of the flowing state of the game balls in an easy-to-understand manner. (For example, JP-A-2011-235016). In addition, there is a configuration in which a holding device capable of holding game balls struck on the game board is provided, and the game balls held in the holding device flow down to the ball entrance when the player performs a releasing operation. . (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, since it is possible to notify the player of the game ball flow-down state in an easy-to-understand manner, the player can enjoy the game based on the content of the notification (content of the performance). In addition, since it is determined whether or not the ball enters the specific ball entrance depending on the timing at which the game ball hit on the game board reaches the movable means, the player is asked at what timing the game ball It was something that could be enjoyed whether or not it reached the movable means. However, if there is a difference between the period during which the effect corresponding to the period during which the game ball flows and the period during which the actual game ball flows, the state of the game ball flowing down and the effect will differ. There is a problem that the player is confused, and the performance effect is lowered. In addition, since it is configured so that the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, there is a problem that the action of causing the game ball to reach the variable means is performed in accordance with the timing when the movable means reaches the allowable position. there were. In addition, since the player can grasp the operating state of the movable means, the player will quickly perceive that the game ball that is hit will not enter the specific ball entrance, thereby reducing the player's desire to play. I had a problem with it.

According to the gaming machine E1, the first period referred to when setting the notification timing for notifying the specific effect mode can be corrected based on the passage period during which the ball actually passes. It is possible to easily match the situation with the execution situation of the specific effect mode. As a result, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Here, when the configuration of the gaming machine E1 is used in a gaming machine in which an effect for suggesting whether or not the ball passes through a specific ball path is executed as a specific effect mode, the passing situation of the ball and To suppress a problem such as execution of a performance for suggesting that a ball passes through a specific ball path after the ball passes through the specific ball path due to deviation from notification timing of a specific performance mode. can be done.

In the gaming machine E1, the game machine E2 is characterized in that the specific effect mode notified by the effect notification means suggests that the ball passes through the specific position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, it is possible to correct the timing at which the effect suggesting that the ball passes through the specific position is notified according to the period during which the ball actually passes. , there is an effect that the production effect can be further enhanced.

The game machine E1 or E2 has a ball passage determining means for determining that a ball has passed a predetermined position on the upstream side of the specific position in the ball path, and the ball passage determining means determines whether the ball passes the predetermined position. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the predetermined condition is established when it is determined that the ball has passed through the .

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1 or E2, the notification timing preset based on the period from when the ball passes through a predetermined position to when it passes through a specific position in the ball path is provided. Since correction can be made based on the actual passage period of the ball, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine E3, the case where the ball passes through the predetermined position is shown as the trigger for the establishment of the predetermined condition. In addition to the method of detecting with a sensor), for example, a method of detecting that a regulating member that regulates the ball flowing down toward a predetermined position has changed from the regulating position to the release position that releases the regulation is conceivable. In this case, even if the regulating member is changed to the release position, the ball does not necessarily flow down toward the predetermined position immediately. It is preferable to use a method of providing retention means for retention and determining that the regulation member has changed to the release position in a state in which the ball is retained in the retention means. Even if such a method is used, it is possible to indirectly determine that the ball has passed through the predetermined position, and the same effect as that of the game machine E3 can be obtained.

In the gaming machine E3, the ball path has a first ball path provided with the specific position, and a second ball path branching from the first ball path in a section between the predetermined position and the specific position. A game machine E4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine E3, there is a possibility that the ball that has passed through the predetermined position will pass through the second ball path without passing through the specified position. There is an effect that it is possible to entertain the player and improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine E4, the ball path is divided into a first state in which the ball passing through the ball path is more likely to pass through the first ball path and a second state in which the ball is more likely to pass through the second ball path than in the first state. and whether the ball that has passed through the predetermined position is in a path state that allows it to pass through the first ball path based on the path state of the ball path that is varied by the variable means. and the effect notification means, when the path state determining means determines that the ball passing through the predetermined position is in a path state in which the ball can pass through the first ball path. Secondly, the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that it notifies the specific effect mode.

According to the gaming machine E5, when the ball can pass through the specific position, the specific effect mode is notified. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that it will be so, and that the performance effect can be enhanced.

Also, in this case, if the predetermined first period differs from the period actually spent for the ball to pass from the predetermined position to the specific position, even though the specific effect mode has been notified, This causes a problem that the ball does not pass through the first ball path frequently. Since the first period can be corrected, there is an effect that the reliability of the specific rendering mode can be increased and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

In any one of gaming machines E3 to E5, second ball passage detection means for detecting that a ball has passed a second specific position in the second ball path; a second period identifying means for identifying a second passing period from to the second passing period until detected by the second ball passing detecting means, wherein the period discriminating means includes the preceding passing period and the second passing period, and the A gaming machine E6 characterized in that it distinguishes between the first period and the first period.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the first period can be corrected using the period required for the ball to pass through the second path. It is possible to increase the amount of information for correcting the first period and improve the correction accuracy as compared with the case where the first period is corrected based only on the sphere obtained. Therefore, there is an effect that the reliability of the specific presentation mode can be increased, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the configuration of the gaming machine E6, it is preferable to provide the second specific position at a location that requires the same period as the period required for the ball to pass from the predetermined position to the specific position. As a result, the information on the transit period specified by the period specifying means and the information on the second transit period specified by the second period specifying means can be collected without distinction, and the control load can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to

Also, in the gaming machine E6, the period determining means uses both the passage period and the second passage period, but may be configured to use only the second passage period.

<Feature F Group> (Making it possible to operate multiple operation means with the same operation)
A first operation means operable by the player, a first determination means for determining that the first operation means has been operated, and a second operation means different from the first operation means operable by the player. An operation means, a second determination means for determining whether the second operation means has been operated, and an effect for executing a predetermined effect based on the result of determination by the first determination means or the second determination means. Execution means, in which interlocking means for variably operating said second operating means interlocking with the variable operation of said first operating means, and said interlocking means being coupled to said first operating means. variable control means for varying between an interlocking state in which the second operating means is interlocked and a release state in which the coupling state is released, wherein the variable control means activates the interlocking means when a predetermined condition is satisfied; The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it is variable to the interlocking state.

Here, some game machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a plurality of operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation effect is executed based on the operation of each operation means. (For example, JP-A-2006-55481).

In such a conventional gaming machine, the player operates the operation means corresponding to the effect among the plurality of operation means, so that the player is instructed to use the plurality of operation means. There is a problem in that it is necessary to select and operate the corresponding operation means, which reduces the motivation to operate the operation means. Further, by operating one operating means among a plurality of operating means, an effect corresponding to the operation to the one operating means is executed, so that an unexpected effect can be provided to the player. There was a problem that it was not possible to

According to the gaming machine F1, when the player operates the first operation means, either an effect based on the determination result of the first determination means or an effect based on the determination result of the second determination means is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the same effect as when a plurality of operating means are operated by operating only one operating means, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in motivation to operate the operating means. be.

In addition, when the first operation means is operated, since the performance based on the determination result of the second determination means can be executed, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, resulting in a performance effect. has the effect of increasing

In the gaming machine F1, the effect executing means, when the first operating means is operated in a state in which the interlocking means is changed to the interlocking state by the variable control means, is determined by the second determining means. The game machine F2 is characterized in that it executes the predetermined effect based on the result.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, by changing the interlocking means to the interlocking state, when the first operating means is operated, an effect based on the determination result of the second determining means is executed. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected presentation, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine F2, the first operation means and the second operation means are configured to be movable from a first position to a second position, and the first determination means and the second determination means are: It is determined that the corresponding first operating means or second operating means has moved to the second position, and the first operating means is moved from the first position to the second position. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the distance for moving the second operating means from the first position to the second position is shorter than the distance for moving.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2, the second operation means has a shorter distance until it is determined that the operation has been performed than the first operation means. In the interlocked state, it is possible to reliably execute an effect based on the determination result of the second determination means when the first operation means is operated. Therefore, there is an effect that an unexpected performance can be executed with a simple configuration.

The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the interlocking means is provided inside the gaming machine which is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the interlocking means is provided at a position that is difficult to see from the outside, making it difficult for the player to grasp the state of the interlocking means. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, a game area in which a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered ball, and a player based on the entry of the game ball. and the storage means is varied from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released based on the operation of the second operation means. a first state in which a ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specified ball entering means by being changed to the released state by the storage control means; A game machine F5 characterized by comprising a variable means capable of changing between a ball-entering means and a second state in which it is difficult to enter a ball.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the first operation means is operated, the retention control means may change from the retention state to the release state. On the other hand, there is an effect that a game with unexpectedness can be provided and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine F5, a timing setting means for setting the operation timing of the second operation means at which the ball discharged from the storage means is likely to enter the specific ball entering means, and the operation timing set by the timing setting means. a game machine F6, characterized in that it has an operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect for operating the first operation means based on.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F5, by operating the first operation means according to the operation presentation for operating the first operation means, it is possible to make the ball enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the operation presentation.

In the game machine F6, the operation effect is a effect in which operation timings for operating the first operation means are reported a plurality of times, and at least one of the operation timings reported a plurality of times is the timing setting means. A gaming machine F7, characterized in that the operation timing is set by.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, one of the plurality of operation timing notifications executed during the operation performance is the second operation means that makes it easy to enter the specific ball entry means. Since the operation timing can be suggested, the first operation means can be operated for all of a plurality of operation timings executed during the operation presentation. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

<Feature G group> (Prediction and notification of the state in which the movable valve is advantageous)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. G1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the game machine G1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball enters the specific ball entering means. It is structured so that it is easy to Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing at which the ball is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is lowered.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

In the gaming machine G1, the variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means includes at least a first period during which the variable means is likely to be in the first state, and and a second period during which the first state is unlikely to occur, and a period determining means for determining timing at which the first period is set as variable control of the variable means by the variable control means, and a period determining means for the period determining means. a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the timing at which the first period is set is determined by the game machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, by executing the specific performance, the player is made to understand that the first period in which the variable means is likely to be in the first state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

The game machine G2 has an advantage suggesting effect executing means for executing an advantageous suggesting effect suggesting an operation timing of the operating means that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is established, and the specific effect executing means The game machine G3 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed during a period from when the predetermined condition is established until the advantageous suggestive effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, it is possible to inform the player that there is a possibility that the current advantage-suggesting effect is being executed during the first period. There is an effect that the game can be motivated to play.

In the gaming machine G3, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect when the first period is set within the period in which the advantageous suggestive effect is executed. Machine G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, it is possible to inform the player that the current advantageous suggesting effect will be executed during the first period, so that the player can play the game more enthusiastically. There is an effect that it can be done.

In any one of the game machines G2 to G4, it has a storage determination means for determining that the storage means is storing balls, and the specific effect execution means at least determines whether the storage means is a ball by the storage determination means. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed when it is determined that the is stored.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G2 to G4, the specific effect is executed only when the balls are stored in the storage means, so that the player can actively operate the operation means. can be operated. In addition, since it is prohibited to execute the specific performance in a state in which no balls are stored in the storage means, the specific performance is executed unnecessarily, and the player grasps the variable pattern of the variable member. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines G2 to G5, a ball entering means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determining means for performing determination when a ball enters the ball entering means, and A performance executing means for executing an effect for suggesting a determination result by the determining means, and a privilege game executing means for performing a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result by the determining means is a specific determination result. The game machine G6 is characterized in that said specific effect executing means executes, as said specific effect, a specific fusion effect for notifying that the determination result by said determining means is said specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G2 to G5, it is possible to execute an effect combining the fact that the privilege game is executed and the fact that the first period is set, so that it is more advantageous to the player. It is possible to notify that a game state is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while having a sense of anticipation.

In any one of the game machines G2 to G6, the specific effect execution means changes the notification mode for notifying the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player suggested during the advantageous suggestive effect to a specific notification mode. A gaming machine G7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines G2 to G6, it is possible to notify the player that the first period is set according to the notification mode during the advantageous suggestive presentation, so that the presentation effect has the effect of increasing

<Characteristic H group> (Makes it possible to select the difficulty level of the release suggestion effect)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. H1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine H1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, it is entered into the specific ball entering means. easily configured. Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing at which the ball is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is lowered.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

Advantageous suggesting effect execution means for executing an advantageous suggesting effect suggesting the operation timing of the operating means that is advantageous to the player based on the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means in the gaming machine H1; a selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect executed by the advantageous suggestive effect executing means; and an effect for setting the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect based on the effect mode selected by the selecting means. A gaming machine H2 characterized by comprising mode setting means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the advantageous suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode selected by the player, so that the advantageous suggesting effect can be executed in the effect mode desired by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H2, the advantageous suggesting effect executed by the advantageous suggesting effect executing means can suggest the operation timing of the operating means that is advantageous to the player a plurality of times, and the effect mode setting means includes: Suggestion frequency setting means for setting the number of times of suggesting the advantageous suggesting effect based on the effect mode selected by the selecting means; and suggestion mode setting means for setting a suggestion mode.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, based on the presentation mode selected by the selection means, the number of suggestions and the suggestion mode of the advantageous suggestion presentation are set, so that the player is motivated. There is an effect that it is possible to make the selection of the selection means.

In the gaming machine H3, when the number of times of suggestion is set by the number of suggestions setting means to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, the suggestion mode set by the suggestion mode setting means is displayed in the first mode in which the player can visually recognize. Also, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the second mode, which is more difficult to see than the first mode, is easily set.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effects of the game machine H3, when the selection means selects an effect mode in which a large number of suggestions is set, the operation means is operated at an operation timing that is advantageous to the player. The second mode is set in which it is difficult to operate the . As a result, the effect mode corresponding to the number of suggestions less than the predetermined number of times is selected for the player, and the advantageous suggestive effect in which the first mode is likely to be set is executed. It is possible to select whether or not to select a performance mode corresponding to the number of times of suggestion equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, and to execute an advantageous suggestion performance in which the second mode is likely to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select an advantage-suggesting production suitable for his/her skill, and can be motivated to participate in the production.

In the game machine H3 or H4, when the number of suggestions equal to or greater than a predetermined number is set by the number of suggestions setting means, the number of suggestions less than the predetermined number of times is set by the suggestion mode setting means. A game machine H5 characterized in that a short interval is easily set as the interval at which the suggested mode is set by.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, when the selection means selects an effect mode in which a large number of suggestions is set, the effect mode in which the number of suggestions less than the predetermined number of times is set. Since a shorter interval is more likely to be set as the interval at which the suggestive mode is set than when is selected, the player can select an advantageous suggestive effect according to his/her own skill and participate in the effect willingly. It has the effect of being able to

In any one of the game machines H3 to H5, an operation content determining means for determining the operation content of the operating means while the advantageous suggestive effect is being executed, and the operation content determined by the operation content determining means are: A game machine H6 characterized by comprising a performance mode changing means for changing the performance mode of the advantageous suggestive performance to a special performance mode advantageous to the player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines H3 to H5, the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect is changed to a special effect mode advantageous to the player based on the operation contents of the operating means during the advantageous suggestive effect. , there is an effect that the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

In the game machine H6, the operation content determination means determines the number of times the operation means is operated at the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player. A game machine H7 characterized in that, when the number of operations reaches the predetermined number of times, the effect mode changing means changes the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect to the special effect mode.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of the game machine H6, the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect can be changed to a special effect mode that is advantageous to the player based on the number of times the operation means is operated at appropriate timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can operate the operating means more willingly.

<Feature Group I> (Valve operation monitoring on the sub side)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. I1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235). In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine I1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operation means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, it is entered into the specific ball entering means. easily configured. Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing at which the ball is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is reduced.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

The gaming machine I1 has main control means for executing game control, and slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, wherein the main control means Storage control means, the variable control means, and variable control information generation means for generating variable control information for notifying the control contents of the variable control means to the slave control means, wherein the slave control means , display means for executing a predetermined effect; variable information storage means for storing variable information corresponding to a predetermined variable pattern for which the variable means is variably controlled; variable control situation specifying means for specifying the variable control situation of the variable means based on the variable control information and using the variable information stored in the variable information storage means; It is characterized by having a performance setting means for setting a performance to be displayed on the display means based on a variable control situation, and a performance execution means for executing the performance set by the performance setting means. game machine I2.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, when executing an effect based on the variable state of the variable means variably controlled by the main control means, the slave control means is output from the main control means. Since the performance is executed based on the variable control information and the variable information stored in the variable information storage means of the slave control means, there is an effect that the control load of the main control means can be reduced. .

In the game machine I2, the variable control information generation means includes at least start timing information for starting the variable operation of the variable means in the variable control information generated first after the game machine is powered on. A gaming machine I3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, the variable control information generated first after the gaming machine is powered on includes the start timing information for starting the variable operation of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the accuracy of specifying the variable control state by the slave control means can be improved.

In the game machine I3, the main control means has operation start period setting means capable of setting a different period as an operation start period from when the game machine is powered on until the variable operation of the variable means is started. A gaming machine I4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3, it is possible to vary the period from when the gaming machine is turned on until the variable operation of the variable means is started. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game player from easily grasping the variable motion of .

In the gaming machines I2 to I4, the main control means includes storage means storing a plurality of variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means, and and initial variable pattern setting means for setting a variable pattern to be executed first from among the plurality of variable patterns, wherein the variable control means preselects the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means. The variable control information generating means sets at least the initial variable pattern setting means to the variable control information generated for the first time after the game machine is powered on. A gaming machine I5 characterized by including initial variable pattern setting information.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, even if the variable means is variably controlled so that a plurality of variable patterns are repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, the gaming machine Since the variable pattern to be executed first when the power is turned on can be set from a plurality of variable patterns, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the variable operation of the variable means. It has the effect of being able to Further, since the variable means is variably controlled so that a plurality of variable patterns are repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, there is an effect that the processing load of variable control can be reduced.

<Feature J Group> (A player can select an operation interval in an operation presentation for operating the operation means for a predetermined number of times)
A game area where balls can flow down; a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered balls; Ball means, operation means operable by a player, and storage control for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means. a first state in which the ball flowing out of the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the canceled state by the storage control means; A game machine characterized by comprising variable means capable of being changed to a second state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the means, and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. J1.

Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding a game ball hit onto a game board, and a game ball held in the holding device is released to a ball entrance by a player performing a releasing operation. There are some that have a configuration to flow down. (For example, JP-A-2006-95235).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing at which the game balls held in the holding device are to be dropped. Since it is not possible to differentiate the benefits given to the players, there is a problem that the player cannot be motivated to aim at the timing of performing the release operation, and the player's desire to play is reduced.

According to the gaming machine J1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball is entered into the specific ball entering means. easily configured. Thus, when game balls are stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at the timing at which the ball is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the willingness to play is reduced.

In addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) that can be variably moved between the protruded position and the retracted position by driving the electric drive source, the above-described variable means can be changed between the first state and the second state described above. A rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere may be used. Alternatively, a switching member may be used that switches the flowing direction of the next falling ball according to the falling ball without using an electric drive source.

Advantageous suggesting effect executing means for executing an advantageous suggesting effect suggesting the operation timing of the operating means that is advantageous to the player based on the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means in the game machine J1; a selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect executed by the advantageous suggestive effect executing means; and an effect for setting the effect mode of the advantageous suggestive effect based on the effect mode selected by the selecting means. A gaming machine J2 characterized by comprising mode setting means.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the advantageous suggesting effect is executed in the effect mode selected by the player, so that the advantageous suggesting effect can be executed in the effect mode desired by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine J2, the advantageous suggesting effect executed by the advantageous suggesting effect executing means notifies the operation timing of the operating means at predetermined intervals. , an interval setting means capable of setting a first interval and a second interval shorter than the first interval, wherein the selecting means selects at least the first A game machine J3 characterized in that it is possible to select a first effect mode corresponding to the interval and a second effect mode corresponding to the second interval.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by selecting the effect mode of the advantageous suggesting effect by the selection means, it is possible to change the length of the notification interval at which the operation timing of the operation means is notified. As a result, since the player can select an effect mode corresponding to the operation interval according to his or her skill, the player can actively participate in the effect using the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine J3 has display means for displaying the advantageous suggesting effect, and selection display control means for causing the display means to display a plurality of the effect modes selectable by the selection means as a selection screen, and the selection The game machine J4 is characterized in that the display control means causes the display means to display the notification intervals corresponding to the plurality of selectable presentation modes.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one effect mode can be selected by the selection means from among the plurality of effect modes displayed on the display means after grasping the reporting interval at which the operation timing of the operating means is reported. As a result, the player can easily select the effect mode in which the operation timing is notified at the intended notification interval, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided and the interest in the game can be enhanced. be.

In the game machine J4, the selection display control means displays frequency information indicating the number of times the operation timing of the operation means is notified, corresponding to the plurality of presentation modes. J5.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, one effect mode can be selected by the selection means from among the plurality of effect modes displayed on the display means after grasping the number of times the operation means should be operated. As a result, when the number of operations is small, the notification interval at which the operation timing of the operation means is notified is shortened, and when the number of operations is high, the notification interval at which the operation timing of the operation means is notified is lengthened. It is possible to make it easier to select a combined presentation mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning balls is provided. Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a holding device capable of holding game balls struck on a game board, and the game balls held in the holding device are made to flow down to a ball entrance by a player's releasing operation. Some have configurations. In this conventional type gaming machine, the player can determine the timing for the game balls held in the holding device to flow down. This has been intended to improve interest (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-95235).
However, further enhancement of interest is required.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, etc., and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of Technical Concept 1 comprises a game area in which balls can flow down, storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing entering balls, and a game ball entering the game area. specific ball entry means for giving advantageous benefits to the player based on the above, an operation means operable by the player, and a storage state in which the balls can be stored in the storage means based on the operation of the operation means. a storage control means for changing the storage state to a release state for releasing the storage state; and a second state in which it is difficult for the outflowing ball to enter the specific ball-entering means. and a control means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is, in the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, provided in the game area and allowing a ball to enter, and when a ball enters the ball entering means, Determining means for executing determination, effect executing means for executing an effect for suggesting the result of determination by the determining means, and a privilege game is executed based on the fact that the result of determination by the determining means is a result of specific determination. and a privilege game executing means, wherein the effect executing means executes a specific effect suggesting that it is time to operate the operating means when a predetermined condition is established.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, further comprising storage determining means for determining that the storage means stores balls, is stored is at least one of the conditions for satisfying the predetermined condition.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2 or 3, wherein the operation timing suggested by the specific effect executed by the effect executing means is the operation timing. At least one ball flowing out from the storage means is set to be movable to the variable means which is changed to the second state.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 2 to 4, wherein the effect execution means detects that the operation means is operated during a period in which the specific effect is being executed. Based on this, a notification effect is executed to notify information based on the result of determination by the determination means.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, there is provided a game area in which balls can flow down, storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing entering balls, Specific ball entry means for giving advantageous benefits to the player, operation means operable by the player, and the storage means is changed from a storage state in which the balls can be stored to the storage based on the operation of the operation means. A storage control means for changing the state to a released state for releasing the state; and a second state in which it is difficult for the outflowing ball to enter the specific ball-entering means; variable control means for variably controlling the variable means in accordance with a predetermined variable pattern; It has
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. Namely, a ball entering means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determining means for performing determination when a ball enters the ball entering means, and a determination result by the determining means are suggested. and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the performance execution means has a predetermined When the condition is established, a specific effect is executed to suggest that it is time to operate the operating means.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the condition for establishing the predetermined condition is that the storage means has a storage determination means for determining that the ball is stored, and that the storage determination means has determined that the storage means is storing the ball. is at least one of
As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball does not flow out from the storage means even though the operation means is operated at the operation timing suggested by the specific effect.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2 or 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the operation timing suggested by the specific effect executed by the effect execution means is such that at least one ball flowing out from the storage means is changed to the second state when the operation is performed at the operation timing. It is set so as to be movable up to the variable means.
As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the specific ball entering means.
According to the game machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of technical ideas 2 to 4, the following effects are obtained. That is, the effect execution means executes a notification effect of notifying information based on the determination result of the determination means based on the fact that the operation means is operated during the period in which the specific effect is being executed. .
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22b Second frame button (operation means)
64 1st ball entrance (ball entry means)
630 Specific General Entrance (Specific Entrance Means)
640 2nd ball entrance (ball entry means)
770 first storage device (storage means)
771 second storage device (storage means)
750 movable valve (variable means)
S1, S2 Storage determination means S1008 Storage control means S1009 Variable control means S2111 Effect execution means

Claims (5)

a play area in which the ball can flow down;
a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the entered ball;
a specific ball entry means that gives a player an advantageous privilege based on the entry of a game ball;
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
storage control means for changing the storage means from a storage state in which balls can be stored to a release state in which the storage state is released, based on the operation of the operation means;
A first state in which the ball flowing out from the storage means is easily entered into the specific ball entering means by being changed to the released state by the storage control means, and a first state in which the outflow ball is easily entered into the specific ball entering means. a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter a ball;
and variable control means for variably controlling the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. A ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball;
determining means for performing determination when a ball enters the ball entering means;
an effect execution means for executing an effect for suggesting the determination result by the determination means;
a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result,
2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein said effect executing means executes a specific effect suggesting that it is time to operate said operating means when a predetermined condition is established. Having storage determination means for determining that the storage means stores balls,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein determination by said storage determination means that said storage means stores balls is at least one of conditions for establishing said predetermined condition. The operation timing suggested by the specific effect executed by the effect execution means is the operation timing in which at least one ball flowing out of the storage means is changed to the second state when the operation is performed at the operation timing. 4. The game machine according to claim 2, wherein the game machine is set so as to be movable to the variable means. The effect executing means executes a notification effect of notifying information based on the determination result of the determining means based on the fact that the operation means is operated during the period in which the specific effect is being executed. 5. The game machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4.

Images